Vista Magnet MS Pool Modernization
BID PACKAGE: V19200043PWBR-1 Scope Description: General Construction
SCOPE OF WORK SUMMARY:
The scope of work includes, but is not necessarily limited to, furnishing all labor, materials, accessories, appliances, tools, equipment, facilities, transportation, applicable taxes and services necessary for, and incidental to, performing all operations in connection with the specification sections listed below, complete as indicated on the drawings and specifications or incidental to the requirements of this Bid Package Contractor and/or specified herein, unless specifically excluded.
The Following are the project Contract Documents are primary to this Bid Package:
Bid Package
Bid Package # V19200043PWBR-1 – General Construction
Plans – Vista Magnet MS Pool Modernization 10/16/18
Geotechnical Recommendations – Geotechnical Evaluation Proposed Retaining Wall Vista Magnet MS 4/16/2018
Project Manual #V19200043PWBR
Vista Magnet MS Pool Mod Site Utilization Plan
District Standards
Hazardous Material Survey
As-Builts
DSA – TI 103 – Testing and Inspection Requirements 04-116786_DSA103A
Construction Manager Supplemental Specifications
00 10 00 General Requirements 00 46 00 Post Bid Interview 01 21 00 Allowances 01 73 01 Final Clean 01 74 19 Construction Demolition Waste Management
Technical Specifications – Pool Modernization Vista Magnet MS dated 10-16-18
DIVISION 01 – General Requirements 01 10 00 Summary 01 20 00 Price & Payment Procedures 01 30 00 Administrative Requirements 01 30 25 Submittals Vista Unified School District Vista Magnet MS Pool Modernization Project No. V19200043PWBR-1 Bid Issuance Set Page 1 of 13
Vista Magnet MS Pool Modernization
01 32 16 Construction Progress Schedule 01 40 00 Quality Requirements 01 42 19 Reference Standards 01 46 00 Testing & Inspection Requirements 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities & Controls 01 60 00 Product Requirements 01 70 00 Execution & Closeout Requirements 01 70 70 Project Closeout 01 77 00 Cleaning 01 78 00 Closeout Submittals
DIVISION 02 – Existing Conditions 02 41 00 Demolition
DIVISION 03 - Concrete 03 05 05 Underslab Vapor Barrier 03 10 00 Concrete Forming & Accessories 03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcing 03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete
DIVISION 04 – Masonry 04 05 11 Mortar and Masonry Grout 04 27 31 Reinforced Unit Masonry
DIVISION 05 - Metals 05 52 13 Pipe and Tube Railings
DIVISION 07 – Thermal & Moisture Protection 07 90 05 Joint Sealers
DIVISION 09 - Finishes 09 90 00 Paints & Coatings – Exterior
DIVISION 10 – Specialties 10 14 00 Signage 10 28 00 Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories
Division 13 – Special Construction 13 11 00 General Requirements 13 11 01 Excavation 13 11 02 Concrete 13 11 03 Shotcrete 13 11 04 Ceramic Tile 13 11 05 Plaster 13 11 06 Equipment 13 11 07 Mechanical 13 11 08 Electrical 13 11 09 Waterproofing
Vista Unified School District Vista Magnet MS Pool Modernization Project No. V19200043PWBR-1 Page 2 of 13
Vista Magnet MS Pool Modernization
Division 22 – Plumbing 22 05 00 Common Plumbing 22 05 53 Identifications 22 11 16 Water Piping 22 40 00 Plumbing Fixtures
DIVISION 31 – Earthwork 31 10 00 Site Clearing 31 22 00 Grading 31 23 16 Excavation 31 23 16.13 Trenching 31 23 23 Fill
DIVISION 32 – Exterior Improvements 32 13 13 Concrete Paving 32 31 13 Chain Link Fencing and Gates
INCLUSIONS:
SPECIFIC INCLUSIONS FOR THE SCOPE OF WORK (including, but not limited to)
1.1 The Bid Package Contractor will be responsible for completing all work included in the contract documents including, but not limited to, the following summary.
DIVISION 01 – General Requirements (Includes All Specifications in Division 01) 1.2 The Bid Package Contractor is responsible for all general requirements in the Division 1 Specifications. 1.3 The Bid Package Contractor is responsible for all items included in the CM Supplemental Specifications including, but not limited to, furnishing two trailers for the IOR and CM including furniture and accessories, project sign, toilets and hand wash station, temporary power, dumpsters, construction fencing, 1 laborer per week, and all other requirements as specified in Section 00 10 00 General Requirements. 1.4 This Bid Package Contractor is responsible for making all ADA accessible path of travel upgrades as shown in the Contract Documents. 1.5 This Bid Package Contractor is responsible for patching/repairing all restroom surfaces affected by accessibility upgrades including, but not limited to tile, terrazzo, interior painting, drywall,etc.
DIVISION 02 – Existing Conditions (Includes All Specifications in Division 02) 1.6 Remove surface debris, existing asphalt and concrete paving, curbs, building foundations, building material, water lines, fencing, footings, abandoned utilities, abandoned irrigation lines, trees, palm trees, shrubs and root systems. Any hazardous ballast materials shall be properly handled and disposed of. 1.7 Remove and properly dispose of all surface and subsurface debris, abandoned utilities structures, pipes, conduits and all other items found below grade (requiring removal) within the grading limits or trench lines. 1.8 Any underground structures found (within grading limits) to be hazardous materials not identified in the abatement report must be properly removed by this contractor and placed
Vista Unified School District Vista Magnet MS Pool Modernization Project No. V19200043PWBR-1 Page 3 of 13
Vista Magnet MS Pool Modernization
in an area designated by the Construction Manager and covered for proper abatement by this Bid Package Contractor. 1.9 Maintain site drainage for the project and utilize existing storm drain system (as it comes on line) and sheet flow. Sandbags to be in conformance with Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan shall be provided by this bid package contractor as it relates to the performance of this Bid Package Contractor. 1.10 Protect existing utilities (that remain) from damage at all times. 1.11 Protect existing curbs, gutters and side walks adjacent to existing building and along the entire perimeter of site as required. 1.12 Provide and maintain clean up of all adjacent areas on a daily basis during the operations of this work. 1.13 Clear and grub site of plant life, vegetation, grass and surface debris as required by the contract documents. 1.14 Demolition procedures must be done in strict compliance with all CAL/OSHA Guidelines. 1.15 Backfill all open pits and holes caused as a result of demolition. If a trench/hole is required to be left open, cover with a trench plate. 1.16 The Bid Package Contractor shall be responsible for all hazardous waste removal as identified in the Haz Mat Report. In addition, this Bid Package Contractor shall provide all notices related to the removal of hazardous material including, but no limited to, the 10 Day Hazardous Notice to the Air Pollution Control Department. 1.17 The Bid Package Contractor shall provide all labor, material, and equipment required to abate and legally dispose off-site all hazardous material including, but not limited to, Asbestos Containing Materials (ACM), lead, and any other hazardous material affected by the work of the project and as indicated in all hazardous materials reports. 1.18 Conform to all applicable codes for abatement and demolition of structures, safety of adjacent structures, dust control and disposal of materials. Hazardous materials must comply with all federal, state and local regulations. 1.19 This bid package contractor shall prepare and implement, including reporting and documentation, of a Waste Management Plan for reusing, recycling, salvage or disposal of non-hazardous waste materials generate during demolition and/or new construction (Construction and Demolition (C&D) Waste), to foster material recovery and re-use and to minimize disposal in land fills in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications Section. 1.20 Provide all labor, material and equipment required to abate and legally dispose off-site all PCB Ballasts and Fluorescent Light Tubes affected by the work of the project. 1.21 The removal of underground pipes and/or remaining structures found during grading operations that are suspected to contain hazardous materials. DISTRICT’S environmental consultant will test suspect material to determine if it contains hazardous materials. If confirmed to contain hazardous materials, this Bid Package Contractor shall abate / remove and legally dispose of offsite. 1.22 Provide all coring, cutting, boring, epoxy, welding or grouting for own work as may be required for installation of work in this Package. 1.23 Any removal/demolition of existing concrete shall be joint to joint to lessen the appearance of patching and/or trenching. 1.24 Contractor responsible to provide 10 steel trench plates for the site access road and lay atop site utility or other lids/cap areas to prevent damage for the entire duration of the project. Contractor to walk and confirm locations with Construction Manager prior to placement of lids. 1.25 During the course of demolition certain items may be designated for salvage by the District. When notified by the Construction Manager that the District wishes to salvage an
Vista Unified School District Vista Magnet MS Pool Modernization Project No. V19200043PWBR-1 Page 4 of 13
Vista Magnet MS Pool Modernization
item, exercise due diligence in protecting the item during its removal. Any necessary disassembly of the item to facilitate its safe removal from the work area will be the responsibility of this Bid Package Contractor. 1.26 Uniformly rough grade and compact areas affected by demolition to maintain site grades and contours during the course of construction. 1.27 Provide erosion and sediment control measures by sandbagging the perimeter of the building / structure lines of demolition as required. 1.28 Provide cut, cap and relocation as required, of existing utilities, fixtures, and features within the scope assignment of this category. Coordinate with local services on removal and/or relocation of all components including (but not limited to) piping, cleanouts, valves, valve boxes and etc. Cap items and rough-ins behind plane of proposed improvements. Turn over any items requested for salvage by local jurisdictions. Dispose of all debris offsite, in a legal manner. 1.29 Contractor to cut, cap, and tie in the existing irrigation system to make sure the system to remain is operational after the demolition is complete. 1.30 Contractor shall research and review the Contract Documents, existing conditions and as- builts, to determine the full scope of work for relocation and redistribution of any and all utilities of this Category as indicated. Change orders will not be considered for the relocation of any items apparent on any document, as-built, or visible existing condition. Site visits are highly recommended. Site visits beyond scheduled job walk shall be scheduled with the Construction Manager 48 hours in advance. 1.31 Provide all cutting, temporary patching, including interior concrete, wall plaster, stucco, wood and wire lath, wood framing and window/door frames as required for the performance of this Category work. Prior to patching, provide a saw cut, clean straight edge at patch. Legally dispose of all debris generated during cutting and patching. This includes all hardscape demolition associated with site utilities (wet and dry). 1.32 This category contractor shall furnish and install all shoring necessary for the performance of the demolition work. 1.33 Patch, repair or replace all existing finishes, materials, fixtures, etc. intended to remain that are damaged due to the work of this Category Contractor. Restore all improvements to their existing conditions before work began, including, but not limited to hardscape, irrigation, landscape, sewer, water lines, electrical conduit, and bathroom remodel. Plants will be replaced like for like. 1.34 Furnish and install all containment, shower and dressing areas in accordance with Hazardous Material abatement regulations. Air and surface cleaning devices, materials and labor are required under this contract. Properly dispose of all hazardous materials, removed from the buildings, in the course of this contract. 1.35 Remove all pavement, concrete curbs, retaining walls, ramps, stairs, side walk, rails, fences, asphalt, partially removed buildings, sheds, etc… necessary for follow on trades to perform work per contract documents. 1.36 Clear and grub the site as indicated in the construction documents. Remove and grind roots of all trees or shrubs shown to be removed. Leave area grader smooth unless otherwise noted. 1.37 Furnish all labor, equipment and materials necessary to complete all demolition necessary for follow on trades to install new work. 1.38 Protect in place all existing utilities scheduled to remain. Take appropriate precautions when performing work in areas of existing utilities; refer to Contract Documents and as- builts. Any damage to known utilities will be repaired by this Contractor at no cost to Owner.
Vista Unified School District Vista Magnet MS Pool Modernization Project No. V19200043PWBR-1 Page 5 of 13
Vista Magnet MS Pool Modernization
1.39 Coordinate with other trades – areas of concrete, wall, plaster, masonry and roofing demolitions as shown in the contract documents. The trade contractors will provide these layouts in submittal form within 10 days of Contract start date. 1.40 Provide layouts showing saw cutting and flooring removal. 1.41 Contractor to provide all materials, labor and equipment for all abatement operations as noted in the HazMat Report. 1.42 All electrical, plumbing and conditioned air services will be safed off by their respective trade contractors falling under the General Construction Package. Coordination for the utility safing is the responsibility of the demolition Contractor. 1.43 Provide and maintain adequate dust control during all work within this category. 1.44 Contractor is to maintain safety barricades during all operations of this category. 1.45 All clean-up required based on Contractor’s operations shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. 1.46 Contractor shall take care while demolishing all existing finishes (i.e. – existing drywall, tile, terrazzo, plaster, concrete, flooring, etc.) to ensure all substrates to remain are free from damage. 1.47 Contractor to pull all City of Vista Permits including traffic control plans for scope of work in the City sidewalks and right away. 1.48 Contractor to send in the 10 Day APCD Notice and pay all fees associated on time to meet project starting date.
DIVISION 03 – Concrete (Includes All Specifications in Division 03) 1.49 Furnish and install ALL onsite and building concrete work, including, but not limited to, building pad, hardscape, sidewalks, curbs, swales, footings, and work as shown in the Contract Documents. 1.50 Furnish and install raised slabs, depressed slabs, flat work, housekeeping pads, bases, stem walls and curbs as required for equipment furnished by other contractors. This includes any and all concrete curbs or pads required (whether described specifically or not) to support any equipment shown on the Documents. Coordinate exact size, configuration, and location of this work with all Contractors involved. 1.51 Furnish and install all braces, brackets and support systems as required for the work of this Bid Package, unless noted otherwise. 1.52 Provide all coring, cutting, boring, epoxy, welding or grouting for own work as may be required for installation of work of this Package. 1.53 Coordinate all finished concrete elevations at doorways with the requirements of each opening’s respective threshold requirements. Coordinate with the General Construction Bid Package Contractor for finish hardware. Comply with all applicable ADA standards. If discrepancy exists with ADA over any elevation given on Contract drawings, bring to Construction Manager’s attention before any installation proceeds. Failure to do so may require removal or remedial action of said work at no cost to owner. 1.54 Install all items which embed into concrete, including, but not limited to, specialty anchor bolts, structural steel, miscellaneous steel, and post sleeves. Leave all embedded items in a clean condition, straighten all bolts, and set nuts to proper elevations. On site coordination meeting between trades will be required prior to setting other contractors work. 1.55 Furnish and install all sand, vapor barrier, and aggregate base under concrete for work of this Bid Package, as required per the contract documents.
Vista Unified School District Vista Magnet MS Pool Modernization Project No. V19200043PWBR-1 Page 6 of 13
Vista Magnet MS Pool Modernization
1.56 This Bid Package Contractor shall furnish and install reinforcing steel and mesh at flatwork, curbs, and mow curbs, as shown. This includes, but is not limited to, complete dowel assemblies at existing and new flatwork, as required. Smooth slab dowels to be provided at flatwork expansion joints and fiber will be added as required. 1.57 Furnish and install all concrete footings and reinforcing steel for all sections in this Bid Package’s scope of work per the contract documents. 1.58 Verify slab depressions with appropriate contractor before construction. If approved submittals contradict plans in this respect bring to Construction Manager’s attention before construction. Failure to verify depressions may result in removal or remedial action at no cost to Owner. 1.59 Furnish and install all dry-packing at base plates, structural and miscellaneous steel (unless noted otherwise), and all other components requiring the same. 1.60 Furnish and install any treated wood nailer and foam board embedded in concrete as noted in the contract documents. 1.61 Bid Package Contractor will be responsible for all grinding, bushing and patching at slab edges and curbs, regardless of fault, in order for exterior framing, sheathing, and plaster to be installed. 1.62 Bid Package Contractor to provide excavation, material and labor to ensure proper concrete embedment of hold down anchor bolts. 1.63 Provide level concrete slab foundation, including grinding and/or filling as required. See specifications for slab tolerances. 1.64 Provide a concrete washout area and washout bins for own work. Remove washout after completion of concrete activities. 1.65 Tooled joints, weakened plane joints, and expansion joints at all flatwork areas to be installed the contract documents. Joints at slab-on-grade to be approved by Project Architect prior to placement of concrete. 1.66 Coordinate with appropriate Plumbing and Electrical Bid Package Contractors for layout of structures/utilities in foundation slab prior to placement of concrete. Said structures to be furnished, located, and installed by respective Bid Package Contractors. 1.67 All utility trenches and/or excavations required for underground utilities (e.g.: sewer, gas, water, storm drain, electrical power, signal, communications, etc.) shall be engineered, staked, excavated (including de-watering & erosion control of same if and/or when required) backfilled & properly compacted to appropriate grade or sub-grade (with approved backfill & bedding materials – imported if necessary) by the respective Contractors requiring same. Concrete patch to be completed at all utility trenches by this Bid Package Contractor and will be required at all areas shown in the contract documents. 1.68 Protect all existing areas during construction and placement of paving.
DIVISION 04 – Masonry (Includes All Specifications in Division 04) 1.69 Furnish and install all masonry veneer and reinforced concrete masonry. 1.70 Provide all necessary appurtenances for installation of masonry veneer and reinforced concrete masonry. 1.71 Furnish and install all mesh reinforcing necessary for this scope of work. 1.72 Sandblast all masonry surfaces as may be needed and/or required. 1.73 Install and layout all items embedded in or resting on masonry as per the contract documents. 1.74 Maintain rebar caps on all exposed rebar. 1.75 Legally collect and dispose of all masonry block, brick, mortar, grout, waste and wash out.
Vista Unified School District Vista Magnet MS Pool Modernization Project No. V19200043PWBR-1 Page 7 of 13
Vista Magnet MS Pool Modernization
1.76 Coordinate with other contractors for layout of sleeves, boxes and blockouts in masonry walls. 1.77 Provide and install all necessary shoring for masonry openings or blockouts. 1.78 Remove an efflorescence, grout or mortar stains on masonry surfaces.
DIVISION 05 – Metals (Includes All Specifications in Division 05) 05 52 13 – Pipe & Tube Railings 1.79 Furnish and install all pipe and tube railings, handrails and guard rails complete. 1.80 Furnish and install all grab bars per contract documents.
DIVISION 07 – Thermal and Moisture Protection (Includes All Specifications in Division 07) 07 90 05 – Joint Sealers 1.81 Furnish and install joint sealers as required and as indicated in the Contract Drawings and Specification Section. 1.82 Includes surface preparation, backer rod, and accessories 1.83 All voids between frame and finish surfaces of items installed by this Bid Package Contractor shall be caulked. 1.84 Includes caulking around all door and window frames in contact with plaster, concrete, masonry or drywall surfaces at interior and exterior surfaces.
DIVISION 09 – Finishes (Includes All Specifications in Division 09) 09 90 00 & 09 91 00 – Paints and Coatings – Exterior & Interior 1.85 Provide all labor, materials and equipment required to complete the work related to the painting as indicated in the contract drawings and specification section 09 90 00. 1.86 Paint all exposed insulation if applicable. 1.87 Includes subsequent preparation of surfaces scheduled to receive paint inclusive of gypsum board surface preparation with patching materials for minor defects, joints, nail/screw heads, nicks, cracks, dents as required. Also includes plaster surface preparation with plaster patch of hairline cracks, small holes and imperfections as required and full prep for hollow metal doors and frames. 1.88 All shop and factory primed surfaces that are to receive painting under this section shall first be prepared as part of this bid package work. Clean, sand and scrape to remove loose primer, rust, debris, and all other imperfections, feather edge to make touch-up patches inconspicuous, clean surface as required, re-prime applicable areas as necessary and paint as specified. 1.89 Coordinate with all subcontractors as necessary to deliver all materials to the project site for back priming by this Bid Package Contractor prior to installation by the respective contractor. 1.90 Includes painting of mechanical, plumbing, and electrical equipment piping, conduit, and ductwork in all exposed areas, interior and exterior buildings and site. 1.91 Do not paint over labels or equipment identification markings, compressors, boilers, pumps, control panels, and all other items not intended for paint. 1.92 Furnish and apply water repellent coatings on all plaster, masonry or concrete per the plans and specifications. 1.93 Provide “mock-ups” and extra materials as required and as indicated in the contract drawings and specifications.
Vista Unified School District Vista Magnet MS Pool Modernization Project No. V19200043PWBR-1 Page 8 of 13
Vista Magnet MS Pool Modernization
1.94 Painting of the doors shall be done prior to installation. All sides and edges are required to be painted. All paint on doors and frames shall be done by spray or the use of a small tight roller. No brushes will be allowed. 1.95 Coordinate with steel supplier to ensure that all primer and paint for steel required items is compatible and can accept paint as needed by this Bid Package Contractor. 1.96 Includes final touch-up of painted surfaces after all contract work is substantially completed. This final touch-up paint shall be part of this bid package requirement. Obtain Construction manager approval prior to application of final touch up. 1.97 The Work of this Bid Package Contractor includes painting of all site items scheduled to receive paint, as required and as indicated in the Contract Drawings and Specification Section. 1.98 Paint exposed pipe at overflow drains at all locations. 1.99 Paint all patches at restrooms where modernizations occurred.
DIVISION 10 – Specialties (Includes All Specifications in Division 10) 10 14 00 – Signage 1.100 This Bid Package Contractor shall furnish and install but not limited to all signage devices related to the building's interior and exterior room and door signage, ADA accessibility signage, tactile exit signs, tactile restroom wall signs, directional and informational signage, loading signage, traffic signs, sign types, tactile signage media and accessories as required and as indicated in the Contract Drawings and Specification Section. 1.101 This Bid Package Contractor shall verify mounting height and locations, verify substrate surfaces are ready to receive work. 1.102 Install same size blank plates where signage is installed on glass surface or match interior side sign to exterior sign for a clean and even finish. 1.103 Furnish and install all exterior stainless steel building signage. 10 28 00 – Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories 1.104 This Bid Package Contractor shall furnish and install all toilet, bath and laundry accessories, trim and accessories as required and as indicated in the contract drawings and specifications. Including, but is not limited to, stainless steel grab bars, electrical hand dryers, electrical hair dryers, paper towel dispensers, soap dispensers, waste receptacles, partition-mounted seat covers dispenser, sanitary napkin disposal and toilet tissue dispenser, recessed sanitary napkin disposal and tissue dispensers, mop holders, utility shelves and float glass mirrors per all applicable codes and per the contract documents. 1.105 This Bid Package Contractor shall verify conditions before starting work. Verify exact location of accessories for installation. For electrically-operated accessories, verify electrical power connections are ready for and in correct location as required and as indicated in the contract drawings and specifications.
Division 13 – Special Construction (Includes All Specifications in Division 13) 1.106 Furnish and install all items and scopes of work included in but not limited to the Aquatic Design Sheets and Division 13 Special Construction Specifications. 1.107 Demo and remove all items as shown in the contract documents complete. 1.108 Furnish and install all concrete and shotcrete as shown in the contract documents. 1.109 Provide labor, materials and equipment as required to install wet mix shotcrete for swimming pool structures as indicated in the Contract Documents. 1.110 Provide labor, materials and equipment as required to install all concrete associated with swimming pool decks and structures as indicated in the Contract Documents.
Vista Unified School District Vista Magnet MS Pool Modernization Project No. V19200043PWBR-1 Page 9 of 13
Vista Magnet MS Pool Modernization
1.111 Provide labor, materials and equipment as required to install all reinforcing in concrete decks and structures as indicated in the Contract Documents. 1.112 Provide labor, materials and equipment as required to install sealant for all pool deck expansion joints, or any other caulking, as indicated in the Contract Documents. 1.113 Furnish and install all swimming pool ceramic tile as shown in the contract documents including, but not limited to, waterline face tile, gutter cap tile, lane line/target tile, depth marker tile, depth/ caution marker tile, and trim tile. 1.114 Furnish and install all swimming pool plaster and waterproofing as shown in the contract documents for a complete system. 1.115 Furnish and install all pool equipment and accessories as shown in the contract documents for a complete system including, but not limited to safety equipment, fittings, deck equipment, pumps, strainers, filtration, heaters, controllers, feed/storage systems, and eyewash/ showers. 1.116 Furnish and install all pool mechanical systems as shown in the contract documents for a complete system. 1.117 Furnish and install all Electrical systems as shown in the contract documents for a complete system. 1.118 Contractor is responsible for coordinating with and scheduling all Health Department Inspections. 1.119 Contractor is responsible for furnishing and installing all accessible lifts, life guard chairs, stanchion/post, and pool signage.
DIVISION 22 – Plumbing (Includes All Specifications in Division 22) 22 05 00 – Common Plumbing 1.120 Furnish and install all plumbing systems as indicated in the contract documents including, but not limited to, domestic water, sanitary waste and vent piping, facility storm drainage systems, condensate, and gas systems including all appurtenances necessary for a complete operating system. 1.121 This Bid Package Contractor shall verify conditions and schedules before starting work. 1.122 Provide sterilization, chlorination, flushing, and testing of all water system systems and assemblies to the satisfaction of the approving jurisdiction, and/or specification for all related work of this Bid Package. 1.123 All sleeves needed for the work of this contractor passing through any footings or walls shall be furnished and installed by this Contractor. Coordinate the installation with all applicable contractors. 1.124 Furnish and install all required thrust blocks or encasements as defined within these specifications and as shown on the plans. 1.125 Provide detailed and dimensioned layout drawings to all contractors requiring same, and physically lay out all penetrations and backing at the jobsite for all contractors requiring same in a timely manner so as not to delay work of any other bid package contractor. 1.126 This Bid Package Contractor is responsible for all penetrations required by the plumbing scope of work. 1.127 Furnish and install all backing and plates in a timely manner as required to properly install plumbing fixtures. 1.128 Furnish and install all required equipment ID signage. 1.129 Furnish and install all piping insulation as indicated or required. 1.130 Provide and install painting at all exposed items.
Vista Unified School District Vista Magnet MS Pool Modernization Project No. V19200043PWBR-1 Page 10 of 13
Vista Magnet MS Pool Modernization
1.131 Bid Package Contractor shall leave all existing utilities in service until the replacement utility lines are installed, completed and ready for connection to ensure the least amount of disruption. Coordinate any shutdowns with Construction Manager. 1.132 Furnish and install all braces, brackets, unitstruts, & support systems complete (including their attachment to the building structure, wood blocking, etc.) as required for this Bid Package Contractor’s work, including structural & miscellaneous steel items when detailed only on the Plumbing Drawings, or not specifically detailed but required. Plumbing attachments generically referred to on Architectural drawings shall be considered within the scope of the Plumbing Contractor. 1.133 Floor sinks shall be installed in compliance with health department requirements. 1.134 Furnish and install all water piping and drainage lines including shut off valves and make final connections to all laboratory equipment. 1.135 Install all trap primers to waste systems as defined within these specifications and plans.
DIVISION 31 – Earthwork (Includes All Specifications in Division 31) 1.136 This Bid Package Contractor shall provide all grading necessary to install the concrete per the contract documents and specified soils reports. The earthwork scope will include scarification, export, import and all compaction and moisture conditioning required to meet grades, relative compactions and slopes as per the contract documents and soils reports. Hand-digging is required where existing underground utilities have been identified. Any imported material must be DTSC certified prior to installation. The Contractor shall also provide the following: a. Provide and maintain adequate dust control during the scope of work for this Bid Package scope of work. Bid Package Contractor shall perform all required/requested repairs and/or corrections based on inspections performed by District’s independent consultant and/or Construction Manager. b. The Bid Package Contractor shall maintain site drainage and/or install temporary drainage as required for the project utilizing existing storm drain system. It is this Contractor’s responsibility to monitor drainage structures and implement mitigation measures as required for proper SWPPP and all requirements per the city of Vista. c. This Bid Package Contractor shall immediately repair all ruts, washouts, silted areas etc. created by wind or water in both on-site and applicable affected off-site areas to their previously existing condition as directed by the Construction Manger until completion of the scope of work of this Bid Package Contractor. d. Provide and maintain de-watering operation as required to minimize ponding of water immediately after rainfall has occurred in order to allow these areas to dry out as quickly as possible. Dewatering of trenches, utility and otherwise, of other Contractors shall be done immediately by that Contractor. e. The bid package contractor is responsible for all excavation and work associated with the recommended soils report. f. The Bid Package Contractor is to anticipate earthwork – tolerances as defined per the specifications, with excavation and recompaction as necessary, to bring site to appropriate elevations per the contract documents. g. The Bid Package Contractor will be responsible for all earthwork and grading per plan including, but not limited to, paved areas, cut or fill, flatwork areas, and paving subgrades. The above referenced grading shall include all required flow lines and contour changes. Dispose of any excess soils off-site in a legal manner if required.
Vista Unified School District Vista Magnet MS Pool Modernization Project No. V19200043PWBR-1 Page 11 of 13
Vista Magnet MS Pool Modernization
This Bid Package Contractor shall include a final grading operation prior to the installation of exterior finish surfaces including, but not limited to, all paved areas. 1.137 The Bid Package Contractor shall carefully backfill, and properly compact, all retaining walls and planter walls, stairs, ramps and concrete curbs using acceptable stockpiled native on-site soil when possible, or provide acceptable import material per the contract documents. Special care must be taken to avoid causing any structural or cosmetic damage to any wall or waterproofing. This Bid Package Contractor shall determine the need, then shall design, furnish and install adequate shoring prior to backfilling any wall. 1.138 This Bid Package Contractor shall provide additional rough grading around buildings after all trades and site elements have been installed prior to concrete or finish surface installation. Fine grading will not be accepted prior to all site elements being installed. To accomplish this task, multiple move-ons will be required. 1.139 This Bid Package Contractor shall determine the need, then shall design, engineer (stamped by a structural engineer licensed in the State of California), and furnish and install temporary shoring for any construction by this Bid Package Contractor for the resistance to gravity, wind and/or seismic loading until permanent structural elements have been completed. 1.140 This Bid Package Contractor shall as-built all work on project record set of drawings (“as- builts”). New utilities to be recorded by respective Bid Package Contractors. Approval of documentation to be obtained by project Inspector of Record. Completed as-builts to be turned over at project completion with closeout submittals. 1.141 Repair/replace all landscaping and irrigation (including wiring) damaged during construction. Site survey of utility functions responsibility of Contractor prior to start of work. 1.142 Provide all onsite rough & fine grading, excavation, sub excavation, over excavation, backfill, grading to within +/- 1/10’ foot (to balance), compaction, and earthwork as required on this project. Provide compaction per plans and specifications. All building pads to be graded to sub-grade within +/-1/10’ foot (to balance). Includes sub grade for areas receiving asphalt, concrete, curbs, gutters, swales, turf and planter areas, and sub-grade for all depressed and raised areas in the building pad areas. 1.143 Include in this bid package minor earthwork – defined as +/- 3/10’ foot’ to balance, with scarification and re-compaction as necessary to bring sub-grades to required elevations at all utility trenches and other rutted locations due to construction activities during the course of the project. 1.144 Provide all grading restoration to damaged areas and immediately repair all ruts and silted areas created by wind and water in both on-site and off-site areas to their previously graded condition as directed by the Construction Manager until completion of the scope of the work of this Bid Package Contractor. 1.145 Fine grade each area where landscaping remains to +/- 1/10’ of a foot to balance of the finish grades. 1.146 Lost and/or damaged survey stakes by this bid package contractor and the associated cost for replacement of same shall be the responsibility of this bid package contractor. 1.147 All excess spoils generated by trenching/excavating shall be removed and legally disposed off-site on a daily basis. 1.148 Includes dewatering trenches to continue work and as not to delay the project.
DIVISION 32 – Exterior Improvements (Includes All Specifications in Division 32) 32 13 13 – Concrete Paving
Vista Unified School District Vista Magnet MS Pool Modernization Project No. V19200043PWBR-1 Page 12 of 13
Vista Magnet MS Pool Modernization
1.149 Furnish and install all concrete sidewalks and joint sealants complete per the Contract Documents. 1.150 Furnish and install all concrete ramps, stairs, walls, mow curbs, etc. 32 31 13 – Chain Link Fencing and Gates 1.151 Furnish and install chain link fence system, including but not limited to, pickets, rails, posts, gates and hardware per Contract Documents. 1.152 Furnish and install all chain link fences, post sleeves, complete with placement drawings. Provide deepened edges in concrete as required for sleeves. All post sleeves which install in masonry shall be installed only in cores of the block. 1.153 Furnish and install all permanent chain link fencing and gates including installation of all specified and indicated hardware and appurtenances necessary for a complete system. 1.154 Furnish and install a permanent double vehicle gate with posts and hardware at the existing laydown area as shown in the Site Utilization Plan that connects with the existing fence.
2.0 SPECIAL NOTES FOR THIS BID PACKAGE
2.1 Contractor for this scope of work shall include a $175,000 Owner Unspecified Allowance to be used for unforeseen conditions and at the discretion of the District. See Construction Manager Supplemental Specification Section 01 21 00.
NOTE: All of the work in this section MUST be included in the GENERAL CONSTRUCTION BID PACKAGE NUMBER V19200044PWBR-1 unless specifically excluded herein. CONTRACTOR MUST EXAMINE ALL OTHER SPECIFICATION SECTIONS, DRAWINGS, AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS for related work that may be specified or shown on drawings and required to be included as work under this section.
This Bid Package summary supplements and complements the Plans, Specifications, and the balance of the project documents, hereafter referred to as Contract Documents and in no way supersedes any information contained in the Contract Documents unless specifically stated.
It is the responsibility of each bidder to fully familiarize himself with the entire Summary of Work for all Bid Packages, as the individual Specifications Sections interface throughout the project and thus impact all Bid Package Contractors.
END OF THIS SECTION
Vista Unified School District Vista Magnet MS Pool Modernization Project No. V19200043PWBR-1 Page 13 of 13
SECTION 01 73 01
FINAL CLEAN
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Bid Package Contractor V19200043PWBR-1 shall provide final cleaning for the interior and exterior of all new and remodeled buildings, restrooms, pool area and site.
1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The Conditions of the Contract and other section of Division 01 apply to this section as fully as if repeated herein.
B. Project Schedule shall be reviewed for Phasing.
1.03 DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide adequate manpower to complete work in multiple buildings concurrently as indicated in the Bid Schedule. Review cleaning and maintenance instructions for installed material prior to cleaning. B. Furnish all labor, material and equipment to complete all final cleaning of the work as described in the contract documents. C. Sweep paved areas broom clean and Powerwash all exterior concrete sidewalks, curbs, asphalt, parking lots. Remove stains, spills and other foreign deposits. D. Final interior cleaning prior to architect's Punch walk and for Owner occupancy shall consist of full and thorough cleaning using appropriate non-marring cleaners for all areas of the building, all accessible equipment and all visible building components. All protective coverings and coatings shall be removed along with adhesive residues. All concrete and tile floors shall be mopped and left free of water or cleaner residue. Glass and painted surfaces shall be cleaned free of fingerprints, smudges and non-code-required labels and stickers. Machine scrub ceramic flooring. Clean all thresholds. Clean all millwork. Clean horizontal surfaces. Dust and wipe down walls. Clean all restrooms, showers and pool equipment complete. Clean all furniture. E. Fire cabinets cleaned inside and out. F. Complete/detailed vacuum and spot removal of all wall-coverings throughout the building. G. Clean all closets including janitor closets, mop sinks, plumbing fixtures and floor sinks. H. Wax all VCT and sheet vinyl. Use proper products per specification and manufacturer requirements. I. All ceramic tiles and terrazzo wiped clean using special cleaning materials for best reflection (shining armor). J. All toilet partitions and accessories wiped clean. K. N/A Vista Unified School District Final Clean VMMS – Pool Modernization 01 73 01
Project No.V19200043PWBR Bid Issuance Set Page 1 of 2
L. Clean and polish transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows including frames. M. Restore reflection surfaces to their original reflection condition. N. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. Remove excess lubrication and other substances. O. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition. P. All shades, storefront, rolling shutters and coiling doors wiped down inside and out. Q. General roof clean-up. R. Clean tops, sides and bottoms (if accessible) of equipment. S. Remove labels that are not permanent. Do not remove permanent labels (UL, WH, etc.) T. Wipe clean any exposed duct, pipe and conduit. U. Exterior cleaning shall include washing all windows, exposed metal and stone surfaces, removing any stains from exterior plaster, wash down of roof equipment wells and cleaning roof mounted equipment and all rain gutters shall be cleared of any obstructions. V. One (1) pre-punch clean prior to Architect's punch walk and one (1) final clean prior to Owner occupancy. W. Clean all windows and mullions interior and exterior. Remove drywall texture where required. X. Clean all restrooms complete including all plumbing fixtures, electrical fixtures, toilet partitions and accessories. Remove any and all temporary protection and labels not required to remain. Clean and shine hardware. Clean all mirrors. Clean all floor and wall tile. Y. Sweep and mop all floors. Z. Vacuum all carpeted areas and wipe base. Spot clean carpet as needed. AA. Clean all casework and cabinetry inside and out. BB. Clean all doors, jambs and hardware. Remove drywall texture where required. CC. Clean all exit signs and fire extinguisher cases. DD. Clean all plumbing fixtures, lighting fixtures and any other wall or ceiling mounted fixtures/devices. EE. Clean interior of wheelchair lift. FF. Remove temporary floor protection. GG. Dust walls and wall coverings. HH. Clean all vinyl tack panel. This includes heavy cleaning to remove stains. II. Clean all countertops. JJ. Clean all interior and exterior light fixtures. KK. Clean exposed piping as required. LL. Provide additional touch up cleaning as required prior to owner occupancy. Bid Package Contractor shall include final touch-up of stained plaster at Building exteriors due to weather, soil staining, or any other staining seen on Buildings. MM. Clean all other permanent items shown in the plans. NN. Power wash all exterior hard surfaces around buildings that contain work on the project. OO. Multiple move-ons as required for the phased schedule to achieve final cleaning scope of work. END OF SECTION
Vista Unified School District Final Clean VMMS – Pool Modernization 01 73 01
Project No.V19200043PWBR Bid Issuance Set Page 2 of 2
SECTION 00 46 00
POST BID INTERVIEW
1.01 SUMMARY
This Section requires each apparent low bidder to attend and participate in a POST BID INTERVIEW with the CONSTRUCTION MANAGER, prior to award of any contract by the DISTRICT. The POST BID INTERVIEW will be scheduled by the CONSTRUCTION MANAGER after the date of bid. The Conditions of the Contract and all other Sections of the Contract apply to this Section as fully as if repeated herein.
1.02 REQUIRED ATTENDANCE
A. A duly authorized representative of the apparent low bidder is required to attend the POST BID INTERVIEW, in person.
B. The apparent low bidder’s authorized representative must have signatory authority on behalf of the apparent low bidder. If apparent low bidder is a corporation, bring corporate seal to the POST BID INTERVIEW.
C. Failure to attend the POST BID INTERVIEW will be considered just cause for the District to reject the Bid.
1.03 POST BID INTERVIEW PROCEDURE
A. The CONSTRUCTION MANAGER AND DISTRICT will review the Bidder’s Proposal with the attendees.
B. The CONSTRUCTION MANAGER will review the following with the attendees, including but not limited to:
1. Insurance 2. Bonding 3. Addenda 4. Pre-Bid Clarifications 5. Scope of Work (Specification Section 01 1000) 7. Value Engineering 8. The Contract Plans 9. The Contract Specifications 10. The Master Schedule 11. Critical Materials 12. General Contract Schedule Requirements 13. Prevailing Wage Requirements 14. Critical Dates Requirement 15. Liquidated Damages
Vista Unified School District POST BID INTERVIEW VMMS – Pool Modernization
SECTION 00 46 00
Page 1 of 10
16. Required Documentation for Contract Administration 17. Contract Coordination Requirements 18. DVBE Requirements 1.04 POST BID INTERVIEW DOCUMENTATION
The CONSTRUCTION MANAGER will document the POST BID INTERVIEW on the form attached to this Section. Both the Apparent Low Bidder and the CONSTRUCTION MANAGER are required to sign the POST BID INTERVIEW Documentation. Signatures will be witnessed at the time of signing. The POST BID INTERVIEW Documentation is a Contract Document, and all items recorded in the POST BID INTERVIEW Documentation are part of the Contract and shall be enforced accordingly. POST BID INTERVIEWS will be conducted at the CONSTRUCTION MANAGER’S office or DISTRICT'S OFFICES.
SEE QUESTIONAIRE STARTING
ON NEXT PAGE
Vista Unified School District POST BID INTERVIEW VMMS – Pool Modernization
SECTION 00 46 00
Page 2 of 10
CONSTRUCTION MANAGER
Erickson-Hall Construction Co., Inc. 500 Corporate Drive Escondido, CA 92029
PHONE: (760) 796-7700 FAX: (760) 796-7750
BIDDER: ______
Authorized Signer______
Title of Authorized Signer______
Email of Authorized Signer______
DATE: ______TIME: ______PHONE #
I. INTRODUCTIONS: (SIGN IN BELOW)
A. Present ______CONTRACTOR CONTRACTOR ______
______VUSD Representative VUSD Representative ______CONSTRUCTION MANAGER CONSTRUCTION MANAGER
II. PROPOSED CONTRACT:
A. Bid Category: ______
B. Proposed Contract Amount: $______
III. PURPOSE OF INTERVIEW IS TO ASSURE:
A. Contractor acknowledgment of a complete and accurate bid.
B. Contractor submission of a fair and equitable bid.
C. Fair comparisons of bid.
1. Contractor will honor bid amount regardless of how bid compares to the second low bidder.
Vista Unified School District POST BID INTERVIEW VMMS – Pool Modernization
SECTION 00 46 00
Page 3 of 10
IV. CONTRACTUAL REQUIREMENTS:
A. Do you understand you are a prime contractor? Yes No
B. Can you meet all specified insurance requirements? (Reference General Conditions and Special Conditions Article E of the Project Manual)
Yes No
C. You are required to obtain a Performance, and a Labor and Material Bond for 100% of the Contract price
1. Is this acceptable? Yes No
2. Will you provide bonds as stipulated? Yes No
3. Is the cost of the bond in your base bid? Yes No
4. Is your insurance company California licensed? Yes No
D. Acknowledged Receipt of Pre-Bid Clarification Questions Yes No
E. Are all costs for addenda items included in your proposal (if applicable)? Yes No
V. SCOPE OF WORK:
A. You have a complete understanding of your Bid Category Scope of Work under the proposed Agreement and as indicated in Section 01 1000 Summary of Work Yes No
To include but not be limited to:
1. Coordination of work with all parties. Yes No
2. Secure and pay for all fees and permits as applicable to the work of this Bid Category. Yes No
3. Provide security for the work associated with this Bid Category. Yes No
4. Understanding of project working hours. Yes No
5. Acknowledge potential to perform work at nights or on weekends to accommodate schedule. Yes No
Vista Unified School District POST BID INTERVIEW VMMS – Pool Modernization
SECTION 00 46 00
Page 4 of 10
6. Includes all/any required weather protection. Yes No
7. Includes compliance with requirements for indoor construction air quality and construction waste management. Yes No
8. Temporary facilities as required for the work of this Bid Category. Yes No
9. Temporary sanitary facilities for the work of all bid Category. Yes No
10. Site logistics plan and coordination with subcontractors. Yes No
11. Substitution “or equal” for consideration were submitted at closing of bid. Yes No 12. Temporary site conveyance, fuel, and secure storage. Yes No
13. Repair of vandalism and graffiti Yes No
14. Daily cleanup of all areas associated with this Bid Category. Yes No
15. Final cleaning. Yes No
16. Provide full time superintendent for the duration of the project. (Project Manual, General Conditions, Article No.4.4.3) Yes No
17. Mandatory attendance at weekly coordination meetings. Yes No
18. Acknowledge proper work attire and safety requirements. as stated in the contract documents. Yes No
19. Contractor understands the distinctions and the limitations and responsibilities between on-site and off- site and the Building Limits. Yes No
20. All layout associated with the work of this Bid Category. Yes No
21. Excavation, filling, backfilling, compaction, soil treatment for termite control. Yes No
23. Includes any required dewatering. Yes No
Vista Unified School District POST BID INTERVIEW VMMS – Pool Modernization
SECTION 00 46 00
Page 5 of 10
32. Includes all firestopping, caulking and sealants. Yes No
33. Includes all Electrical and Fire Alarm Systems. Yes No 33. Includes all patching of walls, ceilings, and floors where devices and equipment have been removed.
Yes No 34.
Includes Ninyo and Moore Soil Investigation Report as reference, SWPPP as required by the State Water Authority, Western Environmental Asbestos Report, and the Current Asbestos Locations. Yes No
B. You have re-reviewed the documents and understand the Scope of the Work. Are there any items that need to be identified or require clarification? Yes No
If yes, please identify item.
1. ______
2. ______
3. ______
4. ______
5. ______
Is (are) the cost(s), as applicable, included in your proposal items? Yes No
C. Review bid alternatives (Not applicable)
ALTERNATE #1 – N/A
No
Vista Unified School District POST BID INTERVIEW VMMS – Pool Modernization
SECTION 00 46 00
Page 6 of 10
Yes
D. Review Allowances
Contractor understands that the allowance is to be used at the sole discretion of the District. Yes No
Contractor understands that any remaining allowance will be refunded to the District at the completion of the project. Yes No
D. Are you offering any unsolicited alternates or substitutions as Yes No part of bid?
1. ______
2. ______
E. Are the plans and specifications clear and understandable to your satisfaction? Yes No
VI. SCHEDULE:
A. Do you acknowledge and agree to the stipulated completion dates and milestones in the Contract? Yes No
B. Do acknowledge and agree to the stipulated phasing plan issued within the contract documents? (Not applicable) Yes No
C. You understand that the “Site Utilization Plan” and the “Project Schedule” are tentative and that the Construction Manager reserves the right to modify the phasing and/or schedule as necessary to accommodate the work of the project. Yes No
D. Do you acknowledge and agree to the requirements to provide a designated project superintendent and project scheduler/manager for the duration of the project who will attend weekly schedule meetings (in addition to weekly coordination meetings) and associated backcharge for failure to attend? Yes No
E. Will you comply with the schedule requirements for deliverables as required by section 01 32 20 Project Construction Schedule? Yes No
Vista Unified School District POST BID INTERVIEW VMMS – Pool Modernization
SECTION 00 46 00
Page 7 of 10
F. Do you understand that Bid Package Contractor #1 will be producing the CPM schedule and will be used as the basis for approving all Progress Payments? Yes No
G. It is understood the Project schedule is critical. Can you accelerate any and all schedule activities if the requirement occurs? Yes No
If not, what must change and why? ______
______
______
______
______
H. Identify critical materials, deliveries and dependencies, including Owner Furnished items that could affect the completion of your work.
1. ______
2. ______
3. ______
4. ______
5. ______
I. You have reviewed Section 01 32 16, CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE and Section 01 10 00, SUMMARY and you understand your work must be completed in accordance with the timeline identified in the Special Conditions. You further understand the District MAY assess liquidated damages if you fail to meet the Schedule timeline requirements. You further understand delays by you may cause District’s vendors to be delayed, and that you WILL accelerate your work upon written direction by the CONSTRUCTION MANAGER. Yes No
CRITICAL DATES
Vista Unified School District POST BID INTERVIEW VMMS – Pool Modernization
SECTION 00 46 00
Page 8 of 10
PROJECT DURATION 173 consecutive calendar days
Projected Milestone Dates Notice to Proceed Pending Board Approval Provide Schedule of Values 10 days from Contract Award Critical Submittals 5 days from Notice to Proceed All Submittals received by Construction Manager 10 days from Notice to Proceed All Samples received by Construction Manager 10 days from Notice to Proceed All Shop Drawings received by Construction Manager 10 days from Notice to Proceed Mobilize Per published schedule
You agree that failure to meet the date is just cause for the DISTRICT to assess and retain Liquidated Damages in accordance with the Contract Documents.
VII. CONTRACTOR COMMENTS / SUGGESTIONS:
1. ______
2. ______
3. ______
4. ______
5. ______
VIII. CONTRACTOR
NOTE: You agree the information contained herein is part of your contractual obligations. Your signature acknowledges your agreement to perform all work discussed herein. By executing the contract for this work, you agree to perform this work and acknowledge that the work is required by the contract and abide by all requirements of the contract.
You understand that the Post Bid Interview is a tool used by the District and the Construction Manager for the purposes of evaluating your bid for completeness prior to entering into a formal agreement. This document does not relieve the contractor from providing or performing any work specifically identified in the contract documents as pertaining to this Bid Category. Identification by the contractor of specific work not included in the bid price may result in disqualification of the bid.
Vista Unified School District POST BID INTERVIEW VMMS – Pool Modernization
SECTION 00 46 00
Page 9 of 10
The foregoing information is true and accurate, and I am authorized to sign as an office of the company I am representing.
Company Name
______
Signature: ______Title: ______
Date: ______
Vista Unified School District
Signature: ______Title: ______
Date: ______
Construction Manager
Signature: ____ Title:______
Date:
END OF SECTION
Vista Unified School District POST BID INTERVIEW VMMS – Pool Modernization
SECTION 00 46 00
Page 10 of 10 SECTION 00 10 00
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Submittal Exchange
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Bid Package Contractor is responsible for own assessment of security needs within and around site boundaries and to maintain sufficient security and safety measures to effectively prevent vandalism, vagrancy, theft, arson, and all other such negative impacts to own work. Any impacts to the progress of the work due to loss from inadequate security and safety measures, will be the responsibility of the Contractor.
1.2 Bid Package Contractor to mean Bid Package Contractor V19200043PWBR-1.
1.3 The method of correspondence for all Bid Package Contractors shall be Submittal Exchange. Each Bid Package Contractor shall create a Submittal Exchange account, which is a web based program. A meeting to discuss the Submittal Exchange process will be scheduled prior to submittal submission. 1.4 This Bid Package Contractor, by submitting a bid, is acknowledging that he/she has made a thorough inspection of this project site and that Contractor has made a detailed comparison between the existing conditions on the site and those indicated within the Contract Documents.
1.5 Bid Package #1 shall be responsible for pouring all concrete housekeeping pads, inside and outside, for all Bid Package Contractors requiring housekeeping pads. Bid Package Contractors requiring housekeeping pads shall coordinate with Bid Package #1.
1.6 Provide all submittals including product data, shop drawings, samples, deferred submittals, schedules, and any other documentation required for approval required by the project documents and architect to assure long lead times do not affect the scheduled work. The Bid Package Contractor shall provide a list of long lead material and equipment and expected lead times for scheduling purposes. In addition, all required architectural selections (i.e. colors, material, finish, texture, etc.) embedded in the submittal must be specifically tabbed and highlighted within the submittal and also noted on the transmittal page. In the event no option is chosen by the architect, the prime contractor shall submit an RFI for clarification. All Bid Package Contractors shall review Specification Section 01 01 00 – Summary of Work, Section 4.02 for Liquidated Damages relative to submittals.
1.7 A procurement log will be sent out by the CM and all Bid Package Contractors are required to fill out the procurement log with the most up to date information for the complete scope of work.
1.8 A post-bid review will be required for all the specified Low Bid Package Contractors listed below, which will be conducted at the District Office. See Construction Manager Supplemental Specification Section 00 46 00 – Post Bid Interview. Low Bid Contractor shall bring to the meeting the questionnaire included in the Specification Section 00 46 00 filled out and ready to discuss and the completed DVBE packet. This is a mandatory
Vista Unified School District VMMS – Pool Modernization Project No. V19200043PWBR Page 1 of 10
RBV – Gym Expansion
meeting for the low bidder of each bid package. The meeting will take place the day after the bid. Times are to be determined:
Bid Package #1 – General Construction June 5, 2019
1.9 Low Bid Package Contractors that are not required to attend the Post Bid Interview shall turn in their DVBE packet no later than one day after the bid.
1.10 This Bid Package Contractor will have a foreman/superintendent attend and participate in mandatory weekly coordination meetings as scheduled by the Construction Manager. In these meetings, the foreman/superintendent will be prepared to discuss coordination and scheduling of their bid package work as it relates to other bid package contractor’s work. Failure of Contractor’s representative to attend scheduled weekly mandatory Progress Meetings will result is a $100 backcharge to Contractor for each missed meeting unless specifically excused by the Construction Manager.
1.11 For all Bid Package Prime Contractors performing trenching, backfilling, and grading operations, base bid shall include obtaining and paying for all governmental agencies, utility company permits, licenses and fees required in accordance with Specification Section 00700 General Conditions, Article No.47 for the performance of the work as applies to this Bid Package Contractor during trenching, backfilling and grading operations such as traffic control permits and haul route permits. All cost associated with the permits shall be the responsibility of this Bid Package Contractor.
1.12 Pursuant to Article 4.14 of the General Conditions, during the Work, Bid Package #1 Contractor shall provide/furnish two separate and secured office trailers for use by the Project Inspector (IOR) and Construction Manager (CM). The IOR trailer shall be 8’x10’ and the CM trailer shall be 12’x60’ with two offices and a conference room. The IOR office shall contain at least: electricity, secured internet access, one (1) desk with at least four (4) drawers, one (1) office chair, one (1) file cabinet with at least four (4) drawers, two (2) guest chairs, one (1) table at least 30”x60”. The CM trailer shall contain at least: electricity, secured internet access, three (3) desks each with four (4) drawers, three (3) office chairs, two (2) file cabinets with at least four (4) drawers, a conference room with a table and matching chairs to accommodate ten (10) people, two (2) 4’x6’ dry erase markerboards and one (1) 4’x6’ tackboard. Bid Package #1 shall provide the Facilities/Services for the Project Inspector pursuant to Article 44 of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, and Specification 01 50 01 – Temporary Facilities and Controls. During the Work, the Contractor shall provide/furnish separate and secured offices for use by the Project Inspector (IOR). See Specification Section 01 5000 – Temporary Facilities and Controls for additional requirements. Bid Package Contractor shall be responsible for the removal of the trailers and its contents at the end of the project.
1.13 Bid Package #1 shall provide a project sign, which shall include furnishing and installing a 4’x5’ sign containing the project information and installed in the ground on posts and footings, if necessary, large enough to support the 4’x5’ sign in a location designated by the Owner and Architect.
1.14 Bid Package Contractor #1 shall provide eight (8) toilets, two (2) of which are to be dedicated for female use only and three (3) hand wash stations (exterior for the men’s
Vista Unified School District VMMS – Pool Modernization Project No. V19200043PWBR Page 2 of 10
RBV – Gym Expansion
toilets) for the duration of the project, including a minimum of twice weekly service, which may be increased if deemed necessary by Construction Manager to support health code and/or Cal OSHA requirements and to adequately serve the workforce on any given day for the duration of the project. All dedicated female toilets shall be flushable, premium toilets and shall have a separate hand wash station in the female units and the toilets shall be furnished with a combination lock. Ensure that temporary sanitary facilities are located adjacent to or within 200 yards of any work area and immediately adjacent to all site trailers. Deviation to this requirement can only be modified by written approval of the Construction Manager. Removal of these facilities at the end of the project will be the responsibility of this Bid Package. See Specification Section 01 50 01 – Temporary Facilities and Controls for additional requirements.
1.15 A general overview schedule will be provided in the bid documents and is subject to change. This general schedule is for bidding purposes only and will be replaced by the approved CPM Schedule.
1.16 Bid Package #1 shall provide a detailed CPM project schedule and the work shall be scheduled within the timeline identified in the Special Conditions. Schedule activities, durations and the overall schedule will be reviewed and approved by the CM. Bid Package #1 is required to submit weekly updates of the CPM schedule for review by the CM. Based on that CPM schedule, the Bid Package Contractors shall be required to participate in Pull Planning.
1.17 All Bid Package Contractors shall be required to participate in the Pull Planning Scheduling as a means of activity scheduling in order to meet the project schedule. All Bid Package Contractors will be required to provide a foreman and management level of representation at all Pull Planning weekly sessions. Bid Package Contractors also agrees to provide a Foreman level of representation at all Pull Planning daily update “quick meets”.
1.18 Bid Package Contractor is responsible for environmental conditions for own work.
1.19 Work hours shall comply with the City of Vista’s local ordinances including adherence to limited hours for noisy exterior work.
1.20 Temporary power hook-up shall be provided by Bid Package #1, including providing temporary power for the IOR and CM trailers. The Electrical Bid Package Contractor shall provide all spider boxes spaced every 100 feet at every building location, and sufficient lighting for all ingress and egress areas of the project. Each Bid Package Contractor shall provide their own temporary power cords from spider boxes.
1.21 Bid Package #1 shall provide temporary construction power for the duration of the project unless directed otherwise by the Construction Manager. Shop drawings shall be submitted to the Construction Manager showing temp-power adequate to service the entire site and buildings construction. The primary and secondary temporary power poles must be of size and height to accommodate wire span and clearance for construction equipment. Layout of power poles shall be located in planters when possible. Each sub panel shall be equipped with 110 and 220 volt receptacles and one 50-amp twist-lock pigtail. Includes providing and maintaining a separate service for
Vista Unified School District VMMS – Pool Modernization Project No. V19200043PWBR Page 3 of 10
RBV – Gym Expansion
temporary power and connection to the Construction Manager’s and Inspector’s site office trailers for the duration of the project.
1.22 Bid Package #1 shall provide temporary power cords, spider boxes, and task lighting for for own use. Include routine testing of GFI and safety inspections of all equipment as required by OSHA
1.23 All Bid Packages are responsible for providing their own task lighting in order to complete their own scope of work. This includes lighting for all rooms where work is being performed.
1.24 All Bid Package Contractors shall adhere to inspections as required by DSA and the DSA Form 103. Bid Package Contractors shall schedule inspections as indicated in the contract documents including submitting IOR inspection requests 48 hours in advance of inspection for both on site and in-plant inspections.
1.25 Due to the space limitations, there will be parking limitations for all Bid Package Contractors and their workers. Bid Package Contractors will be required to provide parking for own workers off-site and car pool into site.
1.26 Due to space limitations, there is limited laydown space for large equipment and materials. Bid Package Contractors shall deliver material and equipment as needed to perform scheduled work.
1.27 All Bid Package Contractors will be required and responsible to coordinate with the City of Vista for approved haul routes and pay for any associated fees.
1.28 Bid Package Contractor #1 is required to pull the City of Vista Encroachment Permit and provide a Traffic Control Plan and implement the plan for all work in the City of Vista right away.
1.29 Bid Package Contractor #1 acknowledges that in the event closeout and warranty documentation required by the contract documents for own scope of work is not received prior to completion of the project, $1,500 will be detained from Contractor’s payment until all documentation is received.
1.30 Bid Package Contractor #1 will be responsible for the construction temporary water meter and meter fees as required by the Water District. All Bid Packages will be responsible for connection and hose lines from the water source to their scope of work.
1.31 All Bid Package Contractors will be required to upload required forms to the DSA Box.
1.32 All Bid Packages will be required to provide the DVBE Good Faith Effort packet with the bid documents required on bid day. The Owner has provided Step #3 requirement of advertising in a DVBE publication, therefore will not be required with the package submission.
1.33 Notify affected utility companies and District prior to starting utility work and comply with their requirements.
Vista Unified School District VMMS – Pool Modernization Project No. V19200043PWBR Page 4 of 10
RBV – Gym Expansion
1.34 All Bid Package Contractors shall comply with the Storm Water Permit per Article 69 of the Project Manual. In the event SWPPP BMPs are disturbed, Bid Package Contractor shall be responsible for the repair or replacement of the BMPs.
1.35 All Bid Package Contractors shall comply with the City of Vista’s SWPPP requirements in conjunction with the State Water Authority’s SWPPP requirements.
1.36 Bid Package Contractor #1 shall be responsible for SWPPP implementation and all requirements of the State Water Authority’s Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan General Permit and the City of Vista’s Storm Water requirements. Bid Package Contractor #1 shall coordinate and comply with the District’s QSP and QSD, if required. Bid Package Contractor #1 shall include in the base bid all of the SWPPP requirements based on the Bid Package scope of work. Bid Package Contractor #1 will be responsible for adequate dust control during all work of this Bid Package. Dust control shall be in compliance with Best Management Practices of the Storm Water Pollution Prevention Program (SWPPP’s).
1.37 Bid Package Contractor #1 will be required to clean all site concrete by means of sweeping and/or pressure washing as necessary at the completion of the Project to the satisfaction of the Construction Manager.
1.38 Bid Package Contractor #1 will be required to final clean the inside of the renovated bathrooms and the entire pool area per CM Supplemental Specification 01 73 01 Final Clean at the completion of the Project.
1.39 All Bid Package Contractor’s shall be required to work with Bid Package #1 to protect their scope of work from all rain events and apply SWPPP measures for protection for own work including, but not limited to, covering stockpiles, containment of materials, washouts, gravel bags, fiber rolls, and any other material or equipment necessary to comply with the State Water Authority’s General Permit.
1.40 Bid Package #1 will be responsible for the temporary site fencing and gates as shown in the Site Utilization Plan. The size of the fencing shall be 8’ fence with green screen. Installation of chain link fencing shall include driven posts and anchored T-stands or cored driven posts through concrete/asphaltic concrete. Bid Package #1 shall remove the fencing at the end of the project and will be responsible for patch back of holes after the fencing is removed. Bid Package #1 shall maintain the fencing throughout the entire project and removal at the end of the project. Bid Package Fencing layout is provided for information only. Bid Package #1 will also be responsible for the shaker plates at all entrances and exits from the project that comply with the SWPPP and BMP requirements.
1.41 Bid Package #1 shall furnish and install a vehicle double gate to remain at the lay down area with new posts and hardware and connect to the existing fencing. Include privacy screen on the existing fencing for the duration of the project.
1.42 All Bid Package Subcontractors shall be required to provide the appropriate California Contractor’s License and City of Vista Business License when performing the work of each section included in each bid package.
Vista Unified School District VMMS – Pool Modernization Project No. V19200043PWBR Page 5 of 10
RBV – Gym Expansion
1.43 Multiple move-ins may be required for the performance of all bid packages. There is no predetermined number of move-ins required to meet contract schedule. Work shall be done in accordance with the project schedule and the requirements of the Construction Manager.
1.44 Bid Package #1 will be responsible for providing two (2) – 3 yard dumpsters per week, which will include 1 dumpster for mixed use and 1 dumpster for diverted construction waste for recycling. Ensure that all waste accumulated is legally disposed of as required by all jurisdictions. This Bid Package Contractor will be responsible for providing dumpsters for own work as needed.
1.45 Daily clean-up of all debris related to the Work of this Bid Package Contractor is required. All debris generated by this Bid Package Contractor shall be legally removed daily and disposed of offsite by this Bid Package. Bid Package Contractor, while on site, will provide a clean-up laborer for 4 hours each week to be included in the weekly clean- up effort for the duration of the project
1.46 Bid Package #1 shall provide temporary security alarm system and monitoring and outdoor lighting for all site office trailers and the project office building for the duration of the project. See logistics maps for number of trailers and buildings to secure. Provide maintenance to keep systems working continuously 24 hours/7 days a week.
1.47 On project buildings, temporary offices, storage containers, etc, promptly obscure and/or repair any vandalism and graffiti on own work on a daily basis.
1.48 All Bid Package Contractors will provide Daily Work Reports on a daily basis delivered to Construction Manager’s field office no later than 2:00 p.m. for that day worked. Include all information of Work and workmen by vendors, equipment owner/operators, visitors and sub-contractors. Sub-Contractors Daily Work Report shall be attached to Bid Package Contractor’s daily work report.
1.49 All Certified Payrolls must be received prior to payment for each month billed including all subcontractors and tier subcontractors. No checks will be issued until all Certified Payrolls are received.
1.50 The Bid Package Contractor and their Subcontractors and tier Subcontractors will be required to submit a DAS 140, DAS 142, and Fringe Benefit Statement prior to start of any work on site. In the event these documents are not received, no work will shall be performed.
1.51 Provide all scaffolding and equipment necessary to efficiently and safely install all of the work of this bid package. All scaffolding placed on a finish slab may not be done without proper plywood and sand base for protection. All scaffolding work shall be OSHA compliant.
1.52 Provide all cutting, patching, excavation, trenching, shoring, backfilling, compaction, and finish grading as applies to the work of this bid package and as indicated in the specifications. Includes all necessary accessories.
1.53 Provide all caulking and sealants as required for own work.
Vista Unified School District VMMS – Pool Modernization Project No. V19200043PWBR Page 6 of 10
RBV – Gym Expansion
1.54 Provide all fire-stopping at all penetrations through fire rated assemblies as required for own work.
1.55 Work will be performed uninterrupted throughout the project duration, sometimes if necessary, at night. Bid Package Contractors will be available to perform Work for the duration of the project and will respond, and be on site, to perform the Work, within 24 hours if requested by the Construction Manager.
1.56 All Bid Package Contractors shall bid the most costly option in the event of conflict, duplicative assignments, or ambiguities in the contract documents unless clarified prior to bid.
1.57 This Bid Package Contractor shall protect all work related to this bid package from weather related damage. Contractor will replace all weather damaged work at their own cost for all labor, material, equipment and time.
1.58 Bid Package Contractor shall coordinate with all School District representative and Utility Agencies as necessary to permit, schedule, and perform work related to this Bid Package Contractor.
1.59 All Bid Package Contractors shall forward cost proposals no later than 15 days from requested timeframe. In the event cost proposals are not received within the allotted time frame, the Construction Manager will determine all additional costs and credits for the scope of work based on the most current RSMeans pricing manual.
1.60 Completely furnish, properly install, and maintain all barricades, traffic control, warning lights, flagmen, steel track-out plates for construction entrance and exit to the project site; hauling and proper disposal permits including fees as may be required by the City of Vista, CA, County of San Diego, and the Construction Manager as it pertains to the work of this bid package.
1.61 This Bid Package Contractor shall prepare and implement, including reporting and documentation, of a Waste Management Plan for reusing, recycling, salvage or disposal of non-hazardous waste materials generate during demolition and/or new construction (Construction and Demolition (C&D) Waste), to foster material recovery and re-use and to minimize disposal in landfills in accordance with the contract documents including Specification Section 01 74 19 of the Construction Manager’s Supplemental Specifications.
1.62 All Bid Package Contractors shall provide ALL project surveying, staking, layout, field engineering as required for own work. In the event information is disturbed or lost, surveyor shall re-establish the survey. Surveyor to establish survey control. Bid Package Contractor’s surveyor shall carry Professional Liability Insurance.
1.63 All Bid Package Contractors shall protect, restore and perpetuate all survey monuments and controls on the public right-of way in conformance with all applicable codes and regulations. All Prime Contractors are required to protect control points and report any discrepancies and/or issues if encountered.
Vista Unified School District VMMS – Pool Modernization Project No. V19200043PWBR Page 7 of 10
RBV – Gym Expansion
1.64 Bid Package #1 shall provide a site laborer for work as directed by the Construction Manager for 1 day per week, every week until the end of the project. Bid Package Contractor shall submit tickets for hours worked. All hours not used will be credited back to the Allowance. Credited costs will be based on the Department of Industrial Relations Certified Payroll Rates. Bid Package Contractor will be responsible to account for apprenticeship requirements. Laborer shall be equipped with basic construction equipment. The equipment list shall include, but is not limited to,
15’ storage container
small tools, shovels, pick, rakes, push broom/house broom, dust pan, pliers, crescent wrench, screw drivers, 50’ of electrical cord, tie wire, gloves, safety glasses, ear plugs, First Aid kit, dust masks
extension ladder, “A” frame ladder, shop vacuum, caulking gun
shell barrow, water hose/nozzle, water key
Caution tape, delineators (minimum of 6), duct tape, fire extinguisher
Large trash bags, 4 mil. visqueen
1.65 All Bid Package Contractors shall provide a fire protection plan and fire protection as required by OSHA including fire extinguishers for construction safety.
1.66 Provide all required layout as required for the work of this Bid Package Contractor
1.67 Provide all necessary protection to all existing and surrounding buildings, surfaces and finishes, utilities, underground utilities during installation of work. Any damage caused shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the Construction Manager, District and Architect of Record.
1.68 Prequalification of all Bid Package Prime Contractors is required per AB 1565 as of January 1, 2014 (California Public Contract Code 20111.6). See the District’s website for Prequalification packets. Prequalification packets must be received by the District 10 days prior to the bid.
1.69 Bid Package Contractors shall include products from listed manufacturers only. Substitutions will not be accepted in bids without having an approved substitution request approved by the architect and/or engineers of record. See the Project Manual, for additional instructions. All substitutions must be submitted with a complete substitution request form and appropriate credit to owner. No exceptions
1.70 Bid Package Contractor acknowledges that any deviation from the contract documents shall be documented through the RFI process. In the event the Bid Package Contractor proceeds with installation of any deviation from the contract documents, the Bid Package Contractor will be responsible for all re-work or correction if the deviation is unacceptable to the Owner, Construction Manager, or Design Team.
Vista Unified School District VMMS – Pool Modernization Project No. V19200043PWBR Page 8 of 10
RBV – Gym Expansion
1.71 All trenches / over-excavations shall be sloped or shored per CAL/OSHA regulations. Obtain & maintain a CAL/OSHA permit for excavations five feet or greater in depth.
1.72 Prior to commencement of any underground excavations, notify Dig Alert of Southern California. Dial 811 for Dig Alert of Southern California. Provide to the Construction Manager verification of notification for this project.
1.73 Do not damage existing underground utilities scheduled to remain in place. Contractor shall pothole to determine existing utility routing. Contractor shall as-built these utilities in the horizontal and vertical locations in the field and provide the as-built to the Construction Manager on the master as-built plan at the end of each work day.
1.74 Bid Package Contractor shall pothole as necessary and review contract and as-built drawings to verify no utility conflicts exist.
1.75 All excess spoils generated by this operation shall be removed and legally disposed of off-site on a daily basis.
1.76 Bid Package V1920043PWBR-1 General Construction shall contract with a professional utility locating service to locate all existing utilities within the construction limits and provide a utility map.
1.77 Accurately record locations (as-built) of utilities remaining where cut and capped at lines of demolition limits. The Bid Package Contractor is responsible for cutting and capping and safe-off of utilities as it relates to their scope prior to demolition.
1.78 All Bid Package Contractors are responsible for safe-off and cutting and capping of utilities as it applies to own Bid Package prior to demolition. Coordinate with the demolition contractor.
1.79 Preserve, in operating condition, any active utilities transversing the site. Protect property / utilities scheduled to remain including, but is not limited to, locate and mark utility mains, manholes, catch basins, valve boxes, utility poles, guy wires, and other existing utilities encountered.
1.80 There shall be no interruptions of utility services to adjacent property owners for performance of this bid package contractors work. Coordinate utility shut downs with the Construction Manager and District. Notify Construction Manager 48 hours prior to scheduled shut-downs.
1.81 Upon discovery of any unknown utilities or concealed conditions, which would affect the scope of work, notify the Construction Manager immediately.
1.82 The Bid Package Contractor shall provide the Builder’s Risk Insurance. The policy will not provide coverage for any leased and/or owned Contractor’s equipment. Bid Package Contractor shall be responsible for providing this protection. See the Special Conditions contained in the Project Manual for Builder’s Risk Insurance requirements.
Vista Unified School District VMMS – Pool Modernization Project No. V19200043PWBR Page 9 of 10
RBV – Gym Expansion
1.83 Include and pay all costs associated with additional testing and inspections due to failed tests for work in place by the bid package contractor.
1.84 Bid Package Contractor agrees and acknowledges that certain design errors and omissions can and do occur in the project contract documents and that it has been the Bid Package Contractor’s duty and responsibility to fully and thoroughly review the contract documents for such type of errors and omissions as related to their scope of work. Whereas the Bid Package Contractor has had adequate opportunity to bring these discrepancies to the attention of the Construction Manager and Architect and offer solutions. This Bid Package Contractor agrees and acknowledges that any discrepancy that could have been discovered with reasonable due diligence shall be the sole responsibility of the Bid Package Contractor to resolve at no additional cost to the District. Bid Package Contractor, being a licensed professional, is responsible to know and understand code issues as related to their area of work and therefore be able to identify obvious design discrepancies as related to buildings codes and thereby accepts responsibility as listed above. However, the Bid Package Contractor is not a licensed Engineer or Architect and thereby is not responsible for design discrepancies that would have been reasonably required the expertise of a licensed Engineer or Architect to discover during the pre-construction phase of work.
1.85 Vista Magnet Middle School will have students on campus during the week of August 5th for registration. Teachers return August 12th and School starts August 15th. All Contractors are required to work around student and staff on site.
1.86 Vista Magnet Middle School will have summer school from 6/10/19 to 6/21/19 from 8am to 12pm.
1.87 Provide a privacy screen to cover the existing fence enclosing the laydown area as shown in the Site Utilization Plan.
1.88 Provide a permanent double vehicle gate complete with new posts and hardware to remain to allow access from the parking lot to the site utilization area.
1.89 Provide a temporary 8 foot fence with privacy screen around the pool construction site for the duration of the project.
Vista Unified School District VMMS – Pool Modernization Project No. V19200043PWBR Page 10 of 10
SECTION 01 21 00
ALLOWANCES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Allowances which the Contractor shall provide for designated construction activities in the Work and in this bid.
1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The Conditions of the Contract and other section of Division 01 apply to this section as fully as if repeated herein.
1.03 DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS
A. Definitions and Explanations: Certain requirements of the construction related to each allowance are indicated and specified. The allowance has been established by the Owner and represents selection by the Owner of selected designated portions of the work specified and shown.
B. Types of allowance scheduled herein for the Work include lump sum cash allowances. Include all allowances in Contract sum, and identify all allowances in Schedule of Values as separate line items.
C. Selection and Purchase: At earliest feasible date after award of contract, advise the Construction Manager of scheduled date when final selection and purchase of each product or system described by each allowance must be accomplished in order to avoid delays in performance of the Work.
1. Establish date by which General Contractor must enter into contract and coordinate with sub-contractor responsible for work defined by allowance.
2. Establish date by which final list of products must be established for purchase of products and systems as specifically selected by the District.
1.04 DEFINITIONS AND DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS
A. Cash Allowance Criteria
1. The Allowance is used only as directed by the Owner.
2. The Allowance is used exclusively for the Owner's purposes and for the defined scope of work.
3. The Bid Package Contractor will prepare detailed breakdown of all costs associated with the work defined for the Allowance. These amounts will be based on final detailed payment receipts and back-up or estimates as required by Architect, and will include all direct costs of work performed under the defined work scope and will be charged against the Allowance through the Allowance Usage Request.
Vista Unified School District Allowances VMMS – Pool Modernization 01 21 00
Project No.V19200043PWBR Bid Issuance Set Page 1 of 2
a. Contractor shall obtain quotes for equipment from three separate vendors and present to District for consideration and selection.
4. The Bid Package Contractor shall include in the base bid contract amount all cost of coordination, supervision, bond costs, insurance and all indirect project costs associated with performing the work of the Allowance. Contractor shall be permitted to charge only its direct costs plus markup, not to exceed 5%, as listed in the Allowance Usage Request (AUR) worksheet to perform the work as indicated through documentation approved by the District.
a. At project closeout, unused Cash Allowance amounts shall be credited to the Owner by Change Order.
b. Changes that exceed the amount of each allowance will be processed as a Change Order per Contract Documents.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 SCHEDULE OF CASH ALLOWANCES
The bid shall include the Total Base Bid and Allowance for a Total Bid Amount. The Allowance is identified in Section 2. Special Notes for this Bid Package of each Bid Package. Items covered by Allowances shall be provided for such amounts and by such persons or firms as the District may direct.
END OF SECTION
Vista Unified School District Allowances VMMS – Pool Modernization 01 21 00
Project No.V19200043PWBR Bid Issuance Set Page 2 of 2
SECTION 01 74 19
CONSTRUCTION & DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Preparation and implementation, including reporting and documentation, of a Waste Management Plan for reusing, recycling, salvage or disposal of non-hazardous waste materials generated during demolition and/or new construction (Construction & Demolition (C&D) Waste), to foster material recovery and re-use and to minimize disposal in land fills.
B. Related Sections
1. Section 01 30 25: Submittals
2. Sections 01 50 00: Construction Facilities and Controls
3. Section 01 70 70: Project Closeout
1.02 REFERENCES
A. California Integrated Waste Management Act of 1989 (AB 939)
B. California Code of Regulations Title 14, Section 18700 et seq.
1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Collection and separation of all C&D waste materials generated on-site, reuse or recycling on- site, transportation to approved recyclers or reuse organizations, or transportation to legally designated landfills, for the purpose of recycling salvaging and/or reusing a minimum of 75% of the C&D waste generated.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. C&D Waste Management Plan (Exhibit 1): Within 10 calendar days after the Notice to Proceed and prior to any waste removal, submit the following to the DISTRICT for review and approval. Update quarterly. Include:
1. Materials to be recycled, reused, or salvaged, either onsite or offsite.
2. Estimates of C&D waste quantity (in tons) by type of material. (If waste is measured by volume, give factors for conversion to weight in tons.)
3. Procedures for recycling/ reuse program.
4. Permit or license and location of Project waste-disposal areas.
5. Site plan for placement of waste containers.
Vista Unified School District Construction & Demolition Waste Management VMMS – Pool Modernization SECTION 01 74 19 Project No.V19200043PWBR
Page 1 of 4
B. C&D Waste Management Monthly Progress Report (Exhibit 2): Summary of waste generated by Project, monthly with Application for Payment. Include:
1. Firms accepting the recovered or waste materials.
2. Type and location of accepting facilities (landfill, recovery facility, used materials yard, etc.). If materials are reused or recycled on the Project site, location should be designated as “on-site reuse / recycling”.
3. Type of materials and net weight (tons) of each.
4. Value of the materials or disposal fee paid.
5. Attach weigh bills and other documentation confirming amount and disposal location of waste materials.
C. C&D Waste Management Final Compliance Report: Final update of Waste Management Plan to provide summary of total waste generated by Project.
D. Debris Recycling Statement: Complete Attachment C – Debris Recycling Statement located in the Project Manual.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.01 IMPLEMENTATION
A. Implement approved Waste Management Plan including collecting, segregating, storing, transporting and documenting each type of waste material generated, recycled or reused, or disposed in landfills.
B. Designate an on-site person to be responsible for instructing workers and overseeing the sorting and recording of waste/ recyclable materials.
C. Include waste management and recycling in worker orientation and as an agenda item for regular Project meetings.
D. Recyclable and waste bin areas shall be limited to areas approved on the Waste Management Plan. Keep recycling and waste bins neat and clearly marked to avoid contamination of materials.
3.02 ATTACHMENTS
A. Exhibit 1: Waste Management Plan
B. Exhibit 2: Waste Management Monthly Progress Report.
Vista Unified School District Construction & Demolition Waste Management VMMS – Pool Modernization SECTION 01 74 19 Project No.V19200043PWBR
Page 2 of 4
EXHIBIT 1 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN CONSTRUCTION/ MAINTENANCE/ALTERATION & DEMOLITION PROJECTS
PROJECT NAME: VMMS Pool Modernization PROJECT NO: V19200043PWBR NAME OF COMPANY: CONTACT PERSON: TELEPHONE: PROJECT SITE LOCATION: PROJECT TYPE: NEW CONSTRUCTION DEMOLITION MAINTENANCE/ALTERATION PROJECTS PROJECT SIZE (SQ. FT.): DATE & ESTIMATED PERIOD
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) Material Type Tons Tons Tons Tons Proposed Disposal or Estimated Estimated Estimated Estimated Recycling Facility (e.g., Recycle Reuse Salvage Landfill Onsite, Name of Facility)
Total Diversion Rate: Columns [(2)+(3)+(4)] / [(2)+(3)+(4)+(5)] =
Signature Title Date
Column 1 "Material Types" – Enter type of materials targeted for recycling, reuse, and/or salvage, either on- or off-site, and include a category for waste materials requiring disposal. Columns 2 "Estimated Generation" - Enter estimated quantities (tons) of recyclable, reusable, or thru 4 salvageable waste materials anticipated to be generated and state number of salvageable items. Column 5 "Estimated Landfill" - Enter quantities (tons) of materials to be disposed in landfill. Column 4 "Disposal Location" - Enter end-destination of recycled, salvaged, and disposed materials.
General : (1) Attach proposed Recycling & Waste Bin Location Plan. (2) Attach name and contact data for each recycling or disposal destination to be used.
Vista Unified School District Construction & Demolition Waste Management VMMS – Pool Modernization SECTION 01 74 19 Project No.V19200043PWBR
Page 3 of 4
EXHIBIT 2 WASTE MANAGEMENT PROGRESS REPORT CONSTRUCTION/ MAINTENANCE/ALTERATION & DEMOLITION PROJECTS
PROJECT NAME: VMMS Pool Modernization PROJECT NO: V19200043PWBR NAME OF COMPANY: CONTACT PERSON: TELEPHONE: PROJECT SITE LOCATION: PROJECT TYPE: NEW CONSTRUCTION DEMOLITION MAINTENANCE/ALTERATION PROJECTS PROJECT SIZE (SQ. FT.): PERIOD to
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) Material Type Tons Tons Tons Tons Disposal or Recycling Actual Actual Actual Actual Facility (e.g., Onsite, Recycle Reuse Salvage Landfill Name of Facility)
Total Diversion Rate: Columns [(2)+(3)+(4)] / [(2)+(3)+(4)+(5)] =
Signature Title Date
Column 1 "Material Types" – Enter type of materials targeted for recycling, reuse, and/or salvage, either on- or off-site, and include a category for waste materials requiring disposal. Columns 2 "Estimated Generation" - Enter estimated quantities (tons) of recyclable, reusable, or thru 4 salvageable waste materials anticipated to be generated and state number of salvageable items. Column 5 "Estimated Landfill" - Enter quantities (tons) of materials disposed. Column 4 "Disposal Location" - Enter end-destination of recycled, salvaged, and disposed materials. General : (1) Attach proposed Recycling & Waste Bin Location Plan. (2) Attach name and contact data for each recycling or disposal destination to be used. END OF SECTION Vista Unified School District Construction & Demolition Waste Management VMMS – Pool Modernization SECTION 01 74 19 Project No.V19200043PWBR
Page 4 of 4
Vista Unified School District Architectural Standards and Specifications
Vista Unified School District 1234 Arcadia Avenue Vista, California 92083
Prepared By: AlphaStudio Design Group 6152 Innovation Way Carlsbad, California 92009 Vista Unified School District Architectural Standards and Specifications
Revision Notes:
Revision Date Revision Revision to specification narrative, section 08-3, page 5. Revised to add 12/4/18 subsection 08-3.b clarifying all door hardware to comply with AB3205. 12/4/18 Irrigation specifications, section 32 84 00 added.
Vista Unified School District Standards
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION ...... 3
SECTION 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ...... 3
SECTION 02 EXISTING CONDITIONS ...... 3
SECTION 03 CONCRETE ...... 4
SECTION 04 MASONRY ...... 4
SECTION 05 METALS ...... 4
SECTION 06 WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES ...... 4
SECTION 07 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION ...... 4
SECTION 08 OPENINGS ...... 4
SECTION 09 FINISHES ...... 6
SECTION 010 SPECIALTIES ...... 11
SECTION 011 EQUIPMENT ...... 12
SECTION 012 FURNISHINGS ...... 12
SECTION 013 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION ...... 12
SECTION 014 CONVEYING SYSTEMS ...... 12
SECTION 022 PLUMBING ...... 12
SECTION 023 HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITION ...... 12
SECTION 026 ELECTRICAL ...... 12
SECTION 027 VOICE/DATA ...... 12
SECTION 028 FIRE ALARM...... 13
SECTION 032 EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS ...... 13
Standard Details ...... 18
Technical Specifications ...... 26
PAGE 2 OF 26 Vista Unified School District Standards
INTRODUCTION The purpose of the District Standard Specifications is to create a minimum material, product, and system standard for all District projects. The document provides specific manufacturers, products, and performance that the District has deemed acceptable to utilize. Deviations from the specifications and standards is discouraged and should be done only with prior approval from District personnel. Any item not specifically addressed within the standards and specifications shall be reviewed with the District prior to completion of the project design. This document was created with input from the Vista Unified School District.
SECTION 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01-1 The following are considered general requirements and recommendations that should be considered for District projects. 01-2 Completed projects shall comply with all local, county, state, and federal regulations and codes. 01-3 Storm water Design shall comply with all local, county, and state regulations. 01-4 Completed projects shall comply with the American with Disabilities Act and the State Title 24 access requirements as regulated and governed by the Division of the State Architect (DSA). 01-5 Completed projects and associate systems shall comply with all state and local fire and life safety regulations and codes. 01-6 Ease of maintenance and operation shall be incorporated into completed projects. Allocations shall be made for training of District personnel in the operations of all equipment. For future replacement and maintenance, surplus items shall be provided at a minimum on the following items: 01-6.a Finishes 01-6.b Door Hardware 01-6.c Filters 01-6.d Lamps 01-6.e Paint
SECTION 02 EXISTING CONDITIONS 02-1 Structure demolition: All existing structures indicated for demolition shall include footings, foundations, and below grade structures. All existing utilities
PAGE 3 OF 26 Vista Unified School District Standards
shall be safed off and capped a minimum of 5’-0” outside the building’s footprint or as dictated by the new construction. 02-2 Selective demolition: Portions of existing structures or items indicated for demolition shall be removed in a manner that allows a seamless integration of new construction. Items marked for salvage shall be provided to District unless noted otherwise. All items intended to be reinstalled, shall be removed in a manner that allows for their reinstallation to the industry standard of quality.
SECTION 03 CONCRETE 03-1 NO DISTRICT STANDARD
SECTION 04 MASONRY 04-1 NO DISTRICT STANDARD
SECTION 05 METALS 05-1 NO DISTRICT STANDARD
SECTION 06 WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES 06-1 All millwork shall be manufactured and installed in accordance with the standards in the latest edition of the Manual of Millwork of the Woodwork Institute in the following grade or grades: 06-1.a Perform all work in accordance with WI Manual of Millwork Custom quality. 06-1.b Perform cabinet construction in accordance with WI Manual of Millwork Custom quality. 06-1.c Perform countertop construction in accordance with WI Manual of Millwork, Premium quality.
SECTION 07 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07-1 NO DISTRICT STANDARD
SECTION 08 OPENINGS
PAGE 4 OF 26 Vista Unified School District Standards
08-1 Hollow Metal Doors: All doors shall be 16 gauge, steel with a kraftpaper honeycomb core. Doors shall be 1-3/4” thick and factory primed for field finish. Doors shall be properly prepared and reinforced to accept the required door hardware. Fire rated doors shall meet the standards of the State Fire Marshal as well as all applicable codes. Rated doors shall be appropriately labeled to indicate rating. 08-2 Hollow Metal Door/Window Frames: All door and window frames, interior or exterior shall be steel frames, 16 gauge, fully welded. Frames shall be factory primed for field finish. Fire rated frames shall meet the standards of the State Fire Marshal as well as all applicable codes. Rated frames shall be appropriately labeled to indicate rating. 08-3 Door Hardware: 08-3.a Door hardware varies by site. Prior to specifying door hardware for a project consult and coordinate requirements with the district’s hardware consultant. Refer to technical specifications for more information. 08-3.b All locks shall be compliant with AB3205, locks must allow doors to classrooms and any room with an occupancy of five or more persons to be locked from the inside of the room. 08-4 Overhead Coiling Doors: Overhead coiling doors shall be motorized to permit ADA access. Overhead coiling doors shall be Model 610 as manufactured by the Overhead Door Company. Doors and frames shall be factory primed for field finish. Fire rated doors shall meet the standards of the State Fire Marshal as well as all applicable codes. Rated doors shall be appropriately labeled to indicate rating. 08-5 Coiling Counter Door: Coiling counter doors shall be motorized to permit ADA access. Coiling counter doors shall be Model 658 as manufactured by the Overhead Door Company. Doors and frames shall be factory primed for field finish. Fire rated doors shall meet the standards of the State Fire Marshal as well as all applicable codes. Rated doors shall be appropriately labeled to indicate rating. 08-6 Overhead Door Operators: Overhead door operators shall vary depending on the type of door they are controlling. For coiling counter doors, the operator
PAGE 5 OF 26 Vista Unified School District Standards
shall be model CDX as manufactured by the Overhead Door Company. For full height overhead coiling doors, the operator shall be model RSX as manufactured by the Overhead Door Company. SECTION 09 FINISHES 09-1 Carpet Tile: 09-1.a In standard classroom applications carpet tiles shall be manufactured by Shaw Carpet Tile, Constellation Line, Color: 26910 – Asteroid. Tiles shall be installed utilizing adhesives recommended by the manufacture for the substrate condition. 09-1.b In high traffic areas or as requested by the District, provide carpet tiles manufactured by Forbo, Flotext Line, Cirrus Pattern. Color shall be selected by the District. Tiles shall be installed utilizing adhesives recommended by the manufacture for the substrate condition. 09-2 Walk Off Mats: Walk off mats shall be provided at all exterior doors in a 48”x48” area. Walk off mats shall be Welcome II as manufactured by Shaw, color shall be 31500 Ebony. Walk off mats shall be installed utilizing adhesives recommended by the manufacture for the substrate condition. 09-3 Vinyl Tile Flooring: Vinyl tile flooring shall be MCT top Shield as manufactured by Forbo. Color shall be selected by the District. Tiles shall be installed utilizing adhesives recommended by the manufacture for the substrate condition. 09-4 Vinyl Sheet Flooring: Vinyl sheet flooring shall be manufactured by Armstrong Commercial Flooring, Connection Corlon Line. Color shall be selected by the District. Flooring shall be installed utilizing adhesives recommended by the manufacture for the substrate condition. 09-5 Sports Flooring: Sports flooring shall be manufactured by Architectural Floor Systems, Rally Weight Tile. Color shall be selected by the District. Flooring shall be installed utilizing adhesives recommended by the manufacture for the substrate condition. 09-6 Porcelain Floor Tile: Porcelain floor tile shall be manufactured by Dal-Tile, Porcealto Graniti, Price Group 1, Grigio Granite CD 40. Floor tiles shall be
PAGE 6 OF 26 Vista Unified School District Standards
8”x8” in size, unpolished and installed in a mortar bed per TCA Handbook method F121-03. 09-7 Quarry Tile: Quarry floor tile shall be manufactured by Dal-Tile, Red Blaze, Q40. Floor tiles shall be 6”x6” in size, unglazed and installed in a mortar bed per TCA Handbook method F121-03. 09-8 Grout: 09-8.a Standard Applications: In standard applications, or as required by the District, grout shall be polymer modified cement grout. The grout color shall be selected to compliment the corresponding tile as well as provide for ease of long term maintenance and removal of graffiti. 09-8.b Kitchen Applications: In kitchen applications, or as required by the District, grout shall be chemical resistant and water- cleanable epoxy grout. The grout color shall be selected to compliment the corresponding tile as well as provide for ease of long term maintenance. 09-9 Rubber Base: Top set rubber wall base shall be manufactured by Burke Flooring, 4” height, color shall be Slate Grey. All top set base shall run in continuous length around outside corners to prevent peeling away and long- term maintenance issues. 09-10 Glazed Wall Tile: Glazed wall tile shall be manufactured by Dal-Tile, Semi- Gloss/Matte, Price Group 1 and 2 for field tiles, price groups 1-5 for accent tiles. Wall tiles shall be installed in a mortar bed per TCA Handbook method W221-03. 09-11 Tackable Wall Surface: Tackable wall surface shall be Sonic Tackable High- Impact Panel as manufactured by Lamvin. 09-12 FRP: Fiberglass reinforced panels used for walls shall conform to the following criteria: 09-12.a Class ‘A’ Fire Rating 09-12.b Surface Finish: Pebbled embossed texture 09-12.c Moldings, Trim, and Caps: Single piece extruded polypropylene or PVC, configured to cover edges and corners.
PAGE 7 OF 26 Vista Unified School District Standards
09-12.d Panel Adhesive: Adhesives as recommended by the manufacture for the substrate condition. 09-12.e The following locations shall receive FRP unless directed otherwise by District. Other locations may receive FRP as determined by the District and design team: 09-12.e.i Kitchen Walls (where tile is not used) 09-12.e.ii Concession Walls (where tile is not used) 09-12.e.iii Restroom Walls (where tile is not used) 09-12.e.iv At all sink locations (where tile is not used) 09-12.e.v At all mop or service sink locations (where tile is not used) 09-13 Paint (Interior) 09-13.a Interior Paint: All interior paint shall be manufactured by Vista Paint. 09-13.b All interior paint shall be 100% acrylic, unless noted otherwise. 09-13.c Steel Doors, Door and Window Frames: 09-13.c.i Finish: Gloss 09-13.c.ii 1st coat Vista # 999 metal primer 09-13.c.iii 2nd coat Vista #9900 Gloss Protec Alkyd Emulsion 09-13.c.iv 3rd coat Vista #9900 Gloss Protec Alkyd Emulsion 09-13.d Wood Doors/Door and Window Frames: 09-13.d.i Finish: Gloss 09-13.d.ii 1st coat Vista#4200 Terminator II 09-13.d.iii 2nd coat Vista#9900 Gloss Protec Alkyd Emulsion 09-13.d.iv 3rd coat Vista#9900 Protec Alkyd Emulsion 09-13.e Gypsum Walls: 09-13.e.i Finish: Eggshell 09-13.e.ii 1st coat Vista#188 Acrylic undercoat 09-13.e.iii 2nd coat Vista #8300 Carefree
PAGE 8 OF 26 Vista Unified School District Standards
09-13.e.iv 3rd coat Vista #8300 Carefree 09-13.f Acoustical Ceilings: 09-13.f.i Finish: Flat 09-13.f.ii Coating type: Vinyl 09-13.f.iii 1st coat Vista Paint Sealer 09-13.f.iv 2nd coat Acoustic-Kote #013 09-13.g Metal: Ferrous/Iron/Steel Doors: 09-13.g.i Finish: Gloss 09-13.g.ii 1st coat Vista Paint 999 Metal Primer 09-13.g.iii 2nd coat Vista #9900 Gloss Protec Alkyd Emulsion 09-13.g.iv 3rd coat Vista #9900 Gloss Protec Alkyd Emulsion 09-13.h Metal: Non-Ferrous/Galvanized/Aluminum: 09-13.h.i Finish: Gloss 09-13.h.ii 1st coat Vista Paint 999 Metal Primer 09-13.h.iii 2nd coat Vista #9900 Gloss Protec Alkyd Emulsion 09-13.h.iv 3rd coat Vista#9900 Gloss Protec Alkyd Emulsion 09-13.i All other wall surfaces: 09-13.i.i Finish: Eggshell 09-13.i.ii 1st coat Vista #188 Acrylic Undercoat 09-13.i.iii 2nd coat Vista #8300 Carefree 09-13.i.iv 3rd coat Vista #8300 Carefree 09-14 Paint (Exterior) 09-14.a Exterior Paint: All exterior paint shall be manufactured by Vista Paint. 09-14.b All exterior paint shall be 100% acrylic, unless noted otherwise. 09-14.c Concrete/Plaster/Stucco: 09-14.c.i Finish: Eggshell 09-14.c.ii 1st coat Vista # 4600 Uniprime II
PAGE 9 OF 26 Vista Unified School District Standards
09-14.c.iii 2nd coat Vista #8300 Carefree Eggshell 09-14.c.iv 3rd coat Vista #8300 Carefree Eggshell 09-14.d Masonry/Block/Brick: 09-14.d.i Finish: Eggshell 09-14.d.ii 1st coat Vista#040 Block Kote 09-14.d.iii 2nd coat Vista#8300 Carefree Eggshell 09-14.d.iv 3rd coat Vista#8300 Carefree Eggshell 09-14.e Wood: Rough Sawn Fascia: 09-14.e.i Finish: Flat 09-14.e.ii 1st coat Vista#4200 Terminator II 09-14.e.iii 2nd coat Vista #3000 Acribond 09-14.e.iv 3rd coat Vista #3000 Acribond 09-14.f Wood: Siding: 09-14.f.i Finish: Eggshell 09-14.f.ii 1st coat Vista#4200 Terminator II 09-14.f.iii 2nd coat Vista #8300 Carefree 09-14.f.iv 3rd coat Vista #8300 Carefree 09-14.g Smooth Doors: 09-14.g.i Finish: Gloss 09-14.g.ii 1st coat Vista#4000 Uniprime 09-14.g.iii 2nd coat Vista #9900 Gloss Protec Alkyd Emulsion 09-14.g.iv 3rd coat Vista #9900 Gloss Protec Alkyd Emulsion 09-14.h Metal: Ferrous/Iron/Steel Doors: 09-14.h.i Finish: Gloss 09-14.h.ii 1st coat Vista#4800 Pro Primer 09-14.h.iii 2nd coat Vista#9900 Gloss Protec Alkyd Emulsion 09-14.h.iv 3rd coat Vista #9900 Gloss Protec Alkyd Emulsion 09-14.i Metal: Non-Ferrous/Galvanized/Aluminum: 09-14.i.i Finish: Gloss
PAGE 10 OF 26 Vista Unified School District Standards
09-14.i.ii 1st coat Vista 4500 Galva Epoxy White 09-14.i.iii 2nd coat Vista #9900 Gloss Protec Alkyd Emulsion 09-14.i.iv 3rd coat Vista #9900 Gloss Protec Alkyd Emulsion 09-15 Acoustical Ceiling Panels and T-Bar Grid 09-15.a Ceiling Panels: Standard Application: In standard applications or as indicated by the District acoustical ceiling panels shall be 755B, random fissured as manufactured by Armstrong World Industries. 09-15.b Ceiling Panels - Kitchen and Restroom Applications: In kitchen and restroom applications or as indicated by the District acoustical ceiling panels shall be Kitchen Zone as manufactured by Armstrong World Industries. 09-15.c T-Bar Grid: T-Bar grid shall be 15/16” Wide T Profile as manufactured by Armstrong World Industries. SECTION 010 SPECIALTIES 010-1 Toilet Partitions: Toilet partitions shall be manufactured by Scranton Products and constructed of high density polyethylene (HDPE), color shall be Onyx. Partitions shall be installed floor to ceiling with heavy duty hardware. 010-2 Toilet Accessories 010-2.a Accessible Toilet Paper Dispenser: Bobrick, multi-roll, surface mounted B-2888 010-2.b Accessible Sanitary Napkin Disposal Unit: Bobrick, surface mounted B-353 010-2.c Accessible Toilet Seat Covers: Bobrick, surface mounted B- 221 010-2.d Accessible Grab Bars: Bobrick B-5806 010-2.e Soap Dispensers: Bobrick B-2112 010-2.f Standard Toilet Paper Dispenser: Vandal Stop Products, Single Jumbo Roll Dispenser, surface mounted AA-JRDx1- 304L-12g
PAGE 11 OF 26 Vista Unified School District Standards
010-2.g Standard Sanitary Napkin Dispenser: Bobrick, surface mounted B-353 010-2.h Standard Toilet Seat Cover: Bobrick, B-221 010-2.i Mirror: Vandal Stop Products, Anti-Graffiti Security Mirror AA-MTL-18x24-304L-14G 010-2.j Electric Hand Dryer: American Dryer, Extreme Air ADA, Cold Air Only. 010-3 Large Format Monitor Mounts 010-3.a All monitors measuring between 42” and 70” shall be wall mounted utilizing the MD2296 as manufactured by Mounting Dream. SECTION 011 EQUIPMENT 011-1 NO DISTRICT STANDARD
SECTION 012 FURNISHINGS 012-1 NO DISTRICT STANDARD
SECTION 013 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 013-1 NO DISTRICT STANDARD
SECTION 014 CONVEYING SYSTEMS 014-1 NO DISTRICT STANDARD
SECTION 022 PLUMBING 022-1 Refer to technical specifications.
SECTION 023 HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITION 023-1 Refer to technical specifications.
SECTION 026 ELECTRICAL 026-1 Refer to technical specifications.
SECTION 027 VOICE/DATA
PAGE 12 OF 26 Vista Unified School District Standards
027-1 Refer to technical specifications.
SECTION 028 FIRE ALARM 028-1 Refer to technical specifications.
SECTION 032 EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 032-1 Tactile Warning System 032-1.a Safety Step TD Traditional Mat System. Safety Step TD is a surface applied mat system used to create an ADA compliant tactile warning system. 032-2 Concrete Site Paving 032-2.a All concrete site paving shall conform to the following requirements: 032-2.b Compressive Strength at 28 days: 3,250 psi 032-2.c Fly Ash: 15% max of cementitious material 032-2.d Water/Cement Ratio: 50% max 032-2.e Slump: 4” max with +/- 1” 032-2.f Maximum Aggregate Size: 1” 032-2.g Finishing: 032-2.g.i Sidewalks (surface less than 5% running slope): Medium broom texture perpendicular to the direction of travel. 032-2.g.ii Ramps (surface greater than 5% and less than 8.3% running slope): Heavy broom texture perpendicular to the direction of travel. 032-2.g.iii Vehicular Ramp (surface great than 8.3% used for vehicles only): Heavy broom texture perpendicular to the direction of travel. 032-2.h Connecting to Existing Paving 032-2.h.i All concrete paving connecting to existing concrete paving shall be doweled and epoxied with 12” long, #4 bars at 24” on center. 032-3 Asphalt Paving
PAGE 13 OF 26 Vista Unified School District Standards
032-3.a All asphalt paving shall conform to the following requirements: 032-3.b Aggregate for base course: 032-3.b.i Uniformly graded in accordance with Standard Specification for Public Works Construction (Greenbook). 032-3.b.ii Class II aggregate base as defined by Standard Specification for Public Works Construction. 032-3.c Asphalt Mix 032-3.c.i Dry material only, mixed uniformly. 032-3.c.ii Mix shall follow Caltrans Standards, Section 39. 032-3.c.iii Reclaimed Asphalt Pavement (RAP) is not permitted. 032-4 Chain Link Fencing and Gates 032-4.a Chain Link Fencing 032-4.a.i Refer to the appendix for details and specific call outs for fencing materials. 032-4.a.ii Buried Perimeter Fencing: 8’-0” High chain link fencing where the bottom rail and fabric is buried 6” below grade. 032-4.a.iii Standard Perimeter Fencing: 8’-0” High chain link fencing where bottom rail is 2” max above finished grade. 032-4.a.iv Standard Fencing Non-Perimeter: Height varies, bottom rail is 2” max above finished surface (asphalt or concrete) 032-4.b ADA Pedestrian Gates 032-4.b.i Refer to the appendix for details and specific call outs for gate materials. 032-4.b.ii All pedestrian gates shall be required to accessible to a person with disabilities. Such gates shall be no larger than 4’-0” max in width and be allowed to operate in a push or
PAGE 14 OF 26 Vista Unified School District Standards
pull manner utilizing no more than 5 lbs. operating pressure. 032-4.b.iii Hardware for pedestrian gates shall consist of a panic hardware device on the push side. Panic hardware shall be Von Duprin 99EO-626-299 with the PA option. On the pull side, the hardware shall be Von Duprin 994L-626 Trim w/ Breakaway lever and Falcon 953-626 rim cylinder. 032-4.b.iv Gates shall be equipped with a 10” high smooth kick plate that extends the full width of the gate, typical both sides of gate. 032-4.b.v All exposed steel edges shall be ground smooth and finished to limit corrosion. 032-4.c Vehicular Gates 032-4.c.i Vehicular gates shall be sized appropriately for their use and traffic. 032-4.c.ii Vehicular gates over 6’-0” in length shall be double leafed, with a retractable cane bolt on each leaf. Vehicle gates 6’-0” and under shall be single leafed gate with retractable cane bolt. 032-4.c.iii Gate hardware shall be fork latched with padlock hole. Hardware shall be coordinated with local fire authority and sheriff to provide access as required. 032-4.c.iv Vehicular gate frames shall be sized in accordance with San Diego Regional Standard Drawings. 032-4.c.v Vehicular gate hinges shall be heavy duty hinges with a minimum of 4 hinges per each gate leaf. 032-4.d Maintenance Gates
PAGE 15 OF 26 Vista Unified School District Standards
032-4.d.i Maintenance gates shall be sized appropriately for their use with a minimum width of 3’-0”. 032-4.d.ii Gate hardware shall be fork latched with padlock hole. 032-4.d.iii Gate material shall be similar to material used for accessible pedestrian gates. 032-4.e Decorative Metal Fencing and Gates 032-4.e.i Industrial strength ornamental steel fencing system as manufactured by Ameristar utilizing the Aegis II Majestic design. The system shall include all required manufactured components including pickets, rails, posts, gates, and hardware as required by the design. 032-4.e.ii Gates shall be consistent in use and function as the chain link versions listed above. 032-5 Pre-Fabricated Metal Ramps 032-5.a Pre-fabricated metal ramp shall be manufactured by TMP Ramps, Inc. Ramps shall be galvanized steel ramps with 16 ga. galvanized steel skirting. Skirting shall be welded to ramp as required with all welds ground smooth. The panels shall be fully welded with no visible gaps between the paneling and ramp. Any exposed steel skirting edges shall be ground smooth and finished to reduce corrosion. Ramps shall be installed on top of 2x pressure lumber to eliminate long term maintenance and corrosion. Where feasible TMP Ramp’s PC drawings shall be utilized. 032-6 Site Utilities 032-6.a All site water distribution shall have adequate isolation valves beyond those provided at each building to allow for service. 032-6.b All backflow preventers shall be Wilkins. 032-6.c All site sewer up 6” in size shall be solid core PVC with solvent cement fittings.
PAGE 16 OF 26 Vista Unified School District Standards
032-7 Landscape 032-7.a Refer to technical specifications.
PAGE 17 OF 26 Vista Unified School District Standards
Standard Details
NOTES:
ALL VISIBLE WOOD MEMBERS SHALL BE STAIN GRADE OAK MATERIAL.
ALL FASTENERS SHALL BE COUNTERSUNK, FILLED, AND STAINED TO MATCH ADJACENT MATERIAL.
PROVIDE 3/4" OAK VENEAR PLYWOOD PANEL. PANEL TO BE STAIND AND SEALED BOTH SIDES (TYP.). 1X OAK STOP, STAINED
#10 WOOD SCREWS MIN. 3 SECURE GATE EACH MEMBER, STRIKE/JAMB TO EXISTING COUNTERSUNK WITH A FRAMING. IN LIEU OF MIN. EMBEDMENT OF 1" IN EXISTING FRAMING, EXISTING STUD OR PROVIDE 4X BLOCKING. BLOCKING. (TYP. BOTH JAMB AND STRIKE)
PLAN
pln .
Gate 4" HEAVY DUTY SPRING VARIES (4'-0" MAX.) PROVIDE 1X OAK TRIM
HINGES. PROVIDE Swing Swing \ AT ALL EDGES OF MINIMUM ONE AT TOP
GATE PANEL. Details
\ AND BOTTOM OF GATE. Specs PROVIDE 3/4" OAK VENEAR
PLYWOOD PANEL. PANEL TO Proprietary Proprietary
BE STAIND AND SEALED. 3'-0"
VUSD VUSD 6"
015 015 (E) FF
-
17
\
Projects Active Active
\ ELEVATION
Projects
ASDG ASDG
\
: T
ALPHASTUDIO DESIGN GROUP DATE: SK-00 5/21/2018 6152 INNOVATION WAY CARLSBAD SWING GATE WALL MTD. CALIFORNIA 92009 SCALE: NTS P: 760-431-2444 NOTES:
ALL VISIBLE WOOD MEMBERS SHALL BE STAIN GRADE OAK MATERIAL.
ALL FASTENERS SHALL BE COUNTERSUNK, FILLED, AND STAINED TO MATCH ADJACENT MATERIAL. 1X OAK STOP, STAINED 2X2X7 GA. STEEL TUBE, TYPICAL ALL POSTS. STEEL TUBES TO BE PROVIDE 3/4" OAK VENEAR WRAPPED WITH 1/2" PLYWOOD PANEL (TYPICAL OAK VENEER AND GATE AND FIXED PANEL). STAINED TO MATCH PANEL TO BE STAIND AND OTHER WOOD SEALED BOTH SIDES (TYP.). MEMBERS.
1/2" OAK MEMBER, #10 SELF TAPPING SCREWS SECURE WITH #10 SELF MIN. 3 EACH MEMBER, TAPPING SCREWS (TYP. COUNTERSUNK WITH A AT FIXED PANELS). MIN. EMBEDMENT OF 1" IN STEEL TUBE. (TYP. BOTH PLAN JAMB STRIKE, AND AT FIXED PANELS)
OAK VENEER WRAPPED,
pln 8'-0" MAX. PROVIDE 1X OAK TRIM . STEEL TUBE. REFER TO AT ALL EDGES OF Gate PLAN. (TYP. ALL POSTS) VAR. VARIES
(4'-0" (4'-0" MAX.) GATE AND FIXED Swing Swing
\ MAX.) PANELS. Details \ 4" HEAVY DUTY SPRING
Specs HINGES. PROVIDE 2'-6" MINIMUM ONE AT TOP
AND BOTTOM OF GATE. Proprietary Proprietary
(E) FF 6" VUSD VUSD
. CONCRETE FOOTING, 015 015
- 2,500 PSI MIN.
17
\ 1'-6" PROVIDE 3/4" OAK MIN VENEAR PLYWOOD Projects 4 1/2"
PANEL (TYP. GATE AND Active Active \ FIXED PANEL). PANEL
TO BE STAIND AND TYP.
CLR. 3" 3" Projects SEALED.
ELEVATION
ASDG ASDG
\
: T
ALPHASTUDIO DESIGN GROUP DATE: SK-01 5/21/2018 6152 INNOVATION WAY CARLSBAD SWING GATE FLOOR MTD. CALIFORNIA 92009 SCALE: NTS P: 760-431-2444 NOTES:
ALL VISIBLE WOOD MEMBERS SHALL BE STAIN GRADE OAK MATERIAL.
ALL FASTENERS SHALL BE COUNTERSUNK, FILLED, AND STAINED TO MATCH ADJACENT MATERIAL. 1X OAK STOP, STAINED 2X2X7 GA. STEEL TUBE, TYPICAL ALL POSTS. STEEL TUBES TO BE PROVIDE 3/4" OAK VENEAR WRAPPED WITH 1/2" PLYWOOD PANEL (TYPICAL OAK VENEER AND GATE AND FIXED PANEL). STAINED TO MATCH PANEL TO BE STAIND AND OTHER WOOD SEALED BOTH SIDES (TYP.). MEMBERS.
1/2" OAK MEMBER, #10 SELF TAPPING SCREWS SECURE WITH #10 SELF MIN. 3 EACH MEMBER, TAPPING SCREWS (TYP. COUNTERSUNK WITH A AT FIXED PANELS). MIN. EMBEDMENT OF 1" IN STEEL TUBE. (TYP. BOTH PLAN JAMB STRIKE, AND AT FIXED PANELS)
OAK VENEER WRAPPED,
pln 8'-0" MAX. PROVIDE 1X OAK TRIM . STEEL TUBE. REFER TO AT ALL EDGES OF Gate PLAN. (TYP. ALL POSTS) VAR. VARIES
(4'-0" (4'-0" MAX.) GATE AND FIXED Swing Swing
\ MAX.) PANELS. Details \ 4" HEAVY DUTY SPRING
Specs HINGES. PROVIDE 2'-6" MINIMUM ONE AT TOP
AND BOTTOM OF GATE. Proprietary Proprietary
(E) FF 6"
VUSD VUSD BASE PLATE PER SK-03, TYP. 015 015
- ALL POSTS. 17 \ PROVIDE 3/4" OAK VENEAR PLYWOOD
Projects PANEL (TYP. GATE AND Active Active \ FIXED PANEL). PANEL TO BE STAIND AND
Projects SEALED.
ELEVATION
ASDG ASDG
\
: T
ALPHASTUDIO DESIGN GROUP DATE: SK-02 5/21/2018 6152 INNOVATION WAY CARLSBAD SWING GATE W/ BASE PLATE CALIFORNIA 92009 SCALE: NTS P: 760-431-2444 4"X4", 1/2" THK. STEEL BASE PLATE, PAINTED.
STEEL TUBE PER PLAN.
1/4" WELD STEEL TUBE TO
BASE PLATE.
pln
.
Gate
Swing Swing
\
Details
\ Specs
Proprietary Proprietary HILTI KB 1/4" X 3-1/4" EXPANSION ANCHORS.
VUSD VUSD TYPICAL AT EACH HOLE.
015 015
-
17
\
Projects
Active Active
\
Projects
ASDG ASDG
\
: T
ALPHASTUDIO DESIGN GROUP DATE: SK-03 5/21/2018 6152 INNOVATION WAY CARLSBAD BASE PLATE PLAN CALIFORNIA 92009 SCALE: NTS P: 760-431-2444 NOTES: 1. CHAIN LINK FENCING TO CONFORM TO SPECS. AND SEC. 206-6 OF STD. SPECS FOR PUBLIC WORKS CONSTRUCTION. 2. REFERENCE DRAWING M-6 AND M-20 OF SAN DIEGO REGIONAL STANDARD DRAWINGS. 3. NO WIND BLOCKING SLATS OR FABRIC ON FENCE.
LINE POST W/ CAP 10' MAX. 10'-0" MAX. HORIZONTAL BRACE 1-1/4" DIA. PIPE POST TOP FITTING 3/8" TRUSS ROD
W/ TENSIONER pln . 9 GA. CHAIN LINK
Gate 2" MESH Swing Swing
\ DEPTH:
REINFORCING 2" 32" FOR
TYP. Details \ TENSION WIRE FENCE UNDER
Specs 5'-0". CROWN FOR 36" FOR DRAINAGE (MIN. 1") 9" FENCE OVER Proprietary Proprietary MIN. 5'-0" TO 8'-0"
VUSD VUSD CONCRETE FOOTING MAX. TYP. 015 015
- DIA. OF FTG. 4 TIMES 17 \ 4" THICK BY 18" WIDE OUTSIDE DIA. OF POST. CONC. MOW STRIP W/ #3
Projects REINF. AT LANDSCAPE AREAS
Active Active
\
Projects
ASDG ASDG
\
: T
ALPHASTUDIO DESIGN GROUP DATE: SK-04 5/21/2018 6152 INNOVATION WAY CARLSBAD VUSD CHAINLINK FENCING CALIFORNIA 92009 SCALE: NTS P: 760-431-2444 WELDED GATE FRAME GALVANIZED STEEL TABS WELDED TO SURFACE TO SECURE CHAIN LINK (TYP. TOP & BOT.) GATE HINGES PER SPECS. 10" HIGH KICKPLATE WELD TO GATE FRAME EACH SIDE
PLANS PER .) WIDTH MAX GATE (4'-0"
GALVANIZED CHAIN LINK 9 GA. 1" MESH PER SPECS
EXIT DEVICE
HARDWARE
pln
. Gate
L
C
Swing Swing
\
Details \
.
F
.
F Specs
.
A
"
40
Proprietary Proprietary
VUSD VUSD
015 015
- 17 \ GALV. STEEL FINISH
GATE STOPS " SURFACE Projects
36
NOTE: Active Active \ CHAIN LINK FENCING TO
12" DIA. CONC. "
2 CONFORM TO SPECS &
Projects FTG. - CROWN AT STD SPEC FOR PUBLIC
LANDSCAPE AREA WORKS CONSTRUCTION
ASDG ASDG \
: SEC. 206-6 T
ALPHASTUDIO DESIGN GROUP DATE: SK-05 5/21/2018 6152 INNOVATION WAY CARLSBAD VUSD CHAINLINK GATE CALIFORNIA 92009 SCALE: NTS P: 760-431-2444 TYP. STEEL LATCH GUARD 1/8" 1@4"O.C. EA. SIDE PLAN 12 GA. GALV. TYP. @ 1/8" 1@4"O.C. BENT PLATE PLATE GATE FRAME PIPE
12 GA. GALV. PLATE VON DUPRIN 994L626 TRIM TYP. EA. SIDE OF W/ BREAKAWAY LEVER. 953X626 FALCON GATE LEVER TO RETURN TO W/IN RIM CYLINDER ELEVATION 1/2" OF GATE SURFACE. 12 GA. GALV. PLATE TYP. @ TYP. EA. SIDE OF 1/8" 1@4"O.C. PLATE GATE NOTE: ROLLER STRIKE 5LB. MAX. OPERATING
VON #299 OR EQUAL PRESSURE FOR GATE pln . OPERATION.
Gate FENCE GATE
9" Swing Swing
\ POST
PROVIDE 1.62" OD
. F
Details GRADE A STEEL
.
\ F
RAILS AT TOP & .
A Specs
2" MAX. BOTTOM OF "
PLATES. 40 CHAIN LINK MESH
Proprietary Proprietary WELD TO GATE SURFACE MOUNTED PUSH FRAME.
VUSD VUSD PAD EXIT DEVICE EQUAL 015 015
- ALL FINISHES TO BE TO VON DUPRIN 17 \ 626 U.N.O. 99EO-626-299 W/ 'PA' & 'AX'
OPTION
Projects
Active Active
\
Projects
ASDG ASDG
\
: T
ALPHASTUDIO DESIGN GROUP DATE: SK-06 5/21/2018 6152 INNOVATION WAY CARLSBAD VUSD GATE HARDWARE CALIFORNIA 92009 SCALE: NTS P: 760-431-2444 Vista Unified School District Standards
Technical Specifications
SECTION 08 1113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Non-fire-rated hollow metal doors and frames. B. Fire-rated hollow metal doors and frames. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DESIGN CRITERIA A. Requirements for Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: 1. Steel used for fabrication of doors and frames shall comply with one or more of the following requirements; Galvannealed steel conforming to ASTM A653/A653M, cold-rolled steel conforming to ASTM A1008/A1008M, or hot-rolled pickled and oiled (HRPO) steel conforming to ASTM A1011/A1011M, Commercial Steel (CS) Type B for each. 2. Accessibility: Comply with California Building Code, Chapter 11B. 3. Hardware Preparation: In accordance with BHMA A156.115 and SDI-107, with reinforcement welded in place, in addition to other requirements specified in door grade standard. 4. Finish: Factory primed, for field finishing. 2.02 HOLLOW METAL DOORS A. Door Finish: Factory primed and field finished. B. All Doors, Exterior and Interior Non-Rated Typical: 1. Grade: ANSI A250.8 Level 3, physical performance Level A, Model 2, seamless. a. Level 3 - Extra Heavy-duty. b. Physical Performance Level A, 1,000,000 cycles; in accordance with ANSI/SDI A250.4. c. Model 2 - Seamless. d. Door Face Metal Thickness: 16 gage, 0.053 inch (1.3 mm), minimum. e. Zinc Coating: A60/ZF180 galvannealed coating; ASTM A653/A653M. 2. Door Core Material: Manufacturers standard core material/construction and in compliance with requirements. 3. Door Thickness: 1-3/4 inch (44.5 mm), nominal. 4. Top Closures : Flush with top of faces and edges. 5. Galvanizing: Components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed) in accordance with ASTM A653/A653M, with manufacturer's standard coating thickness. 6. Door Face Sheets: Flush. C. Fire Rated Doors Exterior and Interior Typical, : 1. Grade: ANSI/SDI A250.8 (SDI-100); Level 3 - Extra Heavy-Duty, Physical Performance Level A, Model 2 - Seamless. a. Level 3 - Extra Heavy-duty. b. Physical Performance Level A, 1,000,000 cycles; in accordance with ANSI/SDI A250.4. c. Model 2 - Seamless. d. Door Face Metal Thickness: 16 gage, 0.053 inch (1.3 mm), minimum. 2. Fire Rating: As indicated on Door Schedule, tested in accordance with UL 10C and NFPA 252 ("positive pressure fire tests"). a. Provide units listed and labeled by UL (DIR) or ITS (DIR). b. Attach fire rating label to each fire rated unit after finishing. Lable must be readily visible on the hinge side of fire rated unit. 3. Door Core Material: Manufacturers standard core material/construction in compliance with requirements. 4. Door Thickness: 1-3/4 inch (44.5 mm), nominal.
Vista USD Standards and 08 1113 - 1 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND Specifications FRAMES 2.03 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES A. Comply with standards and/or custom guidelines as indicated for corresponding door in accordance with applicable door frame requirements. B. General: 1. Comply with the requirements of grade specified for corresponding door. 2. Finish: Same as for door. C. All Steel Door Frames: Fully welded. 1. Galvanizing: Components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed) in accordance with ASTM A653/A653M, with A40/ZF120 coating. 2. Frame Metal Thickness: 16 gage, 0.053 inch (1.3 mm), minimum. D. Fire-Rated Door Frames: Full profile/continuously welded type. 1. Fire Rating: Same as door, labeled. 2. Frame Metal Thickness: 16 gage, 0.053 inch (1.3 mm), minimum. 3. Attach fire rating label to each fire rated unit after finishing. Lable must be readily visible on the hinge side of fire rated unit. E. Borrowed Lites Glazing Frames: Construction and face dimensions to match door frames, and as indicated on drawings. 2.04 FINISHES A. Primer: Rust-inhibiting, complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10, door manufacturer's standard. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Glazing: As specified in Section 08 8000, factory installed. B. Silencers: Resilient rubber, fitted into drilled hole; provide three on strike side of single door, three on center mullion of pairs, and two on head of pairs without center mullions. C. Temporary Frame Spreaders: Provide for factory- or shop-assembled frames. 2.06 FRAME ANCHORS A. Provide sufficient anchorage to attach to wall in accordance with ANSI/SDI-119 Test Compliance Level A of one million cycles, or anchorage as detailed on plans to specific wall conditions. 1. All frame jamb anchors to be provided: one each jamb per 30 Inches of frame height or fraction thereof. Furnish anchors at headers exceeding 48 Inches. B. Floor anchors - angle type: 1. Minimum 16 gage. 2. To receive 2 fasteners per jamb. 3. Welded to the bottom of each jamb. C. Head struts: for frames not anchored to masonry or concrete construction provide ceiling struts spot welded to jambs each side extending to building structure where called for on schedule. 2.07 HARDWARE PREPARATION A. Reinforcements: reinforce components for hardware installation in accord with SDI-107 and ANSI-A115. Provide minimum gage hardware reinforcing for mortise or surface applied hardware as follows: 1. Hinges - 10 gage or equivalent number of threads on doors. 2. Hinges - 7 gage on frames. 3. Locks - 12 gage or equivalent on threads. 4. Panics - 12 gage. 5. Surface Closer - 12 gage. 6. Hold Open Device - 12 gage. 7. Floor Check - 7 gage. B. Punch single leaf frames to receive three (3) silencers. Double leaf frames to receive one silencer per leaf at head.
Vista USD Standards and 08 1113 - 2 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND Specifications FRAMES C. Factory prepared hardware locations to be in accord with "Recommended Locations for Builders' Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames", as adopted by the Steel Door Institute. D. Supply welded in mortar guards at all hardware cutouts in frames build into masonry or grouted in full. 2.08 FINISH MATERIALS A. Primer: Rust-inhibiting, complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10, door manufacturer's standard. END OF SECTION
Vista USD Standards and 08 1113 - 3 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND Specifications FRAMES SECTION 08 3300 OVERHEAD COILING SERVICE DOORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Overhead coiling service doors. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Overhead Door Corp.: www.overheaddoor.com B. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 OVERHEAD COILING SERVICE DOORS A. Industrial Doors: Overhead Door Corporation, Model 610 Service Doors. 1. Curtain: Interlocking roll-formed slats as specified following. Endlocks shall be attached to each end of alternate slats to prevent lateral movement. a. Curved profile type C-187 for doors up to 15 feet 4 inches (4.67 m) wide, fabricated of: 1) 24 gauge galvanized steel. 2) 22 gauge galvanized steel. 3) 20 gauge galvanized steel. 4) 18 gauge galvanized steel. 5) 22 gauge stainless steel. 6) 20 gauge stainless steel. 7) 18 gauge aluminum. b. Curved profile type C-275 for doors up to and between 15 feet 4 inches (4.67 m) and 18 feet 4 inches (5.59 m) wide, fabricated of: 1) 22 gauge galvanized steel. 2) 20 gauge galvanized steel. 3) 18 gauge galvanized steel. 4) 16 gauge galvanized steel. 5) 22 gauge stainless steel. 6) 20 gauge stainless steel. 7) 16 gauge aluminum. c. Curved profile type C-275 for doors between 18 feet 4 inches (5.59 m) and 25 feet 4 inches (7.72 m) wide, fabricated of: 1) 20 gauge galvanized steel. 2) 18 gauge galvanized steel. 3) 16 gauge galvanized steel. 4) 20 gauge stainless steel. 5) 14 gauge aluminum. d. Curved profile type C-275 for doors between 25 feet 4 inches (7.72 m) and 40 feet (12.19 m) wide, fabricated of: 1) 18 gauge galvanized steel. 2) 16 gauge galvanized steel. 3) 14 gauge aluminum. Maximum width is 27 feet. e. For fenestrated service doors, provide slats with 3 inch by 5/8 inch (76 mm by 16 mm) uniformly spaced openings. f. For ventilated service doors, provide slats with 1/16 inch (16 mm) diameter perforations 3/32 inch (2.4 mm) on center staggered rows. 2. Finish: a. Galvanized Steel: Slats and hood galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 653 and receive rust-inhibitive, roll coating process, including 0.2 mils thick baked-on prime paint, and 0.6 mils thick baked-on polyester top coat.
Vista USD Standards and 08 3300 - 1 OVERHEAD COILING SERVICE Specifications DOORS 1) Polyester Top Coat. (a) Gray polyester. (b) Tan polyester. (c) White polyester. (d) Brown polyester. 2) Powder coat: PowderGuard (a) PowderGuard Premium: Weather resistant polyester powder coat color as selected by the Architect. (b) PowderGuard Weathered Finish: Industrial textured powder coat provides a thicker, more scratch resistant coat. Applied to entire door system including slats, guides, bottom bar and head plate. 3) Non-galvanized exposed ferrous surfaces shall receive one coat of rust-inhibitive primer. b. Stainless Steel: Slats and hood shall be stainless steel finished as follows. 1) Finish: 2B mill finish. 2) Finish: No. 4 satin finish. c. Aluminum: Slats and hood shall be aluminum finished as follows. 1) Finish: Mill finish. 2) Finish: Clear anodized finish. 3) Finish: Bronze anodized finish. 4) Finish: Powder coat, PowderGuard. (a) PowderGuard Premium: Weather resistant polyester powder coat color as selected by the Architect. (b) PowderGuard Weathered Finish: Industrial textured powder coat provides a thicker, more scratch resistant coat. Applied to entire door system including slats, guides, bottom bar and head plate. 3. Weatherseals: a. Vinyl bottom seal. b. Guide weatherseal. 4. Bottom Bar: a. Extruded aluminum for doors up to 15 feet 4 inches (4.67 m) wide. b. Two primed steel angles for doors over 15 feet 4 inches (4.67 m) wide. c. Two galvanized steel angles. 5. Guides: Three structural steel angles. a. Finish: PowderGuard Weathered finish with iron/black powder. b. Finish: PowderGuard Zinc Finish for guides, bottom bar and head plate. 6. Brackets: a. Hot rolled steel to support counterbalance, curtain and hood. b. Galvanized steel to support counterbalance, curtain and hood. 7. Counterbalance: Helical torsion spring type housed in a steel tube or pipe barrel, supporting the curtain with deflection limited to 0.03 inch per foot of span. Counterbalance is adjustable by means of an adjusting tension wheel. 8. Hood: a. 24 gauge galvanized steel with intermediate supports as required. b. Stainless steel, 24 gauge hood with intermediate supports as required. c. Aluminum hood with intermediate supports as required. 9. Manual Operation: a. Manual push up for doors up to 96 SF. b. Chain hoist for doors up to 96 SF. c. Chain hoist for doors over 96 SF. d. Crank operation. 10. Electric Motor Operation: Provide UL listed electric operator, size as recommended by manufacturer to move door in either direction at not less than 2/3 foot nor more than 1 foot per second.
Vista USD Standards and 08 3300 - 2 OVERHEAD COILING SERVICE Specifications DOORS a. Sensing Edge Protection: 1) Pneumatic sensing edge. 2) Electric sensing edge. b. Operator Controls: 1) Push-button operated control stations with open, close, and stop buttons. 2) Key operation with open, close, and stop controls. 3) Push-button and key operated control stations with open, close, and stop buttons. 4) Controls for interior location. 5) Controls for exterior location. 6) Controls for both interior and exterior location. 7) Controls surface mounted. 8) Controls flush mounted. c. Special Operation: 1) Vehicle detector operation. 2) Radio control operation. 3) Card reader control. 4) Photocell operation. 5) Door timer operation. 6) Commercial light package. 7) Explosion and dust ignition proof control wiring. d. Motor Voltage: 115/230 single phase, 60 Hz. 11. Windload Design: a. Standard windload shall be 20 PSF. 12. Locking: a. Two interior bottom bar slide bolts for manually operated doors. b. Chain keeper locks for chain hoist operation. c. Interior slide bolt lock for electric operation with interlock switch. d. Cylinder lock. 13. Wall Mounting Condition: a. Face-of-wall mounting. b. Between jambs mounting. 14. Vision Lites: Provide with 3 inch by 5/8 inch (76 mm by 16 mm) uniformly spaced openings. a. Provide open with no cover. b. Provide with Plexiglas covers over openings. END OF SECTION
Vista USD Standards and 08 3300 - 3 OVERHEAD COILING SERVICE Specifications DOORS SECTION 08 3320 OVERHEAD COILING COUNTER DOORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Overhead Coiling Counter Doors, power operated. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Overhead Door Corp.: www.overheaddoor.com B. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 OVERHEAD COILING METAL COUNTER DOORS WITH INTEGRAL FRAME A. Painted Steel Counter Doors with Integral Frame: Overhead Door Corporation, 658 Series. 1. Curtain: Interlocking 22 gauge galvanized steel slats with endlock for curtain alignment and and steel bottom bar with lift handle, concealed slide bolts and vinyl astragal. 2. Integral Frame and Sill: Integral steel frame and stainless steel sill. Frame consists of 16 gauge jambs and header, with 14 gauge sill. 3. Finish: Steel primed. a. Gray. 4. Counterbalance: Helical torsion spring type housed in a steel tube or pipe barrel, supporting the curtain with deflection limited to 0.03 inch (0.8 mm) per foot of span. Counterbalance shall be adjustable by means of an adjusting tension wheel. 5. Hood: Steel prime painted and provided with intermediate support brackets as required. 6. Operation: a. Powered Commercial Operator: See Section 08 7340. 7. Locking: a. Recessed slide bolt. b. Cylinder lock. 8. Wall Mounting Condition: a. As indicated on drawings. END OF SECTION
Vista USD Standards and 08 3320 - 1 OVERHEAD COILING COUNTER Specifications DOORS SECTION 08 7100 DOOR HARDWARE
Please adhere to the following when specifying hardware for Specification Section 08 71 00 for new construction or renovation projects:
Unless noted otherwise, all finishes to be brushed chrome (626/652), brushed stainless steel (630) or painted to Finishes match (689) Aluminum products will have either mill or anodized aluminum finish (AL/628) Medeco Keymark SFIC 7-pin on all new projects. Contact the District Locksmith for final keying/keying instruction on Key System all projects, no exceptions. Confirm if construction cores are required for your project. Mortise: Schlage L/LV9000HD Series 17A: New Construction, Exterior Locations, Higher Security Requirement Cylindrical Locksets: Schlage ND Series HD Sparta (SPA) W/K510-066: New Construction, Interior Locations, Existing Locksets door with cylindrical prep Exterior Applications: L/LV9000 locking functions x Ives VR 900 Series Pull
Von Duprin 99 Series Exit Device at hollow metal, wood and wide stile storefront aluminum doors 996L-F-17-SS lever trim at rated openings and 996L-SS lever trim at non-rated openings Exit Devices Cylinder dogging or double cylinder where required to meet the AB211 Safe Schools Requirement. The dogging feature is allowed on exit devices that are always locked on the exterior side of the door. Dogging to be controlled by cylinder (or thumb-turn).
Indicator Trim Use Schlage or Von Duprin locked status indicators on doors required to meet the intent of AB211. Vandal Ives VR 900/910 Series: used at exterior or excessive abuse locations or as directed by V.U.S.D. Resistant Pulls Exterior Door Ives Offset Door Pull 8190 Series: used where directed by V.U.S.D., typically on high visibility storefront aluminum Pulls entrances Mullions Von Duprin keyed removable mullion, KR4954-STAB-MT54 Series where required, coordinate with V.U.S.D. Exterior (HMD): LCN 4040XP Series x EDA or HEDA, S CUSH AND SH CUSH arms at out-swinging doors Exterior (ALD): LCN 4040XP Series W/4040XP-18TJ mount & Glynn Johnson 100 Series overhead stop at out-swinging Surface Closer doors Interior: LCN 4040XP Series x REG or H arms at in-swinging doors, 4040XP EDA/HEDA Series at out-swinging doors Floor Closers Do not specify. Existing: Remove and replace with continuous hinges if conditions permit
Auto-Flush Ives FB30-40 Series, less bottom bolt where applicable Bolts Ives FB50-60 Series, constant latching where applicable/code complying Hinges Interior/Exterior doors: Ives 5BB1/5BBHW (depending on frequency of traffic) Continuous Ives: Full Mortise Aluminum Geared Continuous Hinge 224XY at exterior or high frequency locations Hinges Glynn Johnson 90 Series. Use only where floor or wall stops are inadvisable or when a stop feature cannot be added Overhead to an overhead closer, if a closer is specified at that location. Stops Glynn Johnson 100 Series. Use at out-swinging storefront doors when a 180° swing isn’t possible Interior: Ives FS439 Series Floor Stops Exterior: Ives FS18S/L Wall Stops Interior Doors Only: Wall stops may be used sparingly, however, wall backing/wall backing details are required Protection Kickplates: Ives 8400 Series, 10” H x 2” less than door width (1” LDW at non-mullioned pairs) Plates Push/Pull Plates: Ives 8200 Series and 8303 Series Zero Transition Threshold, 102A or 103A MSLA-10, located where there is a ¼” difference in floor elevation Thresholds Zero Saddle Threshold, 500A MSLA-10 Series (dependent on jamb depth) Or as detailed on plan Exterior Doors (out-swing): Frame head, Zero 429A (solid material for closer installation), jambs, 326AA Door Seals Interior Doors: Zero 188S x 3M Adhesive stick-on seal Padlocks Master Padlocks (rekeyable) #21 or #27 on all new construction. Confirm keying with V.U.S.D. Vista USD Standards and 08 7100 - 1 DOOR HARDWARE Specifications
Auto Operators Any Requirement?
Access Control Any Requirement?
Steelcraft Hollow Metal Products (ANSI A250.8-2003/SDI 100 compliance required)
Exterior Doors: “B” Series 16 gauge, steel-stiffened/fiberglass insulated core, A60 galvanneal, seal top cap Exterior Frames: “F” Series 14 gauge frames, welded corners, A60 galvanneal Interior Doors: “L” Series 18 gauge, honeycomb core, A60 galvanneal Interior Frames: “MU” Series 16 gauge frames, welded corners, A60 galvanneal Hollow Metal Prepare and reinforce as required for hardware or fire-rating Doors & Frame Anchors (new construction): Masonry, use “T”, Steel Stud Partition, use welded steel stud anchors “SSA” or Frames “Z”, Wood Stud Partition, use welded wood stud anchors “WSA”, Welded or adjustable base anchors are acceptable Frame Anchors (existing construction): Masonry, use punch and dimple “P & D”, after drywall (existing opening) use jamb/compression with adjustable base anchors A60 Hot-dip galvannealed steel (ASTM A 653) minimum on all hollow metal products Confer with the architect if G90 Hot-dip galvanizing requested. This process creates a rougher material surface/paint substrate leading to an unappealing finish. All G90 galvanizing must be etched prior to paint application for better paint adhesion
The Vista Unified School District uses Allegion Safety & Security Consultants as its consultant for doors and door hardware. Contact(s) with the firm are as follows:
Architectural Consultant; Kevin Lundberg (858) 254.8181 End-User Consultant; Carlos Baca (951) 522.3056 Specification Consultant; Peter Campos (858) 518.5244
We request that you contact any of these individuals to assist your firm in the preparation of the hardware specification (Section 08 71 00) for all projects in our school district. There is no fee for this service. The Vista Unified School District facilities personnel are trained in the installation and maintenance of the above products and the department possesses considerable stock(s) of product for maintenance and replacement work.
Vista USD Standards and 08 7100 - 2 DOOR HARDWARE Specifications
SECTION 08 7340 COMMERCIAL DOOR OPERATORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Overhead Rolling Door and Grille Operators. B. Overhead Counter Door Operators. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Overhead Door Corporation: www.overheaddoor.com B. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements 2.02 OVERHEAD ROLLING DOOR AND GRILLE OPERATORS A. Commercial Rolling Door and Grille Operator: Model RSX Commercial Standard Duty Door Operator: 1. Application: a. Rolling Steel Doors. b. Rolling Steel Fire Doors. c. Rolling Steel Grilles. 2. Electric Motor: UL listed. a. Rating: 1) 1/2 horsepower single phase or three. 2) 3/4 single phase or three phase. 3) 1 horsepower single phase or three phase. b. Motor frame comply with: 1) NEMA 48 for 1/2 hp single phase. 2) NEMA 56 for 1/2 hp three phase. 3) NEMA 56 3/4 and 1 hp all phases. c. Construction: 1) Open drip-proof construction. 2) Totally Enclosed Non Ventilated – TENV construction. 3) Totally Enclosed Fan Cooled – TEFC construction. 4) Washdown – NEMA 4 / NEMA 4X construction d. Reduction: Primary reduction is SuperBelt, an auto tension poly-V flex belt that does not require adjustment. Secondary reduction is by chain and sprocket. e. Duty cycle: Accommodate standard usage, up to 60 cycles per hour during peak usage periods. 1) Brake: DC Disc type with selectable Progressive Braking for smooth stopping. 2) Clutch: Adjustable friction disc type. 3) Limit System: LimitLock limit system, magnetic type providing absolute positioning with push to set and remote setting capabilities. Limit System shall remain synchronized with the door during manual operation and supply power interruptions. 3. Control System: Microprocessor based with relay motor controls on a single board. System incorporates a 16 character Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) to display the system status. System shall include the following: a. Capable of monitoring and reporting on a variety of operating conditions, including: Current operating status, Current command status, Motor movement status, Current error status (if applicable), Hoist Interlock status (if applicable), External Interlock status, and 24VDC status. b. A delay-on-reverse operating protocol. c. Maximum run timers in both directions of travel that limit motor run time in the event a clutch slips or some other problem occurs.
Vista USD Standards and 08 7340 - 1 COMMERCIAL DOOR Specifications OPERATORS d. Provisions for connection of a 2-wire monitored photo-eye or a 2-wire monitored edge sensor, as well as non-monitored standard 2-wire sensing edges, photo-eyes or other entrapment protection devices. e. Control action will be constant contact close until a monitored entrapment device is installed, allowing for selection of momentary contact. f. Provisions for connection of single and/or 3-button control stations. g. Provisions for connection of an external 3-wire radio controls and related control devices. h. On board open, close and stop control keys for local operation. i. CodeDodger radio receiver that is dual frequency cycling at 315 Mhz and 390 Mhz capable of storing 250 single button and/or 250 Open-Close-Stop transmitters with the ability to add and/or delete transmitters individually, identify and store activating transmitter IDs. 4. Mounting: a. Rolling Steel doors: 1) Front of hood and chain/sprocket coupling to door. 2) Top of hood and chain/sprocket coupling to door. 3) Wall-mount and chain/sprocket coupling to door. 4) Bench mount and chain/sprocket coupling to door. 5) Front of hood horizontal and chain/sprocket coupling to door. 6) Mounting for Hoist models, Left Hand or Right Hand. 5. Release: a. Release shall be a pull and hold type mechanism with single cable operation and an integrated interlock switch. 6. Hoist: Chain hoist consists of chain pocket wheel, chain guard and smooth hand chain on hoist units. 7. Entrapment Protection: a. Control system shall have provisions to connect monitored entrapment protection devices such as monitored electric sensing edge or monitored photo-eye and to provide constant contact close control operation in lieu of such devices. 8. Control accessories: a. Operator Controls: 1) Push-button operated control stations with open, close, and stop buttons. 2) Key operation with open, close, and stop controls. 3) Push-button and key operated control stations with open, close, and stop buttons. 4) Controls for interior location. 5) Controls for exterior location. 6) Controls for both interior and exterior location. 7) Controls surface mounted. 8) Controls flush mounted. b. Special Operation: 1) Vehicle detector operation. 2) Radio control operation. 3) Card reader control. 4) OHD monitored photo-eyes. 5) Commercial photo-eyes. 6) Timer Close Module for unattended timed door closing. Auxiliary control inputs, safety inputs, timer hold input and automatic door closing feature with selectable time delay. Safety inputs can be configured using on board keypad. 7) Commercial light package. 8) Auxiliary Output Module for up, down, and mid-stop limit status via several auxiliary sets of dry contacts that are microprocessor controlled. ADA compliant outputs that activate when door is moving up, down, or both directions and can be configured using the on board keypad.
Vista USD Standards and 08 7340 - 2 COMMERCIAL DOOR Specifications OPERATORS 2.03 OVERHEAD COILING COUNTER DOORS A. Counter Door Operator: Model CDX Counter Door Operator: 1. Electric Motor: Intermittent-duty, with instant reverse and automatic reset thermal overload. UL listed. a. Rating: 1) 1/2 horsepower single phase. 2) 115 V. b. Motor frame comply with: 1) NEMA 42 for 1/2 hp single phase. c. Construction: 1) Open drip-proof construction. d. Reduction: Helical gear primary reduction and hardened bevel gear secondary reduction. e. Duty cycle: Accommodate light duty usage, up to 4 cycles per hour. 1) Limit System: LimitLock limit system, magnetic type providing absolute positioning with push to set and remote setting capabilities. Limit System shall remain synchronized with the door during manual operation and supply power interruptions. 2. Control System: Microprocessor based with relay motor controls on a single board. System incorporates a 16 character Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) to display the system status. System shall include the following: a. A delay-on-reverse operating protocol. b. Maximum run timers in both directions of travel that limit motor run time in the event a problem occurs. c. Provisions for the connection of a 2-wire monitored photo-eye or a 2-wire monitored edge sensor, as well as non-monitored 2-wire sensing edges, photo-eyes or other entrapment protection devices. d. Control action will be constant contact close until a monitored entrapment device is installed, allowing for selection of momentary contact. e. Provisions for connection of single and/or 3-button control stations. f. On board open, close and stop control keys for local operation. 3. Mounting: a. Counter doors: 1) Front of hood and chain/sprocket coupling to door. 4. Release: a. Release shall be a pull and hold type mechanism with single cable operation and an integrated interlock switch on hoist units. 5. Hand Crank: Hand crank for manual door control. 6. Entrapment Protection: a. Control system shall have provisions to connect monitored entrapment protection devices such as monitored electric sensing edge, or monitored photo-eye and to provide constant contact close control operation in lieu of such devices. 7. Control accessories: a. Operator Controls: 1) Push-button operated control stations with open, close, and stop buttons. 2) Key operation with open, close, and stop controls. 3) Push-button and key operated control stations with open, close, and stop buttons. 4) Controls for interior location. 5) Controls for exterior location. 6) Controls for both interior and exterior location. 7) Controls surface mounted. 8) Controls flush mounted. b. Special Operation:
Vista USD Standards and 08 7340 - 3 COMMERCIAL DOOR Specifications OPERATORS 1) Radio control operation. 2) OHD monitored photo-eyes. 3) Commercial photo-eyes. 4) Fire Sentinel/Time Delay Release. 5) Timer Close Module for unattended timed door closing. Auxiliary control inputs, safety inputs, timer hold input and automatic door closing feature with selectable time delay. Safety inputs can be configured using on board keypad. 6) Auxiliary Output Module for up, down, and mid-stop limit status via several auxiliary sets of dry contacts that are microprocessor controlled. ADA compliant outputs that activate when door is moving up, down, or both directions and can be configured using the on board keypad. 8. Automatic Closure: a. Fire Sentinel time-relay release mechanism with motor close option provides an added measure of safety to control the doors' closure. 1) Voltage: 120 VAC 2) Voltage output 24 VDC 3) Release time delay: Factory set at 10 seconds can be field adjusted by dipswitch settings to 20, 30 and 60 seconds. 4) Must use normally open proximity switch to detect door is closed. 5) Can support 2 or 4 wire smoke detector system (maximum of 4 Class B Style A detectors. Release devices are normally open contacts. Provided with 4 wire detectors when detectors are specified with an end of line relay. 6) Unit has two 12 VDC batteries 24 VDC output. 7) Power Loss Time delay: 48 hours. 8) Unit can power an optional ADA horn / strobe 24 VDC. 9) Load Rating: Support and Release 40 lbs. maximum. 10) Auxiliary output module must be installed to accept wiring from Fire Sentinel. END OF SECTION
Vista USD Standards and 08 7340 - 4 COMMERCIAL DOOR Specifications OPERATORS SECTION 09 3000 TILING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Tile for floor applications. B. Tile for wall applications. C. Cementitious backer board as tile substrate. D. Ceramic accessories. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 TILE A. Manufacturers: All products by the same manufacturer. 1. Dal-Tile Corporation: www.daltile.com. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Glazed Wall Tile: 1. Moisture Absorption: Less than 20% percent as tested in accordance with ASTM C373. 2. Size: 4-1/4 by 4-1/4 inch (108 by 108 mm), nominal. 3. Edges: Square. 4. Surface Finish: High gloss. 5. Color(s): As selected from Price Groups 1-2 for field tiles and Price Groups 1-5 for accent tiles.. 6. Trim Units: Matching bead, bullnose, cove, and base shapes in sizes coordinated with field tile. C. Quarry Tile: ANSI A137.1, standard grade. 1. Moisture Absorption: 0.5 to 3.0 percent as tested in accordance with ASTM C373. 2. Size: 6 by 6 inch (152 by 152 mm), nominal. 3. Thickness: 1/2 inch (12.7 mm), nominal. 4. Edges: Square. 5. Surface Finish: Unglazed. 6. Color(s): Red Blaze Q40. 7. Trim Units: Matching bullnose, cove, cove base, and window sill or step nosing shapes in sizes coordinated with field tile. D. Porcelain Tile: 1. Moisture Absorption: 0 to 0.5 percent as tested in accordance with ASTM C373. 2. Size: 8 by 8 inch (203 by 203 mm), nominal. 3. Thickness: 5/16 inch (8 mm). 4. Edges: Square. 5. Surface Finish: Unpolished. 6. Color(s): To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 7. Trim Units: Matching bullnose, double bullnose, cove base, and cove shapes in sizes coordinated with field tile. 2.02 TRIM AND ACCESSORIES A. Ceramic Accessories: Glazed finish, same color and finish as adjacent field tile; same manufacturer as tile. 2.03 SETTING MATERIALS A. Mortar Bed Materials: Pre-packaged mix of Portland cement, sand, latex additive, and water. 1. Products: a. LATICRETE International, Inc; LATICRETE 3701 Fortified Mortar Bed: www.laticrete.com/#sle. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
Vista USD Standards and 09 3000 - 1 TILING Specifications 2.04 GROUTS A. Manufacturers: 1. ARDEX Engineered Cements; Rapid Set: www.ardexamericas.com. 2. Custom Building Products; Polyblend: www.custombuildingproducts.com. 3. LATICRETE International, Inc; LATICRETE PERMACOLOR Grout: www.laticrete.com/#sle. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. High Performance Polymer Modified Grout: ANSI A118.7 polymer modified cement grout. 1. Applications: Use this type of grout where indicated and where no other type of grout is indicated. 2. Use sanded grout for joints 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) wide and larger; use unsanded grout for joints less than 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) wide. 3. Color(s): As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line. C. Epoxy Grout: ANSI A118.3 chemical resistant and water-cleanable epoxy grout. 1. Applications: Where indicated. 2. Color(s): As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line. 2.05 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Tile Sealant: Gunnable, silicone, siliconized acrylic, or urethane sealant; moisture and mildew resistant type. 1. Applications: Between tile and plumbing fixtures. 2. Color(s): As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line. 3. Products: a. ARDEX Engineered Cements; ARDEX SX: www.ardexamericas.com/#sle. b. Custom Building Products; Commercial 100% Silicone Caulk: www.custombuildingproducts.com. c. LATICRETE International, Inc; LATICRETE LATASIL: www.laticrete.com/#sle. 2.06 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Concrete Floor Slab Crack Isolation Membrane: Material complying with ANSI A118.12; not intended as waterproofing. 1. Thickness: 20 mils (0.5 mm), maximum. 2. Crack Resistance: No failure at 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) gap, minimum. 3. Products: a. LATICRETE International, Inc; LATICRETE Blue 92 Anti-Fracture Membrane: www.laticrete.com/#sle. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Waterproofing Membrane at Floors: Specifically designed for bonding to cementitious substrate under thick mortar bed or thin-set tile; complying with ANSI A118.10. 1. Fluid or Trowel Applied Type: a. Material: Synthetic rubber. b. Thickness: 25 mils (0.6 mm), minimum, dry film thickness. c. Products: 1) Custom Building Products; RedGard Crack Prevention and Waterproofing Membrane: www.custombuildingproducts.com. 2) LATICRETE International, Inc; LATICRETE HYDRO BAN: www.laticrete.com/#sle. 3) Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. C. Waterproofing Membrane at Showers and Tiled Tubs: Specifically designed for bonding to cementitious substrate under thick mortar bed or thin-set tile; complying with ANSI A118.10. 1. Fluid or Trowel Applied Type: a. Material: Synthetic rubber. b. Thickness: 25 mils (0.6 mm), minimum, dry film thickness.
Vista USD Standards and 09 3000 - 2 TILING Specifications c. Products: 1) LATICRETE International, Inc; LATICRETE HYDRO BAN: www.laticrete.com/#sle. 2) Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. D. Cleavage Membrane Under Thick Mortar Bed: 1. Material: 4 mil (0.1 mm) thick polyethylene film. E. Membrane at Walls: 1. Material: No. 15 (6.9 kg) asphalt saturated felt. F. Metal Lath: ASTM C847, Flat diamond mesh, of weight to suit application, galvanized finish. G. Backer Board: Cementitious type complying with ANSI A118.9; high density, glass fiber reinforced, 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) thick; 2 inch (51 mm) wide coated glass fiber tape for joints and corners. END OF SECTION
Vista USD Standards and 09 3000 - 3 TILING Specifications SECTION 09 5100 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Suspended metal grid ceiling system. B. Acoustical units. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACOUSTICAL UNITS A. Manufacturers: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc; Product 755 B Fissured (Std. Locations) and Kitchen Zone (Kitchen and Restroom Locations): www.armstrong.com. B. Acoustical Units - General: ASTM E1264, Class A. C. Acoustical Panel: Wet-formed mineral fiber, ASTM E 1264 Type III, with the following characteristics: 1. Size: 24 x 48 inches (600 x 1200 mm). 2. Thickness: 5/8 inches (15.9 mm). 3. Composition: Wet formed mineral fiber. 4. Light Reflectance: 80 percent, determined as specified in ASTM E 1477. 5. Edge: Square. 6. Surface Color: White. 7. Surface Pattern: Non-directional fissured. 8. Location: Standard Application D. Acoustical Panels: Wet-formed mineral fiber, ASTM E1264 Type IX with the following characteristics: 1. Size: 24 by 48 inches (600 by 1200 mm). 2. Thickness: 5/8 inches (15 mm). 3. Composition: Wet formed mineral fiber. 4. Light Reflectance: 89 percent, determined in accordance with ASTM E1264. 5. Edge: Square. 6. Surface Color: White. 7. Location: Kitchen and Restrooms 2.02 SUSPENSION SYSTEM(S) A. Manufacturers: 1. Same as for acoustical units. B. Metal Suspension Systems - General: Complying with ASTM C635/C635M; die cut and interlocking components, with stabilizer bars, clips, splices, perimeter moldings, and hold down clips as required. C. Components: All main beams and cross tees shall be commercial quality hot-dipped galvanized (galvanized steel, aluminum, or stainless steel) as per ASTM A 653. Main beams and cross tees are double-web steel construction with type exposed flange design. Exposed surfaces chemically cleansed, capping pre-finished galvanized steel (aluminum or stainless steel) in baked polyester paint. Main beams and cross tees shall have rotary stitching (exception: extruded aluminum or stainless steel). D. ExposedSteel Suspension System: Formed steel, commercial quality cold rolled; heavy-duty. 1. Profile: Tee; 15/16 inch (24 mm) wide face. 2. Construction: Double web. 3. Finish: White painted. 4. Products: E. Suspension system shall meet DSA Product Acceptance Documents.
Vista USD Standards and 09 5100 - 1 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS Specifications 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Support Channels and Hangers: Galvanized steel; size and type to suit application, seismic requirements, and ceiling system flatness requirement specified. B. Attachment Devices: Size for five times design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, Direct Hung unless otherwise indicated. C. Wire for Hangers and Ties: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, pre-stretched, with a yield stress load of at least time three design load, but not less than 12 gauge. D. Edge Moldings and Trim: Metal or extruded aluminum of types and profiles indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations, including light fixtures, that fit type of edge detail and suspension system indicated. Provide moldings with exposed flange of the same width as exposed runner. END OF SECTION
Vista USD Standards and 09 5100 - 2 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS Specifications SECTION 09 6500 RESILIENT FLOORING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Resilient sheet flooring. B. Resilient tile flooring. C. Resilient base. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SHEET FLOORING A. Vinyl Sheet Flooring: iQ Granite as manufacturered by Takett. 1. Manufacturers: a. Tarkett; www.tarkettna.com. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2. Minimum Requirements: Comply with ASTM F1913. 3. Total Thickness and Wear Layer Thickness: 0.080 inch (2.0 mm) nominal. 4. Sheet Width: 72 inch (1830 mm) minimum. 5. Static Load Resistance: 250 psi (1725 kPa) minimum, when tested as specified in ASTM F970. 6. Integral coved base with cap strip. 7. Pattern: Marbleized. 8. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. B. Vinyl Welding Rod: Solid vinyl bead produced by manufacturer of vinyl flooring for heat welding seams, in color matching field color. C. Provide inlay logo as indicated on drawings. Logo colors as refernced in 2.01.A.8. 2.02 TILE FLOORING A. Vinyl Composition Tile: Homogeneous, with color extending throughout thickness. 1. Manufacturers: a. Forbo: www.forbo.com; MCT 2.0mm Tile 2. Minimum Requirements: Comply with ASTM F1066, of Class corresponding to type specified. 3. Size: 14 by 14 inch (356 by 356 mm). 4. Thickness:.08 inch (2 mm). 5. Pattern: Marbleized. 6. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.03 RESILIENT BASE A. Resilient Base: ASTM F1861, Type TS rubber, vulcanized thermoset; top set Style B, Cove. 1. Height: 4 inch (100 mm). 2. Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm) thick. 3. Finish: Matte. 4. Color: Color as selected from manufacturer's standards. 5. Manufacturers: a. Burke Flooring: www.burkemercer.com. END OF SECTION
Vista USD Standards and 09 6500 - 1 RESILIENT FLOORING Specifications SECTION 09 6813 TILE CARPETING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Carpet tile, fully adhered. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Tile Carpeting: 1. Shaw Contract Group: www.shawcontract.com B. Tile Carpeting (High Traffic): 1. Forbo Flooring Systems: www.forbo.com/flooring C. Tile Carpeting (Walk-Off Mat): 1. Mohawk Group: www.mohawkgroup.com D. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Tile Carpeting: Tufted, manufactured in one color dye lot. 1. Product: Constellation Tile manufactured by Shaw Contract Group. 2. Tile Size: 24" by 24" inch (610 by 610 mm), nominal. 3. Thickness:.273 inch (6.93 mm). 4. Color: Asteroid. 5. Critical Radiant Flux: Minimum of 0.22 watts/sq cm, when tested in accordance with ASTM E648 or NFPA 253. 6. Stitches: 10 per inch (39.37 per cm). 7. Primary Backing Material: Synthetic. B. Tile Carpeting (High Traffic): Flocked textile sheet floor covering with 100% nylon wear layer with intermediate fiberglass layer and recycled vinyl cushion base. 1. Product: Flotex by Forbo Flooring Systems 2. Size: 20"x20" (50cmx50cm) 3. Gauge: .21" (5.3mm) 4. Backing: Recycled vinyl cushioned backing 5. Pattern and Color: Cirrus patter, color to be selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. C. Tile Carpeting (Walk-Off Mat): 1. Product: Welcome II Tile - Stepping Out Collection by Shaw Contract 2. Size: 24"x24" 3. Backing: Ecoworx 4. Pattern and Color: 31500 Ebony 5. Walk-off mat to be place in a 48"x48" square at the interior of each exterior door. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Sub-Floor Filler: White premix latex; type recommended by flooring material manufacturer. B. Carpet Tile Adhesive: Recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. END OF SECTION
Vista USD Standards and 09 6813 - 1 TILE CARPETING Specifications SECTION 09 7200 WALL COVERINGS PART 2 PRODUCTS 1.01 WALL COVERINGS A. Tackable Acoustical Wall Panels 1. Manufacture: Lamvin, Inc. www.lamvin.com 2. Flame Spread: Panel core and fabric shall have a composite Class I (or A) flame spread rating per ASTM E-84. 3. Acoustical panels shall be constructed of a composite core construction of dimensionally stable rigid fiberglass of 6-7 pcf density laminated with 1/8 inch thick compressed high density acoustically transparent glass fiber face of 16-20 pcf density. 4. Size: As specified on drawings. 5. Edge Profile: As specified on drawings. 6. Acoustical Performance: Panels to have a minimum NRC of .95in accordance with ASTM C-423. 7. Fabric Finish: Finish shall be 100 percent polyester fabric, Guilford of Maine FR701-2100 Series in colors selected by Architect from Manufacturer’s full range of colors 8. Mounting: As specified on drawings. END OF SECTION
Vista USD Standards and 09 7200 - 1 WALL COVERINGS Specifications SECTION 09 7733 GLASS FIBER REINFORCED PLASTIC PANELS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Glass fiber reinforced plastic panels. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Glass Fiber Reinforced Plastic Panels: 1. Crane Composites, Inc; Glasbord: www.cranecomposites.com. 2.02 PANEL SYSTEMS A. Wall Panels: 1. Panel Size: 4 by 8 feet (1.2 by 2.4 m). 2. Panel Thickness: 0.09 inch (2.3 mm). 3. Surface Design: Embossed. 4. Color: As selected by Architect. 5. Attachment Method: Adhesive only, with trim and sealant in joints. 2.03 MATERIALS A. Panels: Glass fiber reinforced plastic (FRP), complying with ASTM D5319. 1. Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum Flame Spread Index of 25, and maximum Smoke Developed Index of 450; when system tested in accordance with ASTM E84. B. Adhesive: Type recommended by panel manufacturer. C. Sealant: Type recommended by panel manufacturer; white. END OF SECTION
Vista USD Standards and 09 7733 - 1 GLASS FIBER REINFORCED Specifications PLASTIC PANELS SECTION 09 9000 PAINTS AND COATINGS - EXTERIOR PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Exterior paints and coatings. B. Surface preparation. C. Field application of paints and other coatings. D. See Schedule - Surfaces to be finished, at end of Section. 1.02 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Supply 1-gallon of each color, store where directed. B. Label each container with color in addition to the manufacturer's label. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 EXTERIOR PAINT A. Contractor shall provide Paint meeting the following specifications exactly. B. If a Bidder wishes to substitute a product under the “or equal” terms of Public Contracting, please refer to School District Construction Contract Documents: Information for Bidders: Document 00100, #21 and General Conditions: Document 00700: Article 33. C. If a Bidder submits substitute products for considerations under above referenced documents, substitution forms shall be as follows: 1. Format shall match VUSD Paint Specifications. 2. Format shall be “line item by line item” comparison. 3. Every line item shall have a corresponding line item in the substitution request documentation. 4. Every line item comparison must meet or exceed VUSD specifications to be considered. 2.02 PAINTS AND COATINGS – GENERAL A. Material to be factory mixed and factory tinted, except field catalyzed coatings. Field tinting of materials will not be permitted. B. Paint accessory and sundry materials such as: putty, spackle, thinners, reducers, and caulking shall be of the highest quality and fully compatible with substrate and subsequent finishes. 2.03 PAINT SYSTEMS- EXTERIOR A. CONCRETE - PLASTER - STUCCO 1. Finish: Eggshell a. Coating Type: 100% Acrylic b. Finishing Schedule: 1) 1st coat Vista # 4600 Uniprime II 2) 2nd coat Vista #8300 Carefree Eggshell 3) 3rd coat Vista #8300 Carefree Eggshell B. MASONRY - BLOCK - BRICK 1. Finish: Eggshell a. Coating Type: 100% Acrylic b. Finishing Schedule: 1st coat Vista#040 Block Kote 1) 1st coat Vista#040 Block Kote 2) 2nd coat Vista#8300 Carefree Eggshell 3) 3rd coat Vista#8300 Carefree Eggshell C. WOOD: Rough Sawn Facia 1. Finish: Flat a. Coating Type: 100% Acrylic
Vista USD Standards and 09 9000 - 1 PAINTS AND COATINGS - Specifications EXTERIOR b. Finish Schedule: 1) 1st coat Vista#4200 Terminator II 2) 2nd coat Vista #3000 Acribond 3) 3rd coat Vista #3000 Acribond D. WOOD: a. Sidings 1. Finish: Eggshell a. Coating Type: 100% Acrylic b. Finish Schedule: 1st coat Vista#4200 Terminator II 1) 2nd coat Vista #8300 Carefree 2) 3rd coat Vista #8300 Carefree 2. b. Smooth Doors a. Finish: Gloss b. Coating Type: 100% Acrylic c. Finish Schedule: 1) 1st coat Vista#4000 Uniprime 2) 2nd coat Vista #9900 Gloss Protec Alkyd Emulsion 3) 3rd coat Vista #9900 Gloss Protec Alkyd Emulsion E. METAL: Ferrous - Iron - Steel Doors 1. Finish: Gloss a. Coating Type: 100% Acrylic b. Finishing Schedule: 1) 1st coat Vista#4800 Pro Primer 2) 2nd coat Vista#9900 Gloss Protec Alkyd Emulsion 3) 3rd coat Vista #9900 Gloss Protec Alkyd Emulsion F. METAL: Non Ferrous - Galvanized - Aluminum 1. Finish: Gloss a. Coating Type: 100% Acrylic b. Finishing Schedule: 1) 1st coat Vista 4500 Galva Epoxy White 2) 2nd coat Vista #9900 Gloss Protec Alkyd Emulsion 3) 3rd coat Vista #9900 Gloss Protec Alkyd Emulsion 2.04 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Accessory Materials: Paint thinner and other materials not specifically indicated but required to achieve the finishes specified; commercial quality. B. Patching Material: Exterior spackle paste. C. Caulking Material: Latex painter’s caulk (No silicone). END OF SECTION
Vista USD Standards and 09 9000 - 2 PAINTS AND COATINGS - Specifications EXTERIOR SECTION 09 9100 PAINTS AND COATINGS - INTERIOR PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Interior paints and coatings. B. Surface preparation. C. Field application of paints and other coatings. D. See Schedule - Surfaces to be finished, at end of Section. 1.02 EXTRA MATERIAL A. Supply 1-gallon of each color, store where directed. B. Label each container with color in addition to manufacturer's label. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 INTERIOR PAINT A. Contractor shall provide Paint meeting the following specifications exactly. B. If a Bidder wishes to substitute a product under the “or equal” terms of Public Contracting, please refer to School District Construction Contract Documents: Information for Bidders: Document 00100, #21 and General Conditions: Document 00700: Article 33. C. If a Bidder submits substitute products for considerations under above referenced documents, substitution forms shall be as follows: 1. Format shall match VUSD Paint Specifications. 2. Format shall be “line item by line item” comparison. 3. Every line item shall have a corresponding line item in the substitution request documentation. 4. Every line item comparison must meet or exceed VUSD specifications to be considered. 2.02 PAINTS AND COATINGS – GENERAL A. Material to be factory mixed and factory tinted, except field catalyzed coatings. Field tinting of materials will not be permitted. B. Paint accessory and sundry materials such as: putty, spackle, thinners, reducers, and caulking shall be of the highest quality and fully compatible with substrate and subsequent finishes. 2.03 PAINT SYSTEMS- INTERIOR A. Steel Doors/Door and Window Frames 1. Finish: Gloss 2. Coating Type: 100% Acrylic 3. Finishing Schedule: a. 1st coat Vista # 999 metal primer b. 2nd coat Vista #9900 Gloss Protec Alkyd Emulsion c. 3rd coat Vista #9900 Gloss Protec Alkyd Emulsion B. Wood Doors/Door and Window Frames 1. Finish: Gloss 2. Coating Type: 100% Acrylic 3. Finishing Schedule: 1st coat Vista#4200 Terminator II a. 2nd coat Vista#9900 Gloss Protec Alkyd Emulsion b. 3rd coat Vista#9900 Protec Alkyd Emulsion C. Gypsum Walls 1. Finish: Eggshell 2. Coating Type: 100% Acrylic 3. Finish Schedule: 1st coat Vista#188 Acrylic undercoat
Vista USD Standards and 09 9100 - 1 PAINTS AND COATINGS - Specifications INTERIOR a. 2nd coat Vista #8300 Carefree b. 3rd coat Vista #8300 Carefree D. Acoustic Tile Ceilings 1. Finish: Flat 2. Coating Type: Vinyl flat 3. Finish Schedule: 1st coat Vista Paint Sealer a. 2nd coat Acoustic-Kote #013 E. METAL: Ferrous - Iron - Steel Doors 1. Finish: Gloss 2. Coating Type: 100% acrylic 3. Finishing Schedule: 1st coat Vista Paint 999 Metal Primer a. 2nd coat Vista #9900 Gloss Protec Alkyd Emulsion b. 3rd coat Vista #9900 Gloss Protec Alkyd Emulsion F. METAL: Non Ferrous - Galvanized - Aluminum 1. Finish: Gloss 2. Coating Type: 100% acrylic 3. Finishing Schedule: 1st coat Vista Paint 999 Metal Primer a. 2nd coat Vista #9900 Gloss Protec Alkyd Emulsion b. 3rd coat Vista#9900 Gloss Protec Alkyd Emulsion G. All Other Wall Surfaces 1. Finish: Eggshell 2. Coating Type: 100% Acrylic 3. Finishing Schedule: 1st coat Vista #188 Acrylic Undercoat a. 2nd coat Vista #8300 Carefree b. 3rd coat Vista #8300 Carefree 2.04 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Accessory Materials: Paint thinner and other materials not specifically indicated but required to achieve the finishes specified; commercial quality. B. Patching Material: Exterior spackle paste. C. Caulking Material: Latex painter’s caulk (No silicone). END OF SECTION
Vista USD Standards and 09 9100 - 2 PAINTS AND COATINGS - Specifications INTERIOR SECTION 10 2116 SOLID PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Solid plastic toilet compartments. 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Compartment Configurations: 1. Toilet partitions: Floor-to-ceiling. 1.03 WARRANTIES A. Provide manufacturer’s 25 year warranty against breakage, corrosion, and delamination under normal conditions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Contract Documents are based on products by Scranton Products. www.scrantonproducts.com B. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Doors, Panels and Pilasters: 1. High density polyethylene (HDPE), fabricated from polymer resins compounded under high pressure, forming single thickness panel. 2. Waterproof and nonabsorbent, with self-lubricating surface, resistant to marks by pens, pencils, markers, and other writing instruments. 3. 1 inch thick with edges rounded to 1/4 inch radius. 4. Color:To be selected from manufacturer’s full color range. B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B221, 6463-T5 alloy and temper. C. Stainless Steel: ASTM A167, Type 304. 2.03 HARDWARE A. Hinges: 1. 8 inches long, fabricated from heavy-duty extruded aluminum with bright dip anodized finish, wrap-around flanges, adjustable on 30-degree increments, through bolted to doors and pilasters with stainless steel, Torx head sex bolts. B. Door Strike and Keeper: 1. 6 inches long, fabricate from heavy-duty extruded aluminum with bright dip anodized finish, with wrap-around flanges secured to pilasters with stainless steel tamper resistant Torx head sex bolts. 2. Bumper: Extruded black vinyl. C. Latch and Housing: 1. Heavy-duty extruded aluminum. 2. Latch housing: Bright dip anodized finish. 3. Slide bolt and button: Black anodized finish. D. Coat Hook/Bumper: 1. Combination type, chrome plated Zamak. 2. Equip outswing handicapped doors with second door pull and door stop. E. Door Pulls: Chrome plated Zamak. 2.04 COMPONENTS A. Doors and Dividing Panels: 55 inches high, mounted 14 inches above finished floor, with aluminum heat-sinc fastened to bottom edges.
Vista USD Standards and 10 2116 - 1 SOLID PLASTIC TOILET Specifications COMPARTMENTS B. Pilasters: Height as required for floor to ceiling installation, fastened to pilaster sleeves with stainless steel tamper resistant Torx head sex bolt, with stainless steel angle attachment to floor and ceiling. C. Pilaster Sleeves: 4 inches high, 20 gage stainless steel, secured to pilaster with stainless steel tamper resistant Torx head sex bolt. D. Wall Brackets: 54 inches long,heavy-duty aluminum, bright dip anodized finish, fastened to pilasters and panels with stainless steel tamper resistant Torx head sex bolts. E. Overhead Braces: Provide overhead braces as required to increase overall stability of partitions. 2.05 ACCESSIBLE TOILET COMPARTMENTS A. Wheelchair accessible compartment shall comply with CBC section 11B-604.8.1. B. Toe clearance for at least one side partition of a wheelchair accessible compartment shall comply with CBC section and figure 11B-604.8.1.4. It shall be 9" high minimum above finish floor and 6" deep minimum beyond the compartment side face of the partition, eclusive of partition support memebers. It shall be 12" high minimum above finished floor for children's use. Partition components at toe clearance shall be smooth without sharp edges or abrasive surfaces. Toe cleaance at the side partition is not required in a compartment greater than 66" wide. C. An ambulatory accessible compartment shall be provided where there are six or more toilet compartments, or where the combination of urinals and water closets total six or more per CBC section 11B-213.3.1. Such compartment shall comply with CBC section 11B-604.8.2. D. Door and door hardware for accessible compartments shall be self-closing and shall comply with CBC section 11B-404 except the pull side clearance for ambulatory accessible compartments shall be minimum 44" clear, rather than 60". CBC figure 11B-604.8.2. E. A door pull complying with CBC section 11B-404.2.7 shall be placed on both sides of the door near the latch. F. Doors shall not swing into clear floor space or clearance required for any fixture. END OF SECTION
Vista USD Standards and 10 2116 - 2 SOLID PLASTIC TOILET Specifications COMPARTMENTS SECTION 10 2800 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Commercial toilet accessories. B. Accessories for toilet rooms. C. Electric hand dryers. D. Grab bars. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Products listed are made by Bobrick Washroom Equipment: www.bobrick.com unless noted otherwise. B. Electric Hand/Hair Dryers: 1. American Dryer, Inc; Extreme Air ADA: C. Vandal Resistant Toilet Paper Dispensers (Non-ADA Stalls): 1. Vandal Stop Products D. Provide products of each category type by single manufacturer. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Accessories - General: Shop assembled, free of dents and scratches and packaged complete with anchors and fittings, steel anchor plates, adapters, and anchor components for installation. 1. Grind welded joints smooth. 2. Fabricate units made of metal sheet of seamless sheets, with flat surfaces. B. Keys: Provide minimum 2 keys for each accessory to Owner. C. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A666, Type 304. D. Stainless Steel Tubing: ASTM A269/A269M, Grade TP304 or TP316. E. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A653/A653M, with G90/Z275 coating. F. Mirror Glass: Annealed float glass, ASTM C1036 Type I, Class 1, Quality Q2, with silvering, protective and physical characteristics complying with ASTM C1503. G. Fasteners, Screws, and Bolts: Hot dip galvanized; tamper-proof; security type. 2.03 FINISHES A. Stainless Steel: Satin finish, unless otherwise noted. 2.04 COMMERCIAL TOILET ACCESSORIES A. General Requirements: 1. Elements of sanitary facilities shall be mounted at locations in compliance with CBC sections 11B-602 through 11B-612. 2. Grab bars in toilet facilities and bathing facilites shall comply with CBC section 11B-609. 3. Grab bars and any wal or other surface adjacent to grab bars shall be free of sharp or abrasive elements and shall have rounded edges. The space around the grab bars shall be as follows: a. 1-1/2" between grab bar and wall. b. 1-1/2" minimum between the grab bar and projecting objects below and at ends. c. 12" minimum between the grab bar and the projecting objects above. 4. Toilet paper and feminine napkin dispsnsers located on the grab bar side of an accessible toilet room or stall shall not be located closer than 1-1/2" clear of the tangent point of the grab bar. The grab bar cannot project more than 3" into the required clear floor space.
Vista USD Standards and 10 2800 - 1 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY Specifications ACCESSORIES The accessory shall not be located closer than 1-1/2" clear of the tangent point of the grab bar. B. Toilet Paper Dispenser: Multi-roll toilet tissue dispenser, surface-mounted, stainless steel unit with pivot hinge, tumbler lock. 1. Located at all accessible restroom stalls and single occupancy restrooms. 2. Product: B-2888 manufactured by Bobrick. C. Toilet Paper Dispenser: Single jumbo roll dispenser, surface-mounted, stainless steel unit with pivot hinge. 1. Located at all standard restroom stalls. 2. Product: VSP-JRDx1 manufactured by Vandal Stop Products. D. Electric Dryers: Traditional fan-in-case type, with downward nozzle. 1. Operation: Automatic, sensor-operated on and off. 2. Style: Traditional horizontal, rectangular case, fixed nozzle. 3. Mounting: Surface mounted. 4. Hand drying unit shall be provided as cold only, with no heating element. 5. Cover: White plastic. a. Tamper-resistant screw attachment of cover to mounting plate. 6. Warranty: 5 years. 7. Electric Hand Dryer Products: a. American Dryer, Inc; ExtremeAir ADA Series: www.americandryer.com. E. Soap Dispenser: Liquid soap dispenser, wall-mounted, surface, with stainless steel cover and vertical stainless steel tank and working parts; push type soap valve, check valve, and window gage refill indicator, tumbler lock. 1. Minimum Capacity: 40 ounces (1.2 liters). 2. Product: B-2112 manufactured by Bobrick. F. Mirrors: Stainless steel framed, 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick annealed float glass; ASTM C1036. 1. Size: 18 x 36 inches. 2. Frame: 0.05 inch (1.3 mm)angle shapes, with mitered and welded and ground corners, and tamperproof hanging system; satin finish. 3. Backing: Full-mirror sized, minimum 0.03 inch (0.8 mm) galvanized steel sheet and nonabsorptive filler material. 4. Product: B-290 1836 manufactured by Bobrick. G. Seat Cover Dispenser: Stainless steel, surface-mounted, reloading by concealed opening at base, tumbler lock. 1. Minimum capacity: 250 seat covers. 2. Product: B-221 manufactured by Bobrick. H. Grab Bars: Stainless steel, 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) outside diameter, minimum 0.05 inch (1.3 mm) wall thickness, nonslip grasping surface finish, concealed flange mounting; 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) clearance between wall and inside of grab bar. 1. Length and configuration: As indicated on drawings. 2. Product: B-5806 manufactured by Bobrick. I. Sanitary Napkin Disposal Unit: Stainless steel, recessed, self-closing door, locking bottom panel with full-length stainless steel piano-type hinge, removable receptacle. 1. Located at Women's Restrooms. 2. Product: B-353 manufactured by Bobrick. END OF SECTION
Vista USD Standards and 10 2800 - 2 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY Specifications ACCESSORIES SECTION 220529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal pipe hangers and supports. B. Thermal-hanger shield inserts. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. All hangers shall be Clevis of J hanger type only. B. 2” strip of sticky back felt shall be installed as an insulator between copper pipe and dissimilar metal, or when it is mounted to Unistrut or pipe hangers. 2.02 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS A. Specify shields between insulation inserts & hangers. Thickness of shields shall be no less than 20-gauge galvanized metal. END OF SECTION
Vista USD Standards and 220529 - 1 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS Specifications FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT SECTION 221116 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Under-building-slab domestic water pipes. B. Aboveground domestic water pipes. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DOMESTIC WATER LINES A. All below grade and overhead copper shall be type “K” only and no joints below grade. B. All below grade soft copper shall be poly sleeved. C. All domestic copper water piping installed shall be sanded and pipes shall be reamed of burrs before installing. D. All copper piping going through concrete shall have plastic sleeving end to end with taped ends. No exceptions. END OF SECTION
Vista USD Standards and 221116 - 1 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING Specifications
SECTION 221119 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Water valves. B. Hose bibs. C. Trap-seal primer valves. D. Backflow preventers. E. Water-hammer arresters. F. Water pressure regulators and strainers. G. Pipe sleeves H. Escutcheons I. Pipe labels PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 WATER VALVES A. All below grade water service valves 2” and smaller shall be the Ford type Fip. X Fip. or Jones 1900 flat head Fip. X Fip. type and/or McDonald part #6101w type. B. All below grade water service valves 2-1/2” and above shall be of the Mueller 2” keyed head resident wedge gate valves #2360. Long service life – certified to NSF61, or a Clow 6100 water valve equal to Mueller. Preferably Mueller. C. All below grade water service 2-1/2” and up gate valves shall be wrapped with 8-mil clear plastic. All plastic shall be wrapped with 2 wraps of 10-mil tape or one or two wraps of 2-mil tape. D. All 2-1/2” and above underground water service gate valves shall be installed with SA316 stainless steel bolts, nuts and washers. E. All underground water service valves shall have the shut off within 18” of finish grade. Steel valve stem extensions shall be provided by contractor. Valve stem extensions to be used shall be from pipeline products part #SX900 – galvanized shafts and fixed center ring. F. All building water shut-off valves shall be in concrete yard boxes in the ground with traffic lid outside the building. G. All 2-1/2” and above service valves shall have 50 bit applied to the valve nuts and bolts. H. No gate valves shall be installed in water service 2” and smaller. No gate valves shall be installed in buildings as isolation building shut off valves, only full port ball valves, Nibco S58580LF or Watts LFB6081G2, then the size of the valve. No Substitutions. I. All building isolation shut off-valves above grade shall be located in an access panel on the inside of the building, in locked or tamper proof keyed doors, or in accessible area in building. J. All restroom isolation valves to be in a restroom plumbing wall, in tamper proof stainless tell access panels, or in a private room that is accessible. Not in the ceilings of the restrooms, if possible. Isolation shut-off valves may be installed in the upper portion of the plumbing wall outside the reach of children with a secure keyed access panel. K. Access panel doors to be no less than 24”x24”. L. All angle stops shall be Dahl mini-ball valves, type part #611-33-31. No exceptions. 2.02 HOSE BIBS A. Hose bibs on outside and inside need to be rebuildable Zurn type, preferable #Z1350-3/4” wall hydrant, tamper proof type. All with same keylocks to match. B. All buildings with HVAC units on rooftops shall have loose key hose bibs located on roof near HVAC units. 2.03 TRAP-SEAL PRIMER VALVES
Vista USD Standards and 221119 - 1 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING Specifications SPECIALTIES
A. All trap primers shall be installed with detail-Nibco #T-585 ball valve then trap primer PPP-P-2-5000 then 1/2” copper sweat x sweat union. B. All trap primers to have tamper proof, keyed, stainless steel access doors. C. All underground copper trap primer lines shall be insulated with 1/2”x3/4” thermocell pipe wrap and all joints must be taped with 10 mil tape over the poly sleeve copper line. D. Copper line from trap primer shall be tied into floor drain body. 2.04 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS A. Backflow devices shall be Wilkins series only. No clay valves. No substitutions. B. All backflow devices in mechanical rooms must have drains attached to devices and run the drain water to a floor sink. All exterior backflow devices shall have stainless steel locked cages, tamper proof. C. All nipple fittings above and below grade shall be of the brass type. No galvanized or black type. No exceptions. D. 2” strip of sticky back felt shall be installed as an insulator between copper pipe and dissimilar metal, or when it is mounted to Unistrut or pipe hangers. 2.05 WATER-HAMMER ARRESTERS A. All fixtures shall have water hammer air chambers installed to keep water hammer to a minimum in all staff and student restrooms. At a minimum, one pipe size larger than the feed to the fixture. B. All water hammers to have tamper proof, keyed, stainless steel access doors. 2.06 WATER PRESSURE REGULATORS AND STRAINERS A. All pressure regulators shall be Wilkins type 600 series. No Substitutions. B. All domestic water pressure regulators and strainers shall have unions on both sides of regulator and strainer just above water service ball valves. 2.07 PIPE SLEEVES A. Pipe sleeves – name the type of material to be used for water tight seal. Be exact. 2.08 ESCUTCHEONS A. Escutcheons for plumbing piping – Be exact on thickness, i.e. 18 gauge or 20 gauge. 2.09 PIPE LABELS A. Label all overhead water piping. END OF SECTION
Vista USD Standards and 221119 - 2 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING Specifications SPECIALTIES SECTION 221316 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL 1.01SECTION INCLUDES A. Pipe, tube, and fittings. B. Specialty pipe fittings. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DESIGN CRITERIA A. Requirements for Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping: 1. Underground pipe design standards shall be of 50+ year quality standards. 2.02 WASTE PIPING A. Below grade: 1. Grade: Sch. 40 solid core PVC with approved Sch. 40 PVC solvent welded drainage fittings. a. Use weld-on PVC primer, ream all pipe of burrs, and use only Weld-on 71 heavy bodied gray glue. No substitutions. b. All below grade PVC Sch. 40 pipe shall be stubbed up 3” above stem wall or finished grade so that heavy weight Mission band will attach to it. B. Above grade: 1. Above grade sewer lines and vent pipes shall be of cast iron or type “M” copper pipe and soldered fittings. a. All storm drain lines above grade shall be in cast iron pipe and shall have extra heavy- duty Husky cast iron bands or extra heavy weight mission bands. b. Transitions from cast iron to PVC fittings shall be of the mission type bands. c. Mission type bands shall be heavy weight mission bands #C22OHW, C-564 rubber, A240A band 80 lb., ceiling ringworm clamp or Husky Heavy Weight. 2.03 CONDESATE LINES A. General: 1. Condensate lines to be type “L.” 2. All condensate drains shall have clean-out Fip with brass plugs at the upper end of each horizontal run, in accessible areas to service them. 3. Run all condensate to mop sinks, classroom sinks, or staff sinks only. Not main restrooms. No exceptions. 4. All copper condensate lines shall have raised head brass plug into a copper female adapter fitting at the upper end of each run. 5. All copper condensate lines shall have raised head brass plug into a copper female adapter fitting at the upper end of each run. 6. All rooftop penetrations and roof drains shall have lead flashings that extend over the top of the vent pipe and into the vent pipe by 1”. No exceptions. 7. Label all overhead condensate piping. END OF SECTION
Vista USD Standards and 221316 - 1 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT Specifications PIPING
SECTION 221319 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Cleanouts. B. Floor drains. C. Traps. D. Roof drains. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 Cleanouts A. Every building must have a cleanout within 12” outside of every building. B. Cleanouts are a must at the upper level end of every run. C. No floor cleanouts if possible, wall cleanouts only. All wall cleanouts to be Zurn-1447 cleanout tee with square access cover. D. Floor cleanouts, when needed shall be Zurn #Z1400. 2.01 Floor drains A. All floor drains shall have a trap primer trapped into drain body only, not into PVC trap. B. All floor drains to use type K soft copper – Specification P for primer. C. All floor drains to be Zurn #Z415. 2.02 Traps A. All traps shall be chrome 17-gauge traps with solid brass nuts. B. No traps shall be soldered inside copper trap arms. All traps shall be connected by threaded joint only. No exceptions. C. All trap primers to be PPP #PR-500. 2.04 ROOF DRAINS A. Combination roof and overflow drains to be Zurn #Z163. END OF SECTION
Vista USD Standards and 221319 - 1 SANITARY WASTE PIPING Specifications SPECIALTIES
SECTION 223400 FUEL-FIRED, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS
PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Commercial domestic-water heaters. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 COMMERCIAL DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS A. All water heaters to be gas fired, when possible. B. Water heaters, gas or electric, shall be Rheem only, Professional Classic Plus Series and Universal Series, with Smitty pan. END OF SECTION
Vista USD Standards and 223400 - 1 FUEL-FIRED, DOMESTIC- Specifications WATER HEATERS
SECTION 224213.13 COMMERCIAL WATER CLOSETS
PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Water closets. B. Flush valves. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 WATER CLOSETS A. All closet rings to be Mueller part #02262. Flange must have gussets – or Sioux Chief open closet flange Part #886-4P. PVC equals installed with transition glue ABS to PVC type. All toilet rings shall be of solid PVC ring. No substitutions. B. All student and staff water closets to be American Standard Madera FloWise 15” height. C. All disabled student and staff water closets to be American Standard Madera FloWise 16-1/2” height. D. Use DAP brand water soluble quick seal caulking around base of all toilets. No exceptions. 2.02 FLUSH VALVES A. All flush valves to be Sloan Royal 111 with 1.28 gpf. END OF SECTION
Vista USD Standards and 224213.13 - 1 COMMERCIAL WATER Specifications CLOSETS
SECTION 224213.16 COMMERCIAL URINALS
PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Urinals. B. Flush valves. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 URINALS A. All urinals shall be Kohler #K-4991-ET. This is the District standard. No exceptions. B. Backing for wall hung fixtures shall be at a minimum of 4”x6” wood blocking between framing studs for all Zurn factory sink carriers and backing for urinal brackets. This Zurn part #Z11251 is for American Standard Sink. C. Use DAP brand water soluble quick seal caulking around base of all urinals. No exceptions. 2.02 FLUSH VALVES A. All urinal flush valves to be Sloan Royal 186 with 0.125 gpf. END OF SECTION
Vista USD Standards and 224213.16 - 1 COMMERCIAL URINALS Specifications
SECTION 224216.13 COMMERCIAL LAVATORIES
PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Lavatories. B. Faucets. C. Carriers. D. Grid strainers. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 LAVATORIES A. All wall-hung lavatories to be American Standard # Lucerne. B. All lavatory traps to be mechanical fittings. Traps will not be soldered into dirty arm. No exceptions. C. Use DAP brand water soluble quick seal caulking around base of all lavatories. No exceptions. 2.02 FAUCETS A. All student restrooms to have push button Zurn brand, #Z86100-XL-CP4 with 4” Center set deck. All other faucets shall be Zurn type with ceramic cartridges only, campus-wide. B. Hot and cold faucets shall be Zurn #Z86500-XL-Aqua Spec 4” center set deck mount temperature control metering faucet. No Speakman, Delta, or Symmons faucets. C. No single hole faucets shall be used in student and staff restrooms. Must have 4” center faucet mounts in sinks. 2.03 CARRIERS A. All student and staff lavatory carriers to be Zurn #Z1251. 2.04 GRID STRAINERS A. All student and staff lavatory grid strainers to be Chicago Faucets #327-XCP. END OF SECTION
Vista USD Standards and 224216.13 - 1 COMMERCIAL LAVATORIES Specifications
SECTION 224216.16 COMMERCIAL SINKS
PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Handwash sinks. B. Kitchen sinks. C. Service sinks. D. Sink faucets. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 HANDWASH SINKS A. All 3-1/2” gasket sink strainers shall be Kohler #K-8807 or #K-8801 heavy metal type, or Just brand equivalent. B. Use DAP brand water soluble quick seal caulking around base of all sinks. No exceptions. 2.02 KITCHEN SINKS A. All kitchen sinks to be Zurn #Z842X1-XL-AF. B. All kitchen sink faucets to be Zurn #Z871G4-XL. 2.02 SERVICE SINKS A. All service sinks to be Kohler #K-6710. B. All service sink faucets to be Zurn #Z841M1 or Chicago brand equivalent. C. All service sinks to have appropriate backing. Upper faucet support shall have 4”x4” blocking to support mop sink faucet. Also, all mop sink sewer traps and drains shall be a minimum of 3” diameter. D. All service sinks areas shall have tile or FRP paneling behind and around mop sink rooms, up the wall at least 48”. No exceptions. 2.03 SINK FAUCETS A. Staff room faucets to be Zurn #Z812B4-XL, or #Z831C4-XL. B. Classroom faucets to be Zurn #Z825A1-XL, or #Z825A4-XL. C. Science room faucets to be Zurn #Z825V1-6M. D. Science room staff faucets to be Zurn #Z826F1-XL. E. All sink faucets to be installed using plumber putty under the base of faucet for watertight seal. F. All classroom sinks may have single hole faucets when applicable. END OF SECTION
Vista USD Standards and 224216.16 - 1 COMMERCIAL SINKS Specifications
SECTION 224223 COMMERCIAL SHOWERS
PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Shower faucets. B. Emergency showers. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SHOWER FAUCETS A. Speakman Sentinelpro #SM-5020 shower valves to be installed in all student and staff showers. No Acorn. No exceptions. B. All disabled shower valves to be Speakman Sentinel Mark II #SM-3480-ADA. 2.02 EMERGENCY SHOWERS A. Emergency shower eye wash stations to be HAWS #8300 – 8309. END OF SECTION
Vista USD Standards and 224223 - 1 COMMERCIAL SHOWERS Specifications
SECTION 224713 DRINKING FOUNTAINS
PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Drinking fountains and related components. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DRINKING FOUNTAINS A. All drinking fountains shall have their own isolation ball valves. B. All drinking fountains shall be Haws model #1106 or current Haws Models #1105BP or #1119 or #3500 at exteriors and interiors of schools. C. Classroom drinking faucets to be Haws #5010.6427SS. D. All drinking fountains are to have carriers of 1/4"x12”x26” steel backing. No exceptions END OF SECTION
Vista USD Standards and 224713 - 1 DRINKING FOUNTAINS Specifications
SECTION 230130.51 HVAC DISTRIBUTION AIR QUALITY
PART 1 GENERAL A. Goals and objective. 1. Vista USD Building Systems Approach is based on ASHRAE Standards with the common goal of good indoor air quality and comfort. 2. A school building is a dynamic entity with often changing pollutant, heating and cooling loads. A well design and functioning ventilation system will respond to any change in loads before it affects the occupants. It is often difficult to accomplish this ideal condition in schools, however, the Building System Approach should be applied at the design stage and continued through construction, commissioning, operator training, and ongoing building operation and maintenance. It requires interaction between many disciplines and proper IAQ education of key systems operators. The common goal is to ensure the health and comfort of building occupants over the life of the building. 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Rules of the Building System Approach. B. Guidelines. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 RULES OF THE BUILDING SYSTEM APPROACH A. Adherence to the following standards and guidelines, or current standards is instrumental to a successful application of the Building Systems Approach. 1. ASHRAE Standard 62.1 (for ventilation). 2. ASHRAE Standard 55 (for comfort). 3. ASHRAE Standard 52.1 (for filtration). B. These standards and guidelines should be studied by all relevant building personnel, and equipment operation and maintenance manuals should be changed accordingly. Some equipment may need to be modified. C. There are seven main indoor environmental issues to consider during the programming, design and construction phases of a new building. D. Provide for Merv 13 filters unless otherwise directed. 2.02 GUIDELINES A. Site Plan: The physical site that the future building will occupy and its outdoor environment must be studied with respect to how they will likely impact the future indoor environment. Prevailing weather and wind patterns, ambient air quality, and major outdoor sources of pollution should be considered. B. Building Configuration: The building configuration may impact the migration of pollutants both from the outside to the inside, and within the building both vertically from one floor to another and horizontally across floors. Issues to be scrutinized include location and orientation of building air intakes, exhausts, and stacks, planning of vehicle access, parking, and garages, pollutant pathways, apertures and glazing in relation to solar heat load and IAQ. C. Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning (HVAC) System: In today’s tight, sealed, energy efficient buildings, the majority of the indoor air is introduced through the HVAC system. Proper design of these mechanical systems, therefore, is imperative to the creation of a healthy indoor environment. The design team must review the projected occupant densities, activities, and locations in the building and ensure proper respective ventilation rates and distribution. This task includes critical attention to ventilation flexibility, core versus perimeter loads, control systems humidification/dehumidification, filtration systems, dedicated exhausts, occupied space layout, and energy recovery technology. Particular areas of concern are explained in further detail as follows: 1. Outdoor (Fresh) Air in Building Air Supply: The minimum requirements of outdoor air for all types of building and spaces can be found in ASHRAE Standards 62.1-2013 or current
Vista USD Standards and 230130.51 - 1 HVAC DISTRIBUTION AIR Specifications QUALITY
standard. 2. Temperature and Relative Humidity (RH): What is considered appropriate temperature and relative humidity levels indoors may vary from location to location within Vista USD, but they must remain constant in each season, with slightly higher temperatures being acceptable in summer. ASHRAE Standard 55-2004 or current standard recommends comfort ranges, District standards are heating 68 degrees and cooling 74 degrees. 3. Filters in HVAC Systems: Filters shall be selected based on the ASHRAE Standard 52.1- 1992 or current standard, which requests that filter manufacturers specify both a weight test and a dust test for each class of filter. Filters shall also be well fitting. The outdoor air quality shall be considered, when specifying filter efficiency. 4. Maintaining Correct Pressurization Within Buildings: A school building shall be under slightly positive pressure. Some areas, including special use areas with dedicated exhaust such as art areas, shall be under negative pressure in order for cleaner building air to flow toward the more contaminated areas, helping dilute the contaminates, and finally being exhausted. Air from special use areas shall not be re-circulated, unless it has been subjected to cleaning with filters appropriate for the contamination produced. D. Maintainability: The ability to conduct frequent and effective maintenance on the HVAC system during the building’s operational life is another critical step toward a healthy indoor environment. This ability can be greatly enhanced via full consideration of maintainability at the design stage. Proper access points to critical areas of the HVAC system must be included in the design. Building and mechanical system materials best suited for resistance against corrosion, microbial contamination, and other IAQ factors shall be identified. Insulation material characteristics shall be included. E. Interior Material Selection: The materials for the interior spaces shall be selected carefully with regard to their future impact on the indoor pollutants loads. The general principles of making sound environmental material selection decisions must be customized to the specific indoor environment planned. Material selection criteria to be judged include off gassing, fiber release, microbial support, sink effect, durability, proper installation, and maintenance for good IAQ. F. Implementation of Temporary Ventilation and Filtration Practices: 1. Such practices shall be implemented when interior finishing products are to be applied or installed at the end of construction or during renovations. This may require increased ventilation rates and schedules and the use of items such as temporary operations and pre- filters, unitary conditioning filtering units, and removing doors and windows. G. Prudent Ventilation Regime: Once the HVAC system is activated, and its proper function and control system is fully verified it shall be set to operate on the maximum fresh air which is possible on a 24- hour basis with the return air dampers closed down. The system shall also be set to dehumidify and warm the interior as far as is practicable for products to cure and for acceptable working conditions. Preventing cold conditions will cause more VOCs to be emitted early from interior finishes. This mode should be maintained for a minimum of 48 hours before beneficial occupancy. This is a general recommendation that may not be suitable for all systems. H. Installation Sequence: Installation of equipment, materials and finishes in a particular order can have a beneficial impact on final indoor air quality. The District may require wet products such as adhesives and paints to be applied before the installation of potential sinks such as fabrics, ceiling tiles and furniture. END OF SECTION
Vista USD Standards and 230130.51 - 2 HVAC DISTRIBUTION AIR Specifications QUALITY SECTION 230548 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC
PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Seismic-restraint accessories. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT ACCESSORIES A. Completely detail HVAC seismic restraints. END OF SECTION
Vista USD Standards and 230548 - 1 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC Specifications CONTROLS FOR HVAC SECTION 230800 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC
PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Commissioning process requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 COMMISSIONING PROCESS REQUIREMENTS A. Commissioning is a quality-based process developed for the contractors use as a means of managing the quality of the installation, start-up, and operation of the building equipment and systems to ensure they perform according to the design intent and the Owner’s operational needs. The commissioning process shall encompass and coordinate the separate functions of system documentation, equipment startup, control system calibration, testing and balancing, performance testing and training. Commissioning during the construction phase is intended to achieve the following specific objectives according to the Contract Documents. 1. Verify that applicable equipment and systems are installed according to the manufacturer’s recommendations, the Owner’s needs, and to industry accepted minimum standards and that they receive adequate operational checkout by installing Contractors. 2. Verify and document proper and energy efficient performance of equipment and systems. END OF SECTION
Vista USD Standards and 230800 - 1 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC Specifications SECTION 230923 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROLS (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC
PART 1 GENERAL A. Goals and objective. 1. Vista USD has begun the implementation of a district wide EMCS. Controllers at each individual site are linked through use of Local Area Network (LAN), and all sites are linked to each other and to the Maintenance and Operations office through use of the District Wide Area Network (WAN). 2. The EMCS provides the means to measure and analyze the energy performance of individual systems (mechanical and electrical) and sites, in addition to providing direct control of the site mechanical systems. 3. All new construction shall include installation of the District Standard EMCS to provide monitoring and control of all mechanical systems. These new mechanical systems, as well as the new EMCS installations, shall include provisions for periodic testing and recalibration. Detailed control sequences of operation, and product specifications shall be used. 4. Shall use current sensors for VFD feedbacks. Use (DI’s), digital inputs for feedbacks. 5. Temperature sensors and wells shall be installed at 45˚ on all horizontal piping runs of chilled 6. water systems, heating hot water systems and domestic hot water systems. 7. Pete’s plugs shall be installed on the inlet and outlet sides of all pumps, condenser water loops, heating hot water loops, chiller barrel heat exchangers and on all inlet and outlet of all piping systems going into and out of buildings. 8. Controls, temperature and pressure sensors or gauges shall be labeled with large legible lettering of a type and style sufficient to withstand the elements. 1.01SECTION INCLUDES A. Equipment controlled by the Energy Management System. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT CONTROLLED BY THE ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM A. Boilers. B. Package HVAC units. C. All chillers, towers and KW meters. D. All pumps 5 horsepower and larger. E. Associated valves. F. Exterior lighting. END OF SECTION
Vista USD Standards and 230923 - 1 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROLS Specifications (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC SECTION 231123 FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Pipes, tubes, and fittings. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS A. All underground gas lines shall be polyethylene only before transitioning up to metal. No substitutions. B. All exterior gas piping and fittings shall be galvanized type. This also means all nipples and gas risers to rooftop units and gas services. No exceptions. C. Label all overhead gas piping. END OF SECTION
Vista USD Standards and 231123 - 1 FACILITY NATURAL-GAS Specifications PIPING SECTION 233119 HVAC CONSTRUCTION
PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. HVAC Construction Equipment. B. Ductwork. C. Other HVAC related components. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 HVAC CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT A. New package units shall follow current California Title 24 Standards. B. When chillers are air cooled use all copper fins/copper tubes. C. Thermostats: 7-day programmable electrical thermostats. D. Provide the means to measure outside air temperature, room temperature, supply air temperature, return air temperature, discharge air temperature, mixed air temperature on economizers. VAV systems shall show duct static pressure and building static pressure. 2.02 DUCTWORK A. SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards for Metal and Flexible Ducts, latest edition. B. California Mechanical Code. C. Ductwork exposed to weather shall be waterproof and lined with high quality duct liner. Ducts shall be pitched, cross-break, or have a cap sheet to provide rainwater drainage. D. Ducts penetrating roofs shall be detailed with curbs and proper flashings. E. All concealed supply, return and exhaust ducts shall be sealed with a high-quality duct sealant. F. Manual volume dampers shall be shown on drawings for all branch ducts to supply, return and exhaust outlets. Use high quality manual volume dampers similar to Ruskin. G. Flexible duct connections shall be used for all duct connections to flexibly mounted equipment. H. Flexible ducts shall be UL Class 1, 7-foot length with factory attached collars. I. Completely detail duct supports and seismic restraints. 2.03 OTHER HVAC RELATED COMPONENTS A. Gas cocks shall be high quality bronze body plug type. B. Appliance connectors shall be stainless steel. C. Gas pipe and fittings exposed to weather shall be galvanized. D. Completely detail piping supports and seismic restraints. E. Condensate piping in ceiling space shall be insulated. F. HVAC Filters: Only standard filter sizes are to be used. END OF SECTION
Vista USD Standards and 233119 - 1 HVAC CONSTRUCTION Specifications SECTION 233300 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL A. Goals and objective. 1. Provide system features that will provide a supply of air to the conditioned spaces that is: a. Temperature controlled. b. Filtered and augmented with outside air control and CO2 sensors where required. c. Uniformly distributed throughout each zone. d. Delivered in a draft free manner and at an acceptable noise level less than NC 30. e. Supplied in a well-controlled energy efficient manner. 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. System acoustical features. B. Efficient system energy use. C. Minimize system maintenance and costs. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SYSTEM ACOUSTICAL FEATURES A. In order to control sound levels in spaces such as classrooms, offices, and multimedia centers refer to ASHRAE HVAC Applications Handbook, Chapter on Sound, and Vibration Control, “Design Guideline for HVAC Noise in Occupied Spaces.” B. Locate noise generating equipment such as compressors, fan coil units, exhaust fans, and pumps outside the conditioned spaces. C. Control duct noise transmission into the occupied spaces with turning vanes, low duct and discharge grill velocities, and sound attenuation baffles and material. D. Ensure vibration-isolating connections are adequate between air handlers, connecting ducts, and the supporting structure(s). 2.02 EFFICIENT SYSTEM ENERGY USE A. Use low-pressure drop filters, dampers, silencers and diffusers. Filters shall be of an extended surface type, configured for easy replacement. B. Use high-efficiency backward curved or airfoil impellers fans. C. Use “premium efficiency” motors, tailor the size of the motors for their task, can be optional drive belt. D. Locate exhaust hoods and return air intakes near heat and/or odor generating equipment such as copiers and kilns, to expedite removal of heat and odors from the space and minimize air temperature variations within the space. Areas of specific concern are graphic arts rooms, areas with large copiers, and food preparation/serving areas. Air supplies to the space shall be sized to accommodate the additional exhaust requirement. E. Locate thermostats away from known locations where heat generating equipment will be located or where natural airflow will be obstructed by furniture, equipment or partitions. Avoid locations on exterior walls or near doors or windows. F. Connect system controls to the District EMCS. G. Shall use Economizers on units 4.5 ton and larger. 2.03 MINIMIZE SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND COSTS A. Locate system components requiring routine service outside the conditioned space to avoid disruption of classroom and administrative activities, and ensure manufacturers minimum accessibility clearances are provided around equipment components requiring service or replacement. B. Damper actuators shall be installed outside the volume control units. C. Access panels shall be located and sized to provide ready and unobstructed access to components
Vista USD Standards and 233300 - 1 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES Specifications when needing service or replacement. 1. Where interior insulation is required, ensure that it is resistant to air erosion and deterioration due to environmental factors such as humidity and corrosive air borne chemicals. Insulation material(s) limitations of use and application precautions, as detailed in manufacturer’s publications, shall be carefully considered during all stages of a building’s life cycle; design, materials specification, construction, operation/maintenance, and renovation. Internal HVAC system insulation materials shall be designed to be durable when rated in accordance with ASTM or UL 181 erosion tests. All internal insulation materials shall not support microbial growth as determined by ASTM or UL. HVAC systems shall be designed and insulation installed in a manner, which prevents insulation contact with liquid water. Fiberglass is not to be used as interior insulation material for supply ducting that is downstream of the filters. 2. In environments that are considered high risk for fungus, mold and other microorganism growth, ultra violet lamps should be installed for sterilization of air handling units, coils and air discharge plenums. 3. Do not use pneumatic controls and actuators on new construction, and avoid their use on replacement and retrofit projects where economically feasible. 4. Flexible duct connections shall not exceed 7-feet in length and shall be properly sized and matched, and mechanically connected with clamps, brackets, or screw for a solid, secure fit. 5. All air distribution grilles and registers shall be equipped with opposed blades dampers (OBD’s), at the device and at the main duct work take off. 6. Air intakes shall be positioned to avoid ingesting contaminated air, and to minimize vandalism. Avoid locating air intake near or downwind of loading docks and passenger pick up zones, and positioned in relation to vent locations in accordance with the California Mechanical Code. END OF SECTION
Vista USD Standards and 233300 - 2 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES Specifications SECTION 233600 SPECIAL HVAC SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL A. Goals and objective. 1. Special HVAC systems and equipment used by the District in their air conditioning and refrigeration systems shall be: a. Designed and built for commercial and/or industrial applications. b. Installed in a professional manner by experienced contractors as approved by the equipment manufacturer. c. Maintained in accordance with a recognized preventative maintenance program to provide the highest possible system efficiencies. d. Select the use of computer air conditioning systems to meet temperature and humidity requirements as required by the computer equipment supplier. Year around operation shall be considered in the selection of equipment. 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. System description. B. Building systems approach to provide good IAQ control. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Use extended surface, low-pressure drop disposable air filters configured for easy replacement. B. Select and install special HVAC equipment with high EER and SEER. C. Consider economizers for systems rated at 4.5 tons of refrigeration or greater, unless modeling indicates appropriate use on smaller units. D. Select HVAC and refrigeration equipment to meet actual special systems load requirements and provide physical space for additional equipment if future load requirements increase. E. Consider heat recovery strategies where possible on special large refrigeration and cooling units. F. Exhaust heat from printers and copiers where direct duct connections are provided. 2.02 BUILDING SYSTEMS APPROACH TO PROVIDE GOOD IAQ CONTROL A. Where possible, locate HVAC equipment in such a manner to provide outside air supplies without the use of lengthy runs of ductwork. END OF SECTION
Vista USD Standards and 233600 - 1 SPECIAL HVAC SYSTEMS AND Specifications EQUIPMENT SECTION 233713.13 AIR DIFFUSERS
PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Ceiling diffusers. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CEILING DIFFUSERS A. Ceiling supply diffusers shall be modular core type with or without perforated face. Sidewall supply diffusers shall be double deflection type. END OF SECTION
Vista USD Standards and 233713.13 - 1 AIR DIFFUSERS Specifications SECTION 233713.23 REGISTERS AND GRILLES
PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Adjustable blade face registers and grilles. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ADJUSTABLE BLADE FACE REGISTERS AND GRILLES A. Ceiling return grilles shall match ceiling supply diffusers. Use ¾ inch blade spacing. B. Exhaust grilles shall be ¾ inch blade type. END OF SECTION
Vista USD Standards and 233713.23 - 1 REGISTERS AND GRILLES Specifications SECTION 235113.11 DRAFT CONTROL FANS
PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Vent exhaust fans. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 VENT EXHAUST FANS A. Exhaust fans shall be direct drive whenever possible. Acceptable manufacturers include Cook and Greenheck. END OF SECTION
Vista USD Standards and 235113.11 - 1 DRAFT CONTROL FANS Specifications SECTION 235200 HEATING BOILERS
PART 1 GENERAL A. Goals and objectives 1. Provide heat generating systems to maintain specified thermal conditions and at the same time minimize energy costs. 2. Use heat generating systems equipment which is: a. Designed and built for commercial and/or industrial applications. b.Installed in a professional manner by experienced contractors as approved by the equipment manufacturer. 3. Gas furnaces shall be used in package air- handlers capable of two stages or modulating control. Forced air heating system shall have a ducted return. 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Central heating boilers and accessories. B. Energy Management Control Systems. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CENTRAL HEATING BOILERS AND ACCESSORIES A. Centralized heating hot water boiler plants shall be designed with multiple, staged, hot water generators, selected for high-efficiency (equal to 85% or greater) operation. B. Low Nitrous Oxide (NOx) burners with modulating gas valves shall be specified whenever possible. 2.02 ENERGY MANAGEMENT CONTROL SYSTEMS A. Systems shall be monitored and controlled through the District Energy Management Control Systems (EMCS). Time clocks and self-contained temperature controls shall not be used. 1. Avoid dual service hot water boilers where both space heating and water heating requirements are met by one or more heat generators. 2. Select heat-generating equipment, which is sized with automatic controlled outside air dampers for minimum flow during building warm-up period. 3. Steam heat generation equipment is not to be specified. 4. Use heat recovery strategies whenever possible. END OF SECTION
Vista USD Standards and 235200 - 1 HEATING BOILERS Specifications SECTION 235416.13 GAS-FIRED FURNACES
PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Gas furnaces. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GAS FURNACES A. Gas furnaces and heaters greater than 250,000 BTU in size, are to be constructed with 321 stainless steel heat exchangers. Unit heaters to be constructed with aluminized steel heat exchangers. 1. Use ducted combustion air with forced-drafts fans (natural drafts units shall not be used). 2. Allow enough space for maintenance. END OF SECTION
Vista USD Standards and 235416.13 - 1 GAS-FIRED FURNACES Specifications SECTION 235533.16 GAS-FIRED UNIT HEATERS
PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Gas-fired heaters. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GAS-FIRED HEATERS A. Use only high-efficiency, high-quality heaters. B. Furnaces shall be designed to operate on natural gas only. C. Unit heaters can be used in some application with District approval. END OF SECTION
Vista USD Standards and 235533.16 - 1 GAS-FIRED UNIT HEATERS Specifications SECTION 236313 AIR-COOLED REFRIGERANT CONDENSERS
PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Refrigeration systems. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS A. Shall be Bulb Type Thermostat controls with Freeze-Stat or Defrost controls. END OF SECTION
Vista USD Standards and 236313 - 1 AIR-COOLED REFRIGERANT Specifications CONDENSERS SECTION 236333 EVAPORATIVE REFRIGERANT CONDENSERS
PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Evaporative coolers. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 EVAPORATIVE COOLERS A. May be used only under specific and limited conditions, to be determine by the District. END OF SECTION
Vista USD Standards and 236333 - 1 EVAPOTATIVE REFRIGERANT Specifications CONDENSERS
SECTION 237413 PACKAGED, OUTDOOR AIR HANDLING UNITS
PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Factory-packaged units. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FACTORY-PACKAGED UNITS A. Rooftop package gas/electric units are preferred. Acceptable manufacturers are Trane. No others to be accepted. B. Air handler units exposed to weather shall be specifically designed for outdoor use. Weatherproofing an indoor unit is not acceptable. END OF SECTION
Vista USD Standards and 237413 - 1 PACKAGED, OUTDOOR Specifications AIR HANDLING UNITS
SECTION 238113.12 PACKAGED TERMINAL UNITS
PART 1 GENERAL A. Goals and objective. 1. Designed and built for commercial and/or industrial applications. Installed in a professional manner by experienced contractors as approved by the equipment manufacturer. 2. Maintained in accordance with a recognized preventive. 3. Maintenance program to provide the highest possible system efficiencies. 4. Single duct variable volume terminal units will be used on air-conditioned areas where a large air-handling unit is serving a multitude of occupied areas with different occupancies and orientation. 5. Package units may be used in small isolated air-conditioned areas with integral heating coils, or natural gas duct heaters. 1.01SECTION INCLUDES A. Terminal units. B. Package units. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 TERMINAL UNITS A. Systems shall be monitored and controlled through the District EMCS, where cost effective. B. Provide removable panels on terminal units to permit access to dampers, regulatory assemblies, and other parts requiring service, adjustment, or maintenance with airtight gaskets and quarter-turn latches. C. Determine noise levels, then provide attenuator section lined with insulation as may be required. D. Maximum damper leakage allowance shall be a rate of 2.5 percent of nominal terminal airflow at 1- inch wg inlet static pressure. 2.02 PACKAGE UNITS A. Specify the use of natural gas heating. B. Use, where possible, extended surface disposable air filters, with ultra low-pressure drop filters. C. Use seismic vibration isolators on units greater than 5-tons. D. Use forward curved direct drive centrifugal indoor fans. E. Do not use window type air conditioners. F. Air cooled condensers on package air conditioning equipment to be copper tube, copper fin construction on all units. G. Fifteen (15) CFM per person of outside air, in accordance with latest Title 24 Energy Code, shall be positively supplied to all occupied classrooms. H. Package air conditioning units shall have full access and services provisions to all components of the unit once installed. I. The condensate drains shall be connected outside the air handling unit and routed per manufacturer’s instructions. END OF SECTION
Vista USD Standards and 238113.12 - 1 PACKAGED TERMINAL UNITS Specifications SECTION 238123 COMPUTER-ROOM AIR-CONDITIONERS
PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. I.T. Environmental requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 I.T. ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Dedicated air conditioning is required. B. Environmental HVAC considerations. 1. Select equipment with highest efficiency available. 2. Choose cooling equipment that does not utilize ozone-depleting refrigerants. 3. Maximize efficiency of mechanical systems through duct sealing and high- efficiency fans. 4. Select radiant heating systems that are effective at lower air temperatures. END OF SECTION
Vista USD Standards and 238123 - 1 COMPUTER-ROOM AIR- Specifications CONDITIONERS SECTION 238146 WATER-SOURCE UNITARY HEAT PUMPS
PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Heat pumps. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 HEAT PUMPS A. Heat pumps can be used if natural gas is not readily available. Heat pumps shall follow current California Title 24 standards. END OF SECTION
Vista USD Standards and 238146 - 1 WATER-SOURCE UNITARY Specifications HEAT PUMPS SECTION 26 01 00
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
ARTICLE 1 SUMMARY
1.1 This document is for use as a guide specification only and is not to be used directly as a bid specification. The intent is to outline the District standards for electrical products and installation at Vista Unified School District. Any deviation from these standards must be approved by the District.
1.2 Where the words 'provide' or 'provision' are used, it shall be definitely interpreted as 'furnishing and installing complete in operating condition'. Where the words 'as indicated' or 'as shown' are used, it shall mean as shown on contract drawings.
ARTICLE 2 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS
2.1 The Contractor shall have a current California C-10 Electrical Contractor’s license and all individuals working on this project shall have passed the Department of Industrial Relations Division of apprenticeship Standards – “Electrician Certification Program.”
ARTICLE 3 CODES, PERMITS AND FEES
3.1 Comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, codes, or rulings of governmental units having jurisdiction as well as standards of NFPA, and serving utility requirements.
3.2 Obtain permits, fees, inspections, meter and the like, associated with work in each section of this Division.
3.3 Installation procedures, methods and conditions shall comply with the latest requirements of the Federal Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA).
ARTICLE 4 STANDARDS
4.1 The following standard publications of the latest editions enforced and supplements thereto shall form a part of these specifications. All electrical work must, as a minimum, be in accordance with these standards.
4.1.1 The current California Electrical Code (CEC), Part 3 Title 24 CCR. 4.1.2 National Fire Protection Association. 4.1.3 Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL). 4.1.4 Certified Ballast Manufacturers' Association (CBM). 4.1.5 National Electrical Manufacturers' Association (NEMA). 4.1.6 Institution of Electrical & Electronics Engineers (IEEE). 4.1.7 American Society for Testing & Materials (ASTM). 4.1.8 National Board of Fire Underwriters (NBFU). 4.1.9 National Board of Standards (NBS). 4.1.10 American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 4.1.11 Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association (IPECS). 4.1.12 Electrical Testing Laboratories (ETL). 4.1.13 National Electrical Safety Code (NESC). 4.1.14 California Building Code (CBC), Part 2, Title 24 CCR. 4.1.15 California Fire Code (CFC), Part 9, Title 24, CCR.
Vista USD Standards ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS #17031 – July 7, 2017 26 01 00-1 4.1.16 NFPA 72 with California State Amendments 4.1.17 National Electrical Testing Association (NETA), 2010 or most current
ARTICLE 5 DEFINITIONS
5.1 Concealed: Hidden from sight, as in trenches, chases, hollow construction, or above furred spaces, hung ceilings - acoustical or plastic type, or exposed to view only in tunnels, attics, shafts, crawl spaces, unfinished spaces, or other areas solely for maintenance and repair.
5.2 Exposed, Non-Concealed, Unfinished Space: A room or space that is ordinarily accessible only to building maintenance personnel, a room noted on the 'finish schedule' with exposed and unpainted construction for walls, floors, or ceilings or specifically mentioned as 'unfinished'.
5.3 Finish Space: Any space ordinarily visible, including exterior areas.
ARTICLE 6 WORK AND MATERIALS
6.1 Unless otherwise specified, all materials must be new of the best quality and be manufactured within the last 2 years. Materials previously incorporated into other projects, salvaged, or refurbished are not considered new. Perform all labor in a thorough and workmanlike manner.
6.2 All materials provided under the contract must bear the UL label where normally available. Note that this requirement may be repeated under equipment specifications. In general, such devices as will void the label should be provided in separate enclosures and wired to the labeled unit in proper manner.
ARTICLE 7 IDENTIFICATION OF EQUIPMENT
7.1 All electrical equipment shall be labeled, tagged, stamped, or otherwise identified in accordance with the following schedules:
7.1.1 General:
7.1.1.1 In general, the installed laminated nameplates as hereinafter called for shall also clearly indicate its use, areas served, circuit identification, voltage and any other useful data.
7.1.1.2 All auxiliary systems, including communications, shall be labeled to indicate function.
7.1.2 Lighting and Local Panelboards:
7.1.2.1 Panel identification shall be black with white lettering micarta nameplates. Where panel is fed from shall also be noted on nameplates. Example ‘ FED FROM DSB-A’. Letters shall be no less than 3/8" high.
7.1.2.2 Circuit directory shall be two column typewritten card set under glass or glass equivalent. Each circuit shall be identified by the room number and/or number of unit and other pertinent data as required.
7.1.3 Distribution Switchboards and Feeders Sections:
Vista USD Standards ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS #17031 – July 7, 2017 26 01 00-2 7.1.3.1 Identification shall be with 1" x 4" laminated white micarta nameplates with black lettering on each major component, each with name and/or number of unit and other pertinent data as required. Letters shall be no less than 3/8" high. Standby or emergency power shall have red lettering.
7.1.3.2 Circuit breakers and switches shall be identified by number and name with 3/8" x 1-1/2" laminated micarta nameplates with 3/16" high letters mounted adjacent to or on circuit breaker or switch.
7.1.4 Disconnect Switches, Motor Starters and Transformers:
7.1.4.1 Identification shall be with white micarta laminated labels and 3/8" high black lettering.
7.1.5 All communication system terminal boxes including T.V., telephone/intercom, security, fire alarm, clock, and computer networking shall be provided with white micarta laminated labels and 3/8" high black lettering.
ARTICLE 8 PLUMBING (DIVISION 22) / HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING (DIVISION 23) / ELECTRICAL – COORDINATION REQUIREMENTS
8.1 All electrical work performed for this project shall conform to the California Electrical Code, to Local Building Codes and in conformance with Division 22, 23, and 26 of these specifications, whether the work is provided under the “Plumbing”, “Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning”, or the “Electrical” Division of these specifications. Where the Division 22 and/or Division 23 Contractor is required to provide electrical work, he shall arrange for the work to be done by a licensed Division 26 Contractor, using qualified electricians. The Division 22 and/or Division 23 Contractor shall be solely and completely responsible for the correct functioning of all equipment regardless of who provided the electrical work.
8.2 The work under Division 22 and/or Division 23 shall include the following:
8.2.1 All motors required by mechanical equipment.
8.2.2 All starters for mechanical equipment which are not provided under the electrical division as part of a motor control center or otherwise indicated on the electrical drawings.
8.2.3 All wiring interior to packaged equipment furnished as an integral part of the equipment.
8.2.4 All control wiring and conduit for mechanical control systems.
8.2.5 All control systems required by mechanical equipment.
8.3 The work under Division 26 shall include the following:
8.3.1 All power wiring and conduit; and conduit only for EMS control conductors between each building and the main control panel.
8.3.2 Electrical disconnects as shown on the electrical drawings.
8.3.3 Starters forming part of a motor control center.
Vista USD Standards ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS #17031 – July 7, 2017 26 01 00-3 8.4 All power wiring and conduit to equipment furnished under Division 22 and/or Division 23 shall be provided under Division 26. Control wiring and conduit, whether line voltage or low voltage, shall be provided under the division which furnishes the equipment.
8.5 Power wiring shall be defined as all wiring between the panelboard switchboard overcurrent device, motor control center starter or switch, and the safety disconnect switch or control panel serving the equipment. Also, the power wiring between safety disconnect switch and the equipment line terminals.
8.6 Control wiring shall be defined as all wiring, either line voltage or low voltage, required for the control and interlocking of equipment, including but not limited to wiring to motor control stations, solenoid valves, pressure switches, limit switches, flow switches, thermostats, humidistats, safety devices, smoke detectors, and other components required for the proper operation of the equipment.
8.7 All motor starters which are not part of motor control centers and which are required for equipment furnished under this Division shall be furnished and installed by the Division furnishing the equipment and power wiring connected under Division 26. Motor starters and control devices in motor control centers shall be furnished and installed under Division 26.
8.8 Division 26 Contractor shall make all final connections of power wiring to equipment furnished under this Division.
8.9 Wiring diagrams complete with all connection details shall be furnished under each respective Section.
8.10 Motor starters supplied by Plumbing and/or Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning shall be fused combination type minimum NEMA Size 1, and conform to appropriate NEMA standards for the service required. Provide NEMA type 3R/12 gasketed enclosures in wet locations. Provide all starters with appropriately sized overload protection and heater strips provided in each phase, hand/off auto switches, a minimum of 2 NO and NC auxiliary contacts as required, and an integral disconnecting means. For ½ horsepower motors and below, when control requirements do not dictate the use of a starter, a manual motor starter switch with overload protection in each phase may be provided. Acceptable manufacturers are Allen Bradley, General Electric, Square D, Furnas and Cutler Hammer.
ARTICLE 9 GENERAL WIRING
9.1 Where located adjacent in walls, outlet boxes shall not be placed back to back, nor shall extension rings be used in place of double boxes, all to limit sound transmission between rooms. Provide short horizontal nipple between adjacent outlet boxes, which shall have depth sufficient to maintain wall coverage in rear by masonry wall.
9.2 In those instances where outlet boxes, recessed terminal boxes, or recessed equipment enclosures are installed in a fire rated assembly, provide "Flamesafe FSD 1077" fire stopping pads or approved equal, over the outlet or box.
9.3 Complete rough-in requirements of all equipment to be wired under the contract are not indicated. Coordinate with respective trades furnishing equipment or with the Architect as the case may be for complete and accurate requirements to result in a neat, workmanlike installation.
Vista USD Standards ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS #17031 – July 7, 2017 26 01 00-4 ARTICLE 10 SEPARATE CONDUIT SYSTEMS
10.1 Each electrical and signal system shall be contained in a separate conduit system as shown on the drawings and as specified herein. This includes each power system, each lighting system, each signal system of whatever nature, telephone, standby system, sound system, control system, fire alarm system, etc.
10.2 Further, each item of building equipment must have its own run of power wiring. Control wiring may be included in properly sized conduit for equipment feeders of #6 AWG and smaller, having separate conduit for larger sizes.
ARTICLE 11 GENERAL DEMOLITION REQUIREMENTS
11.1 Remove existing work and items which are required to be removed in such manner that minimum damage and disturbance is caused to adjacent and connection work scheduled to remain. Repair or replace existing work schedule.
11.2 Include preparation of existing areas to receive new materials and removal of materials and equipment to alter or repair the existing building as indicated and as specified.
11.3 Perform demolition exercising proper care to prevent injury to the public, workmen and adjoining property.
11.4 Perform the removal, cutting, drilling of existing work with extreme care and use small tools in order not to jeopardize the structural integrity of the building.
11.5 Rebuild to existing condition or better, existing work which has to be removed to allow the installation of new work as required.
11.6 Remove, protect and reinstall existing items as indicated. Replace materials scheduled for reuse which are damaged by the Contractor to the extent that they cannot be reused, with equal quality material, and installation.
11.7 Do not reuse in this project materials and items removed from existing site or building, except with specific written approval by the Architect in each case, unless such removed material or item is specifically indicated or specified to be reused.
11.8 Remove materials and equipment indicated to be salvaged for reinstallation and store to prevent damage, and reinstall as the work progresses. Do not reuse in this project, other materials and equipment removed from existing site or building, except with specific written approval by the Architect in each case.
11.9 Patch areas requiring patching, including damage caused by removing, relocating or adding fixtures and equipment, damages caused by demolition at adjacent materials.
11.10 Do not stockpile debris in the existing building, without the approval of the Architect. Remove debris as it accumulates from removal operations to a legal disposal area.
11.11 Contractor to assume existing oil filled and dry transformers, oil switches, ballasts, lamps, wooden poles, cross arms, computers, computer monitors, and conductor insulation containing materials considered hazardous. Comply with local, state and federal regulations, laws, and ordinances concerning removal, handling and protection against exposure or environmental pollution. Contractor shall be responsible for removal of the above hazardous materials where encountered. Include all costs for such removal as part of this contract.
Vista USD Standards ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS #17031 – July 7, 2017 26 01 00-5 11.12 All fluorescent, compact fluorescent, high intensity discharge, metal halid, LED, mercury vapor, high and low pressure sodium, and neon lamps are to be disposed of as required by the California Waste Rule Regulations as described in the California Code of Regulations, Title 22, Division 4.5 and Chapter 23.
11.13 Communication System: Where new communication systems, (including telephone, intercom, clock, security, fire alarm, data, multimedia, CATV or lighting controls) are installed to replace existing systems, unless where otherwise directed the existing systems shall remain fully operational until the new system has been installed and tested. Demolition of the existing systems shall include removal of all equipment and associated wiring and exposed conduits and providing new blank covers for all abandoned device locations.
11.14 Salvage Power Equipment: The Contractor shall carefully remove all existing switchboards, panelboards, transformers, and confirm in writing which items the Owner wishes to keep. Owner requires all distribution equipment be returned to the College unless otherwise noted. These items shall be transported to the Owner’s maintenance facilities by the Contractor. All remaining items shall be disposed of by the Contractor.
11.15 Salvage Lighting Equipment: The Contractor shall confirm in writing which items the Owner wishes to keep. These items shall be transported to the Owner’s maintenance facilities by the Contractor. All remaining items shall be disposed of by the Contractor.
11.16 Salvage Communication Equipment: The Contractor shall carefully remove all communication devices (telephone, intercom, clock, security, fire alarm, data, multimedia, CATV or lighting controls) and box each type of devices separately. The Contractor shall deliver all items to the Owner’s maintenance facility.
ARTICLE 12 PROJECT CLOSEOUT
12.1 Prior to completion of project, compile a complete equipment maintenance manual for all equipment supplied under sections of this Division, in accordance with Division 1 of these specifications and as described below.
12.2 Equipment Lists and Maintenance Manuals:
12.2.1 Prior to completion of job, Contractor shall compile a complete equipment list and maintenance manuals. The equipment list shall include the following items for every piece of material equipment supplied under this Section of the specifications:
12.2.1.1 Name, model, and manufacturer.
12.2.1.2 Complete parts drawings and lists.
12.2.1.3 Local supply for parts and replacement and telephone number.
12.2.1.4 All tags, inspection slips, instruction packages, etc., removed from equipment as shipped from the factory, properly identified as to the piece of equipment it was taken from.
12.3 Maintenance manuals shall be furnished for each applicable section of the specifications and shall be suitably bound with hard covers and shall include all available manufacturers’ operating and maintenance instructions, together with "as-built" drawings to properly operate and maintain the equipment. The equipment lists and maintenance manuals shall be submitted in duplicate to the Architect for approval not less than 10
Vista USD Standards ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS #17031 – July 7, 2017 26 01 00-6 days prior to the completion of the job. The maintenance manuals shall also include the name, address, and phone numbers of all subcontractors involved in any of the work specified herein. Four copies of the maintenance manuals bound in single volumes shall be provided.
ARTICLE 13 RECORD DRAWINGS
13.1 The Division 26 Contractor shall maintain record drawings as specified in accordance with Division 1 of these specifications, and as noted below.
13.2 Drawings shall show locations of all concealed and exposed conduit runs, giving the number and size of conduit wires. Underground ducts shall be shown with cross section elevations and shall be dimensioned in relation to permanent structures to indicate their exact location. Drawing changes shall not be identified only with referencing CORs and RFIs, the drawings shall reflect all the actual changes made.
13.3 One set of record drawings in hard copy and on disk in AutoCAD latest format shall be delivered to the District in accordance with these specifications.
END OF SECTION
Vista USD Standards ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS #17031 – July 7, 2017 26 01 00-7 SECTION 26 05 19
POWER CONDUCTORS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 This document is for use as a guide specification only and is not to be used directly as a bid specification. The intent is to outline the District standards for electrical products and installation at Vista Unified School District. Any deviation from these standards must be approved by the District.
1.2 Submittals: Submit manufacturers’ data for the following items:
1.2.1 All cables and terminations
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 Wire and cable Rated 120 volt to 600 volt.
2.1.1 All wire and cable shall be new, 600 volt insulated copper, of types specified below for each application. All wire and cable shall bear the UL label and shall be brought to the job in unbroken packages. Wire insulation shall be the color as specified herein and shall be type THWN-2. Insulated conductors shall be installed in all exterior exposed raceways. Conductors for branch circuit lighting, receptacle, power and miscellaneous systems shall be a minimum of No. 12 AWG. Increase conductor size to No. 10 AWG for 120 volt circuits greater than 100 feet from the panel to the load and for 277 volt circuits greater than 200 feet from the panel to the load. Circuit home-runs indicated to be larger than No. 12 must be increased the entire length of the circuit, including equipment grounding conductor. Wire sizes No. 14 through No. 10 shall be solid. No. 8 and larger shall be stranded. Neutral conductors shall be increased where shared with multiple conductors. Example, if conductors are # 12, neutral shall be # 10.
2.1.2 Aluminum conductors will be permitted in sizes 2/0 or larger. Conductors shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories (UL) and suitable for operation at 600 volts or less, at a maximum operating temperature of 90Ε C maximum in wet or dry locations. Conductors shall be marked “SUN-RES”. Aluminum alloy conductors shall be compact stranded conductors of STABILOY® (AA-8030) as manufactured by Alcan Cable or Listed equal. AA-8000 Series aluminum alloy conductor material shall be recognized by The Aluminum Association.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 Wire and cable shall be pulled into conduits without strain using approved lubricant. In no case shall wire be repulled if same has been pulled out of a conduit run for any purpose. No conductor shall be pulled into conduit until conduit system is complete, including junction boxes, pull boxes, etc.
3.2 All connections of wires shall be made as noted below:
3.2.1 Connections to outlets and switches: Wire formed around binding post of screw.
3.2.2 No. 10 wire and smaller: Circuit wiring connections to lighting fixtures and other hard wired equipment shall be made with pressure type solderless connectors,
Vista USD Standards POWER CONDUCTORS #7031 – July 7, 2017 26 05 19-1 Buchanan, Scotchlock, Wing Nut, or approved equal. Alternate “WAGO” #773 series or “IDEAL” #32, 33, 34 and 39 series push wire style connectors are also acceptable.
3.3 All wiring shall be continuous without splicing unless where specifically noted below.
3.3.1 No. 10 wire and smaller above grade: Quantities as needed, connection made with pressure type solderless connectors, Scotchlock or equal.
3.3.2 No. 10 wire and smaller below grade: Quantities as needed, connection made with ‘Raychem’ long barrel compression terminals with crimping tool and quantity of crimps as recommended by manufacturer, provide ‘Raychem’ WCSM-S series in-line heat shrink, sealant coated splice kit. Alternate projects must be UL listed for direct burial/submersible and rated to (1000V).
3.3.3 No. 8 wire and larger above grade: Quantities only where approved by the College, ‘Raychem’ long barrel compression terminals with crimping tool and quantity of crimps as recommended by manufacturer, provide ‘Raychem’ WCSM- S series in-line heat shrink, sealant coated splice kit. Alternate projects must be UL listed for direct burial/submersible and rated to (1000V).
3.3.4 No. 8 wire and larger below grade: Quantities only where approved by the College, ‘Raychem’ long barrel compression terminals with crimping tool and quantity of crimps as recommended by manufacturer, provide ‘Raychem’ WCSM- S series in-line heat shrink, sealant coated splice kit. Alternate projects must be UL listed for direct burial/submersible and rated to (1000V).
3.4 All wiring throughout shall be color coded as follows:
480 volt system 208 or 240 volt system
A Phase Brown Black B Phase Orange Red C Phase Yellow Blue Neutral Grey White Ground Green Green
3.5 All wiring must be color coded throughout its entire length.
3.6 All control wiring in a circuit shall be color coded, each phase leg having a separate color, and with all segments of the control circuit, whether in apparatus or conduit, utilizing the same color coding. All control wiring must be color coded throughout its entire length.
3.7 At all terminations of control wiring, the wiring shall have a numbered T&B or Brady plastic wire marker.
3.8 Cables when installed are to be properly trained in junction boxes, etc., and in such a manner as to prevent any forces on the cable which might damage the cable.
3.9 All conductors to be installed into a common raceway, shall be pulled into the raceway at the same time.
3.10 All conductors shall be installed in such a manner as to not exceed the manufacturers’ recommended pulling tension and bending radius. The equipment used for pulling must
Vista USD Standards POWER CONDUCTORS #7031 – July 7, 2017 26 05 19-2 be specifically designed for the purpose. Motorized vehicles such as pickup trucks, are not acceptable.
END OF SECTION
Vista USD Standards POWER CONDUCTORS #7031 – July 7, 2017 26 05 19-3 SECTION 26 05 26
GROUNDING
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 This document is for use as a guide specification only and is not to be used directly as a bid specification. The intent is to outline the District standards for electrical products and installation at Vista Unified School District. Any deviation from these standards must be approved by the District.
1.2 Submit catalog data for all components.
PART 2 – EXECUTION
2.1 Grounding
2.1.1 All panel board cabinets, equipment, enclosures, and complete conduit system shall be grounded securely in accordance with pertinent sections of CEC Article 250. Conductors shall be copper. All electrically operated equipment shall be bonded to the grounded conduit system. All non-current carrying conductive surfaces that are likely to become energized and subject to personal contact shall be grounded by one or more of the methods detailed in CEC Article 250. All ground connections shall have clean contact surfaces. Install all grounding conductors in conduit and make connections readily accessible for inspection.
2.1.2 Provide an insulated equipment grounding conductor in all branch circuit and feeder raceway systems, sized in accordance with CEC 250-95.
2.1.3 Grounding of metal raceways shall be assured by means of provisions of grounding bushings on feeder conduit terminations at the panelboard, and by means of insulated continuous stranded copper grounding wire extended from the ground bus in the panelboard to the conduit grounding bushings.
2.1.4 The following ohmic values shall be test certified by a third party testing lab for each item listed. If the ohmic value listed cannot be obtained additional grounding shall be installed to reach the value listed. Provide (3) written copies of final test results as part of close-out documentation.
2.1.4.1 Service ...... 10 ohms.
2.1.4.2 Step down transformers and non-current carrying metal parts ...... 25 ohms.
2.1.4.3 Manholes, hand holes, etc...... 10 ohms.
END OF SECTION
Vista USD Standards GROUNDING #17031 – July 7, 2017 26 05 26-1 SECTION 26 05 33
CONDUIT AND FITTINGS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 This document is for use as a guide specification only and is not to be used directly as a bid specification. The intent is to outline the District standards for electrical products and installation at Vista Unified School District. Any deviation from these standards must be approved by the District.
1.2 Submit Manufacturer’s data on all products:
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 Rigid steel conduit, intermediate metal conduit (IMC), electrical metallic tubing (EMT) and flexible metallic conduit shall be steel, hot dipped galvanized after fabrication.
2.2 PVC conduit shall be Carlon or approved equal.
2.3 Liquid tight flexible metal conduit shall be Anaconda Sealtite type UA or approved equal. Fittings shall be Appleton, Crouse-Hinds, Steel City, T&B, or equivalent.
2.4 MC type armored cable, when utilized, shall be provided with the following:
2.4.1 Comply with UL 1479 and CEC Art 330, 330-22(b).
2.4.2 90ºC, copper, THHN conductors.
2.4.3 Minimum #12 insulated grounding conductor.
2.4.4 Conductors sized No. 10 and smaller shall be solid, No. 8 and larger shall be stranded.
2.4.5 When more than one current carrying conductor is provided in the run on MC, a super neutral shall be provided.
2.4.6 Increase phase conductors to No. 10 AWG for 120 volt circuits greater than 100 feet from panel to load and for 277 volt circuits greater than 200 feet from panel to load. Where required increase conductor sizes for entire length of circuit.
2.4.7 Interlocked armored aluminum sheath.
2.4.8 AC or BX type armored cable shall not be substituted in lieu of MC type cable.
2.4.9 Acceptable manufacturers are AFC, Alflex or equal.
2.5 Fire stopping material shall provide an effective seal against fire, heat, smoke and fire gases. Fire stopping material shall be tested to comply with ASTME 814 and UL 1479. The submittal for this product shall include the UL listed system number and installation requirements for each type of penetration seal required for this project.
2.6 Each length of conduit shall be stamped with the name or trademark of the manufacturer and shall bear the UL label.
Vista USD Standards CONDUIT AND FITTINGS #17031 – July 7, 2017 26 05 33-1 2.7 All plastic conduit shall be rigid, schedule 40, heavy wall PVC. All PVC conduit shall be UL listed. Underground utility company conduits shall comply with local utility co. requirements.
2.8 Plastic conduit shall be stored on a flat surface, and protected from the direct rays of the sun.
PART 3 – FITTINGS
3.1 All metallic fittings, including those for EMT, flexible conduit, and Type MC cable, shall be steel or malleable iron. Die cast fittings of any other material are not permitted.
3.2 Locknuts shall be steel or malleable iron with sharp clean cut threads.
3.3 Entrance seals shall be 0.Z. type FSK or equivalent.
3.4 Bushings and locknuts: Where conduits enter boxes, panels, cabinets, etc., they shall be rigidly clamped to the box by locknuts on the outside, and a lock nut and plastic bushing on the inside of the box. All conduits shall enter the box squarely.
3.5 Furnish and install insulated bushings as per CEC article No. 300 - 4 (F) on all conduits. The use of insulated bushings does not exclude the use of double locknuts to fasten conduit to the box.
3.6 Transition from plastic to steel conduits shall be with PVC female threaded adaptors.
3.7 Couplings and connectors for rigid steel or IMC conduit must be threaded, or compression type (set screw fittings are not permitted).
3.8 Couplings and connectors for EMT shall be compression, watertight. Set screw connectors are not acceptable, except for systems below 120 volts.
3.9 MC type armored cable shall be provided with listed set screw connectors. Anti-short bushings shall be provided at all cable ends.
3.10 Connectors for flexible metal conduit shall be steel or malleable iron with screw provided to clinch the conduit into the adapter body. For sizes up to ¾'' a screw-in, "Jake type,” fitting may be used.
3.11 Install approved expansion fittings, or liquid tight flex conduit with a minimum 6" slack for conduits passing through all expansion and seismic joints.
3.12 Condulet / LB fittings are not to be used except when transitioning from the exterior to the interior of a building.
PART 4 - EXECUTION
4.1 All branch circuits shall be installed concealed in walls or above ceilings or in concrete floor slabs. PVC conduits installed in concrete floor slabs shall transition to PVC coated rigid steel where conduits penetrate above finished grade or finished floor.
4.2 Conduit sizes for various numbers and sizes of wire shall be as required by the CEC, but not smaller than 3/4". Conduit in slab or below grade shall be ¾" minimum trade size, unless otherwise identified.
Vista USD Standards CONDUIT AND FITTINGS #17031 – July 7, 2017 26 05 33-2 4.3 Conduit size shall be such that the required number and sizes of wires can be easily pulled in and the Contractor shall be responsible for the selection of the conduit sizes to facilitate the ease of pulling. Conduit sizes shown on the drawings are minimum sizes in accordance with appropriate tables in the CEC. If because of bends or elbows a larger conduit size is required, the Contractor shall so furnish without further cost to the Owner.
4.4 The Contractor shall be entirely responsible for the proper protection of this work from the other trades on the job. When conduit becomes bent or holes are punched through same, or outlets moved after being roughed-in, the Contractor shall replace same, without additional cost to the Owner
4.5 Rigid steel conduit or IMC shall be used as follows:
4.5.1 Exposed exterior locations.
4.5.2 Exposed interior locations below eight feet above floor, except in electrical rooms and closets.
4.5.3 In hazardous or classified areas as required by CEC.
4.5.4 All fire alarm conduit shall be red in color.
4.6 EMT conduit shall be used for areas as follows:
4.6.1 All interior communications, signal, and data networking systems.
4.6.2 All interior power wiring systems where not required to be in rigid steel, IMC or flexible conduit.
4.7 Flexible conduit shall be used for areas as follows:
4.7.1 To connect motors, transformers, and other equipment subjected to vibration or where specifically detailed on the drawings.
4.7.2 Flexible conduit shall not be used to replace EMT in other locations where the conduit will be exposed.
4.7.3 Flexible metal conduit shall be ferrous. Installation shall be such that considerable slack is realized. The conduit shall contain separate code sized grounding conductor.
4.7.4 Liquid tight flexible conduit shall be used in conformance with CEC in lengths not to exceed 4'. For equipment connections, route the conduit at 90 degrees to the adjacent path for point of connection. The conduit shall contain separate code sized grounding conductor. Use liquid tight flexible conduit for all equipment connections exposed in possible wet, corrosive or oil contaminated areas, e.g., shops and outside areas.
4.8 MC armored cable may be used as follows:
4.8.1 All branch circuit wiring for lighting and power circuits where permitted and installed in compliance with UL 1569 and CEC 330.
4.9 MC armored cable shall not be used for the following areas:
4.9.1 Any exterior, underground or buried in concrete circuits.
Vista USD Standards CONDUIT AND FITTINGS #17031 – July 7, 2017 26 05 33-3
4.9.2 Any circuits feeding HVAC equipment or pumps or any circuit with 30 AMPs or greater overcurrent protection.
4.9.3 Any exposed interior locations except in electrical, communication or mechanical equipment rooms.
4.9.4 Any exposed interior damp/wet locations, kitchens, science classrooms, shop areas, or concealed in science classroom casework, unless provided with approved PVC jacket.
4.9.5 Any hazardous rated area.
4.10 All underground conduit depths shall be as a minimum of 30" below finished grade for all exterior underground conduits. Where concrete slurry or concrete encasement is provided, include “Red” color dye in mixture. Trench shall have a minimum of a 2” sand base with 3” clear spacing on all sides. All power conduits shall be placed on the bottom on the trench with Communication and control conduits on top or to the side with 6” spacing from power conduits. Trenches shall also have a warning/tracer tape placed at 12” below finished grade. Conduit for all conduits for medium voltage conductors shall be at a depth of 4’-0´minimum and capped with 4” of concrete. Selected backfill shall be free of large rock and debris and compacted to 90% relative density.
4.11 Provide all necessary sleeves and chases required where conduits pass through floors or walls as part of the work of this section. Core drilling will only be permitted where approved by the Architect.
4.12 All empty conduits and surface mounted raceways shall be provided with a ¼" polypropylene plastic pull cord and threaded plastic or metal plugs over the ends. Fasten plastic "Dymo" tape label to exposed spare conduit to identify "power" or "communication" system, and to where it goes.
4.13 The ends of all conduits shall be securely plugged, and all boxes temporarily covered to prevent foreign material from entering the conduits during construction. All conduit shall be thoroughly swabbed out with a dry swab to remove moisture and debris before conductors are drawn into place.
4.14 Bending: Changes in direction shall be made by bends in the conduit. These shall be made smooth and even without flattening the pipe or flaking the finish. Bends shall be of as long a radius as possible, and in no case smaller than CEC requirements.
4.14.1 For power conduits for conductors (600v and below), provide minimum 36” radius (vertical) and 72” radius (horizontal) bends.
4.14.2 For power conduits for conductors (greater than 600v), provide minimum 72” radius (vertical) and 72” radius (horizontal) bends.
4.15 Openings through fire rated floors/walls and/or smoke walls through which conduits pass shall be sealed by Fire stopping material to comply with Division 1 to seal off flame, heat, smoke and fire gases. Sleeves shall be provided for power or communication system cables which are not installed in conduits, and shall be sealed inside and out to comply with manufacturers UL system design details. Where multiple conduits and/or cable tray systems pass thru fire-rated walls at one location, the Contractor shall submit copies of
Vista USD Standards CONDUIT AND FITTINGS #17031 – July 7, 2017 26 05 33-4 the manufacturers UL system design details proposed for use on this project. All Fire stopping material shall have an hourly fire-rating equal to or higher than the fire rating of the floor or wall through which the conduit, cables, or cable trays pass.
4.16 Provide cap or other sealing type fitting on all spare conduits. Conduits stubbed into buildings from underground where cable only extends to equipment, the conduit/cable end shall be sealed to prevent moisture from entering the room or space.
4.17 All conduits which are required as a part of systems specified in Divisions 27 or 28, or any other low voltage communication systems, shall be furnished and installed by the Division 26 Contractor.
4.17.1 The Contractor shall coordinate all conduit requirements with each system supplier prior to bid to determine special conduit system requirements.
4.17.2 The Contractor shall provide a pull rope in all conduits for these systems.
4.17.3 The Contractor shall provide conduit sleeves for all open cable installations thru rated walls or block walls. Provide conduit from each building main termination cabinet or backboard to the nearest accessible ceiling for access into all electrical or communications rooms.
4.18 In addition to the above requirements, the following requirements shall apply to all data networking conduits:
4.18.1 Flexible metal conduit may only be used where required at building seismic and/or expansion joints.
4.18.2 All underground conduits shall be provided with minimum 24" radius elbows (vertical) and 60” (horizontal).
4.18.3 No length of conduit above grade shall be installed to exceed 100 feet between pull boxes, or points of connection, unless where specifically detailed on the drawings.
4.18.4 No length of conduit shall be installed to exceed two 90 degree bends between pull boxes, or points of connection, unless where specifically detailed on the drawings.
4.18.5 All spare conduits must have a pull string and be permanently labeled with the designation.
4.19 Where surface raceways are installed in interior spaces, the Contractor shall take care to route in straight lines at right angles to or parallel with walls, beams, or columns. All raceways and device boxes shall be securely screwed to the finish surface with zinc screw “Auger” anchors Stk #ZSA1K by Gray Bar Electric or equal. Tape adhesive application will not be permitted.
4.20 The Contractor who installs surface raceway systems shall provide and install complete with wire retention clips, one for every (8) vertical feet or (5) horizontal feet or portion thereof. This Contractor shall also provide each raceway channel with pull strings.
4.21 It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor installing the raceway to coordinate the installation of raceway device plates and inserts with the communications or data contractors.
Vista USD Standards CONDUIT AND FITTINGS #17031 – July 7, 2017 26 05 33-5 4.22 MC cable shall be cut using a specific metallic sheath armor stripping tool. The use of hacksaws, dikes or any other tools not specifically designed to remove the armor sheath will not be permitted.
4.23 MC cables installed in attic spaces or above lay-in ceilings shall be installed to be protected from physical damage. The cable shall be mounted along the sides or bottom of joists, rafters or studs.
4.24 Support wires used for supporting ceilings, lighting fixtures or other equipment items shall not be used to support MC cables. Conduits, duct work, piping or any other equipment shall not be used to support or mount MC cables.
4.25 MC cable supports, fasteners and clips shall be designed specifically for use with MC cables. Standard conduit supports, fasteners and clips, nails or other items are not permitted for installing MC cables.
END OF SECTION
Vista USD Standards CONDUIT AND FITTINGS #17031 – July 7, 2017 26 05 33-6
SECTION 26 05 34
OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 This document is for use as a guide specification only and is not to be used directly as a bid specification. The intent is to outline the District standards for electrical products and installation at Vista Unified School District. Any deviation from these standards must be approved by the District.
1.2 Submit manufacturer's data for all items.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 Boxes shall be as manufactured by Steel City, Appleton, Raco, or approved equal.
2.2 All boxes must conform to the provisions of Article 370 of the CEC. All boxes shall be of the proper size to accommodate the quantity of conductors enclosed in the box. Minimum box size shall be 4" square x 1-½" deep.
2.3 Boxes generally shall be hot dipped galvanized steel with knockouts. Boxes on exterior surfaces or in damp locations shall be corrosion resistant, cast feraloy and shall have threaded hubs for rigid conduit and neoprene gaskets for their covers. Boxes shall be Appleton Type FS, Crouse-Hinds, or the approved equal. Conduit bodies shall be corrosion resistant, cast malleable iron and all types of condulets bodies shall only be used where approved for use by the college district. Conduit bodies shall have threaded hubs for rigid conduit and neoprene gaskets for their covers. Conduit bodies shall be Appleton Unilets, Crouse-Hinds, or the approved equal. Where recessed, boxes shall have square cut corners. All floor boxes shall be the product of FRS inc. or approved by the college.
2.4 Deep boxes shall be used in wall covered by wainscot or paneling and in walls or glazed tile, brick, or other masonry which will not be covered with plaster. Through the wall type boxes shall not be used unless specifically called for. All boxes shall be nongangable. Boxes in concrete shall be of a type to allow the placing of conduit without displacing the reinforcing bars. All lighting fixture outlet boxes shall be equipped with the proper fittings to support and attach a light fixture.
2.5 All light, switch, receptacle, and similar outlets shall be provided with approved boxes, suitable for their function. Back boxes shall be furnished and installed as required for the equipment and/or systems under this contract.
2.6 Pull and junction boxes shall be code gauge boxes with screw covers. Boxes shall be rigid under torsional and deflecting forces and shall be provided with angle from framing where required. Boxes shall be 4" square with a blank cover in unfinished areas and with a plaster ring and blank cover in finished areas. Covers for flush mounted oversize boxes shall extend ¾" past boxes all around. Covers for 4" square boxes shall extend ¼" past box all around.
2.7 All terminal cabinets and junction boxes or equipment back boxes which are required as a part of systems specified in Divisions 27 or 28, or any other low voltage communication systems, shall be furnished and installed by the Division 26 Contractor.
Vista USD Standards OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES #17031 – July 7, 2017 26 05 34-1
2.7.1 The Division 26 Contractor shall coordinate all box requirements with each system supplier prior to bid to determine special cabinet or back box requirements. The Contractor shall also provide stainless steel blank cover plates for all low voltage systems installed for future equipment.
2.7.2 The Contractor shall provide plywood backboards on all MDF/IDF room walls, covering all walls to 8’ or to finished ceiling height if less than 8’, as well as inside equipment enclosures. All backboards shall be a minimum of ¾" thick fire rated type plywood and painted white.
2.7.3 The Contractor shall coordinate exact rough in locations and requirements with each system supplier.
2.8 In addition to the above requirements, boxes for data networking wiring and equipment shall comply with the following:
2.8.1 All boxes shall be a minimum of 4-11/16" square x 2-c" deep.
2.8.2 Where pull boxes are required on individual conduits 1-¼" or smaller, provide 4- 11/16" square x 2-c" deep boxes. Where pull boxes are required on conduits larger than 1-¼" for straight pull through, provide eight times the conduit trade size for box length. Where pull boxes are required on conduits larger than 1-¼" for an angle or a U-pull through installation, provide a minimum distance of six times the conduit trade size between the entering and exiting conduit run for each cable.
2.9 Recessed boxes installed in fire rated floors/walls and /or smoke walls shall be sealed by Fire stopping material to comply with Division 1 to seal off flame, heat, smoke and fire gases. The Contractor shall submit copies of the manufacturers UL system design details proposed for use on this project. All Fire stopping material shall have an hourly fire-rating equal to or higher than the fire rating of the floor or wall through which the conduit, cables, or cable trays pass.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 Boxes shall be installed where required to pull cable or wire, but in finished areas only by approval of the Architect. Boxes shall be rigidly attached to the structure, independent of any conduit support. Boxes shall have their covers accessible. Covers shall be fastened to boxes with machine screws to ensure continuous contact all around. Covers for surface mounted boxes shall line up evenly with the edges of the boxes.
3.2 Outlets are only approximately located on the plans and great care must be used in the actual location of the outlets by consulting the various detailed drawings and specifications. Outlets shall be flush with finished wall or ceiling, boxes installed symmetrically on such trim or fixture. Refer to drawings for location and orientation of all outlet boxes.
3.3 All outlet boxes and junction boxes for fire alarm system shall be painted red.
END OF SECTION
Vista USD Standards OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES #17031 – July 7, 2017 26 05 34-2 SECTION 26 05 43
UNDERGROUND PULL BOXES AND MANHOLES
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 This document is for use as a guide specification only and is not to be used directly as a bid specification. The intent is to outline the District standards for electrical products and installation at Vista Unified School District. Any deviation from these standards must be approved by the District.
1.2 Submit manufacturer's data for all items.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 The concrete for pull boxes and manholes shall be class 5500 psi or as noted on the drawings and all manholes 4’x6’x6’ and larger shall be premanufactured with cast-in- place conduit terminators on all four sides. All pullboxes and manholes and covers located in parking lots, driveways, roads, or any other drivable areas shall be traffic rated.
2.2 All underground pullboxes shall be provided with steel bolt down type covers with brass nuts and bolts. All pullboxes larger than 2’-0” x 3’-0” shall also be provided with dual leaf torsion spring covers. Bolts shall be bronze or brass. All communication or signal system pullboxes shall be sized to comply with CEC Article 370 unless where other sizes are specifically noted on the drawings.
2.3 All underground pullbox and manhole covers shall be provided with either "electrical" or "telephone" or "fire alarm" markings. The telephone marking shall be used to identify telephone, T.V., clock or any other types of communication systems.
2.4 All power and communication systems shall be provided with separate pullboxes or manholes. Fire alarm circuits shall also be provided with separate pullboxes from any other type of communication systems.
PART 3 – INSTALLATION
3.1 Shoring of the excavation shall be in accordance with all federal, state and local regulations.
3.2 Provide sealing material for the joints between sections per manufacturer’s instructions.
3.3 The contractor shall make the top and access assembly or lid flush with surrounding areas where installed in drivable or normal walking areas.
END OF SECTION
Vista USD Standards UNDERGROUND PULL BOXES AND MANHOLES #17031 – July 7, 2017 26 05 43–1 SECTION 26 22 13
DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 This document is for use as a guide specification only and is not to be used directly as a bid specification. The intent is to outline the District standards for electrical products and installation at Vista Unified School District. Any deviation from these standards must be approved by the District.
1.2 Submit shop drawings and manufacturer’s data for each transformer including:
1.2.1 Incident energy level calculations
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 Acceptable manufacturers are Square D, Eaton-Cutler Hammer, Siemens, or General Electric.
2.2 Equipment manufactured by any other manufacturers not specifically listed in Section 2.1 are not considered equal, or approved for use on this project.
2.3 Energy efficient transformers shall be provided in compliance with NEMA TP-1 and requirements as outlined in the California Code of Regulations, Title 20: Division 2, Chapter 4, Article 4, Sections 1601-1609: Appliance Efficiency Regulations and California Code of Regulations, Title 24: part 6, Subchapter 2, Sections 110-11: Building Standards. Transformers shall also meet the Class 1 Efficiency levels for distribution transformers specified in Table 4-2 of the National Electrical Association (NEMA) TP-102002, Guide for Determining Energy Efficiency for Distribution Transformers” The TP-1 efficiency rating will apply to both conventional transformers and K-rated transformers.
2.4 Transformers shall comply with the latest NEMA and ANSI standards.
2.5 Transformers shall be encased in a sheet steel enclosure. Ten (10) KVA and smaller shall be non-ventilated, and above 10 KVA shall be ventilated, self-cooled. The core and coil assembly shall be completely isolated from the enclosure by means of neoprene rubber isolation pads or other acceptable vibration isolators. Transformers installed outdoors shall be provided with suitable rain shields and shall be UL listed for outdoor installation.
2.5.1 Fan cooled transformers will not be accepted.
2.6 Transformers shall have a 185ΕC insulation system and shall not exceed 115ΕC rise above a 40ΕC ambient under full load conditions.
2.7 Transformers shall be capable of operating at 100 PCT. for taps below normal. Transformers rated 30 KVA and larger shall be 6 - 2-1/2 PCT., four below, and two above normal.
2.8 Transformer cable termination compartment shall be rated at not more than 75 degrees C.
2.9 Transformers shall have aluminum windings.
Vista USD Standards DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS #17031 – July 7, 2017 26 22 13–1 2.10 Sound outputs of transformers shall not exceed the following levels, based on NEMA standard testing procedures:
KVA Rating Decibel Sound Output 0 - 9 40 10 - 50 45 51 - 150 50 151 - 300 55 301 - 500 60
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 Dry type transformers larger than 112.5KVA rating shall have a minimum of twelve inches clearance between transformer ventilation openings and adjacent structure. Transformer connections shall be made with flexible conduit.
3.2 All lugs shall be torque tested in the presence of the inspector of record.
3.3 Transformers shall be anchored to the structure to resist seismic activity in accordance with Zone 4 requirements. Provide a minimum of four (4) ½-inch diameter anchor bolts for floor or roof mounted transformers.
END OF SECTION
Vista USD Standards DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS #17031 – July 7, 2017 26 22 13–2 SECTION 26 24 13
SWITCHBOARDS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 This document is for use as a guide specification only and is not to be used directly as a bid specification. The intent is to outline the District standards for electrical products and installation at Vista Unified School District. Any deviation from these standards must be approved by the District.
1.2 All electrical materials and equipment shall be new, and of the type and quality specified: Listed by Underwriters' Laboratories, and bear their label, where standards have been established; in compliance with the applicable standards of CEC (NFPA 70), NFPA, ANSI, IEEE, IPCEA and NEMA. All components and equipment enclosures shall be manufactured by the same manufacturer.
1.3 Submittals: Submit shop drawings and manufacturers’ data on the switchboard and components, including:
1.3.1 Equipment elevation diagrams indicating the bussing configurations and ampere ratings.
1.3.2 Coordination study and incident energy level calculations.
1.3.3 Metering equipment.
1.3.4 Breakers or fused switches
1.3.5 Surge Protector Device submittals shall include UL 1449 3rd Edition Listing documentation verifiable by visiting www.UL.com, clicking “Certifications” link, searching using UL Category Code: VZCA and VZCA2
1.3.5.1 Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR)
1.3.5.2 Voltage Protection Ratings (VPRs) for all modes
1.3.5.3 Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage rating (MCOV)
1.3.5.4 I-nominal rating (I-n)
1.3.5.5 SPD shall be UL listed and labeled as Type 1 or Type 4 intended for Type 1 or Type 2 applications
1.3.5.6 Minimum of ten (10) year warranty
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 Acceptable manufacturers are Square D, Eaton, Siemens or General Electric.
2.2 Equipment manufactured by any other manufacturers not specifically listed in Section 2.1, are not considered equal or approved for use on this project.
Vista USD Standards SWITCHBOARDS #17031 – July 7, 2017 26 24 13–1 2.3 Switchboards shall be of the dead front, safety type with voltage and ampere capacity as indicated. Provide a 25% minimum tin plated aluminum ground bus running the full length of the switchboards. The neutral bus shall be 100% rated throughout.
2.4 Where conductor sizes exceed the standard breaker lug wire range, or where multiple conductors per phase are required, the manufacturer shall provide the breaker with suitable lugs for terminating the specified conductors.
2.5 All bussing shall be tin plated aluminum and braced for a short circuit current of 100,000 RMS symmetrical amperes minimum, or as noted on the drawings. Horizontal and vertical bussing shall be 100% fully rated; not tapered. All sections shall have full height bus.
2.6 The main circuit breaker (480 volt or 208 volt, 800 amp or larger) shall be a stored energy solid state trip insulated case type breaker and shall consist of a three-pole electrically and mechanically trip-free circuit breaker with inter-pole barriers, arc quenchers, manual stored-energy closing mechanism, mechanical push-button trip, position indicator, and equipped for fixed mounting in the switchboard section. Main breaker shall be 100% rated and shall be sized as indicated on the drawings. Minimum short circuit interrupting rating shall be 65,000 ampere symmetrical for all breakers in the main switchboard or as indicated on the drawings. For main breakers rated 2,500 amps and larger this rating shall be increased to 100,000 amps, or as indicated on the drawings.
2.6.1 The over current trip devices to be furnished with the main circuit breaker shall be of the three-phase construction and employ solid-state components in their design to afford combinations of long, short time, and instantaneous and ground fault characteristics (480 volt only) as specified. The circuit breaker and integral solid-state trip device shall be self-contained to include necessary power supply, transformers and tapped current level sensing transformers. An external source shall not be required to trip the circuit breaker under fault of overload conditions or to test the ground fault trip.
2.6.2 Field installed rating plug taps shall be provided.
2.6.3 Main breakers 400 amp and larger shall be solid state trip.
2.6.4 The main circuit breaker shall be provided with the following:
2.6.4.1 Adjustable longtime delay element pickup.
2.6.4.2 Adjustable short-time delay element pickup.
2.6.4.3 The instantaneous trip element pickup shall be adjustable from 1.5 to 10 times the sensor setting or none.
2.6.5 The feeder circuit breakers (480 volt or 208 volt, 400 amp or larger) shall be solid state trip molded case type breakers. They shall consist of a three-pole electrically and mechanically trip-free circuit breakers with inter-pole barriers, arc quenchers, manual closing mechanism, position indicator, and equipped for fixed mounting in the switchboard section. The breakers shall be a minimum of 80% rated, unless otherwise identified on the drawings and shall be sized as indicated on the drawings. Minimum short circuit interrupting rating shall be 65,000 ampere symmetrical or as indicated on the drawings.
Vista USD Standards SWITCHBOARDS #17031 – July 7, 2017 26 24 13–2 2.6.5.1 The overcurrent trip devices to be furnished with these circuit breakers shall be of the three-phase construction and employ solid- state components in their design to afford combinations of long, short time, and instantaneous and ground fault characteristics (480 volt only) as specified. The circuit breaker and integral solid-state trip device shall be self-contained to include necessary power supply, transformers and tapped current level sensing transformers. An external source shall not be required to trip the circuit breaker under fault of overload conditions or to test the ground fault trip.
2.6.5.2 Field installed rating plug taps shall be provided as required.
2.6.5.3 These circuit breakers shall be provided with the following:
2.6.5.3.1 Adjustable longtime delay element pickup.
2.6.5.3.2 Adjustable short-time delay element pickup.
2.6.5.3.3 The instantaneous trip element pickup shall be adjustable from 1.5 to 10 times the sensor setting.
2.6.5.3.4 Where the GFI function is required the settings shall be set at maximum levels.
2.7 Provide a metal embossed nameplate adjacent to the switchboard rating, indicating the maximum short circuit current rating of the switchboard as determined by UL 891, July 26, 2005.
2.8 Where a switchboard is indicated to be provided with an NEMA 3R (weatherproof) enclosure, the enclosure shall be manufactured to allow the equipment to mount flush against a vertical surface or wall. Rear roof equipment overhangs will not be permitted for weatherproof equipment.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 Switchboard shall be provided with adequate lifting means and capable of being rolled or moved directly to the floor without the use of floor sills.
3.2 Switchboard installation shall be done in accordance with National Electrical Installation Standards (NECA 400-2007) for installing and maintaining switchboards.
3.3 Provide 2-1/2" concrete housekeeping pads for service entrance and distribution switchboards. For switchboards containing local utility company metering equipment, the concrete pad must be flush with the front edge of the switchboard enclosure.
3.4 All lugs shall be torque tested in the presence of the inspector of record.
END OF SECTION
Vista USD Standards SWITCHBOARDS #17031 – July 7, 2017 26 24 13–3 SECTION 26 24 16
PANEL BOARDS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 This document is for use as a guide specification only and is not to be used directly as a bid specification. The intent is to outline the District standards for electrical products and installation at Vista Unified School District. Any deviation from these standards must be approved by the District.
1.2 Submit manufacturers’ data on all panel boards and components including:
1.2.1 Enclosures and covers
1.2.2 Breakers
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 The interrupting rating of circuit breakers shall be 10,000 amps for the 120/208 system and 14,000 amp for 277/480 volt systems. Refer to drawings and short circuit study for higher interrupting rating requirements. All components and equipment enclosures shall be manufactured by the same manufacturer. Circuit breakers shall be permitted to be series rated to limit the available fault current to no more than the above ratings.
2.2 All panels shall be fully bussed. Recessed panel enclosures shall be a maximum of 20" wide and 5-3/4" deep for all panels 600 amp rated and less. All panelboards shall be limited to a maximum of 42 circuits.
2.3 All busses shall be tin-plated aluminum and shall be located in the rear of the panel board cabinet. Individual circuit breakers shall be bolt on type and removable from the cabinet without disturbing the bussing in any way. All panel boards shall contain ground busses.
2.4 Panel covers shall be door in door style, with one lock. Door lock shall allow access to breakers only. Access to wireways without removal of cover shall be permitted by (non removable) screws behind the locked door. Panel cover shall be provided with full length piano hinge. All locks for all panels provided in this project shall be keyed alike.
2.5 Each panel shall have a two-column circuit index card set under glass or glass equivalent on inside of the door. Each circuit shall be identified as to use and room or area. Areas shall be designated by room numbers. Room numbers shown on the drawings may change and contractor shall verify final room numbers with the architect prior to project completion.
2.6 Tandem mounted or wafer type breakers are not acceptable.
2.7 All equipment must be of current manufacture (not over one year).
2.8 Multiple breakers shall have one common trip handle or be internally connected. Handle ties are not acceptable.
2.9 Breaker arrangements shown in the drawings shall be maintained. The circuit breakers in panels must match the orientations indicated on the drawings. In other words, if a 30 amp breaker is shown on the drawing in Space #2, this must be the location it appears on the submittal schedule. Standard factory arrangements will not be accepted.
Vista USD Standards PANELBOARDS #17031 – July 7, 2017 26 24 16–1 2.10 Where conductor sizes exceed the standard breaker lug wire range, or where multiple conductors per phase are required, the panelboard manufacturer shall provide the breaker with suitable lugs for terminating the specified conductors.
2.11 Acceptable manufacturers are Square D, Cutler Hammer, Siemens or General Electric.
2.12 Equipment manufactured by any other manufacturers not specifically listed in Section 2.10 are not considered equal, or approved for use on this project.
2.13 Surge Protective Device (SPD) panelboards, shall be provided with an integrated circuit breaker panelboard and parallel connected suppression / filter system in a single enclosure. The SPD panelboard shall meet the following parameters:
2.13.1 RELATED STANDARDS
2.13.1.1 EEE C62.41.1, IEEE Guide on the Surge Environment in Low-Voltage (1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits,
2.13.1.2 IEEE C62.41.2, IEEE Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in Low-Voltage (1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits,
2.13.1.3 IEEE C62.45, IEEE Recommended Practice on Surge Testing for Equipment Connected to Low-Voltage (1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits.
2.13.1.4 National Electrical Code: Article 285
2.13.1.5 UL 1283 - Electromagnetic Interference Filters
2.13.1.6 UL 1449, Third Edition, effective September 29, 2009 – Surge Protective Devices
2.13.2 The panelboard shall be UL 67 listed and the SPD shall be UL 1449 labeled as Type 1 or as Type 4 intended for Type 1 or Type 2 applications.
2.13.3 The unit shall be top or bottom feed according to requirements. A circuit directory shall be located inside the door.
2.13.4 SPD shall meet or exceed the following criteria:
2.13.4.1 Maximum 7-Mode surge current capability per phase shall be 100kA.
2.13.4.2 UL 1449 – Third Edition Revision; effective September 29, 2009, Voltage Protection Ratings shall not exceed the following:
VOLTAGE L-N L-G N-G L-L MCOV 208Y/120 800V 800V 800V 1200V 150V 480Y/277 1200V 1200V 1200V 12000V 320V
2.13.5 UL 1449 Listed Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage (MCOV) (verifiable at UL.com):
System Voltage Allowable System Voltage Fluctuation (%) MCOV 208Y/120 25% 150V 480Y/347 15% 320V
Vista USD Standards PANELBOARDS #17031 – July 7, 2017 26 24 16–2
2.13.6 SPD shall incorporate a UL 1283 listed EMI/RFI filter with minimum attenuation of - 50dB at 100 kHz
2.13.7 Suppression components shall be heavy duty ‘large block’ MOVs, each exceeding 30mm diameter.
2.13.8 SPD shall include a serviceable, replaceable module
2.13.9 SPD shall be equipped with the following diagnostics:
2.13.9.1 Visual LED diagnostics including a minimum of one green LED indicator per phase, and one red service LED
2.13.9.2 Audible alarm with on/off silence function and diagnostic test function (excluding branch)
2.13.9.3 Form C dry contacts
2.13.9.4 Optional – Surge. No other test equipment shall be required for SPD monitoring or testing before or after installation.
2.13.10 SPD shall have a response time no greater than 1/2 nanosecond
2.13.11 SPD shall have a 10 year warranty
2.13.12 The unit shall have removable interior
2.13.13 The main bus shall be aluminum and rated for the load current required
2.13.14 The unit shall include a 200% rated neutral assembly with copper neutral bus
2.13.15 The unit shall be provided with a safety ground bus
2.13.16 The field connections to the panelboard shall be main lug or main breaker
2.13.17 The unit shall be constructed with flush or surface mounted trim
2.14 QUALITY ASSURANCE
2.14.1 Manufacturer Qualifications: Engage a firm with at least 5 years experience in manufacturing transient voltage surge suppressors.
2.14.2 Manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 or 9002 certified.
2.14.3 The manufacturer of this equipment shall have produced similar electrical equipment for a minimum period of ten (10) years. When requested by the Engineer, an acceptable list of installations with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this requirement.
2.14.4 The SPD shall be compliant with the Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS) Directive 2002/95/EC
Vista USD Standards PANELBOARDS #17031 – July 7, 2017 26 24 16–3 PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 Painting of panelboard covers in finished areas shall be done by the general contractor.
3.2 Provide a spare 3/4" conduit stubbed to an accessible area for each of every three (3) spares or spaces provided in recessed panelboards. Provide a total of (9) 1P 20a spare breakers in each panelboard.
3.3 All lugs shall be torque tested in the presence of the inspector of record.
END OF SECTION
Vista USD Standards PANELBOARDS #17031 – July 7, 2017 26 24 16–4 SECTION 26 28 16
DISCONNECTS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 This document is for use as a guide specification only and is not to be used directly as a bid specification. The intent is to outline the District standards for electrical products and installation at Vista Unified School District. Any deviation from these standards must be approved by the District.
1.2 Submit manufacturers’ data for all disconnects and fuses.
1.2.1 Disconnects
1.2.2 Fuses
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 Acceptable manufacturers shall be Square D, Cutler Hammer, Siemens or General Electric.
2.2 Equipment manufactured by any other manufacturers not specifically listed in Section 2.1 are not considered equal, or approved for use on this project.
2.3 No ‘Pull-Out’ type disconnect devices are allowed.
2.4 All safety switches shall be heavy-duty type, externally operated, quick-make, quick- break, rated 600 volts or 240 volts as required, with the number of poles and ampacity as noted. All switches for motors shall be HP rated. Switches shall have NEMA-Type 1 enclosures, except switches located where exposed to outdoor conditions shall have NEMA Type 3R enclosure. Switches shall be fused.
2.5 Fuses shall be Bussman or Littlefuse (no known equal). Fuses shall be current limiting type with time delay characteristics to suit the equipment served.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 Mount all switches to structure or U-channel support. U-channel supports shall be cleaned and painted to prevent rust.
3.2 Switches shall be accessible with proper clearances in front per CEC 110-16.
3.3 All lugs shall be torque tested in the presence of the inspector of record.
END OF SECTION
Vista USD Standards DISCONNECTS #17031 – July 7, 2017 26 28 16–1
SECTION 26 33 23
EMERGENCY LIGHTING EQUIPMENT
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 This document is for use as a guide specification only and is not to be used directly as a bid specification. The intent is to outline the District standards for electrical products and installation at Vista Unified School District. Any deviation from these standards must be approved by the District.
1.2 Provide an uninterruptible emergency lighting Inverter System and Emergency Power Control Relays to provide a reliable source of emergency power, designed to operate during periods of utility line deficiencies without any interruption in power supplied to the connected load. The system shall provide and be capable of powering any combination of electronic, power factor corrected, fluorescent, incandescent or HID lighting. Other connected loads shall include but not be limited to: building management systems, motors, security systems and other critical voltage or frequency-sensitive electronic loads. The system shall operate from 0-100% loading, and be rated to deliver full kVA rated output at unity power factor for a minimum of 90 minutes. Upon return to normal AC utility line power, the system shall recharge the batteries without any interruption of power supplied to the load.
1.3 The Inverter System shall be listed to or comply with these standards:
1.3.1 UL 924 Standard for Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment
1.4 The Emergency Power Control Relay shall comply with UL 924
1.5 Submit Manufacturers’ data sheets for all components including:
1.6 The use of light fixture battery packs is not allowed.
1.7 The inverter system shall be installed in a conditioned space.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Single Phase systems 2000VA or less
2.1 The Central Inverter System specified herein shall be:
2.1.1 Dual Lite “Synchron” Series Inverter System.
2.1.2 Myers Power Products Illuminator “C-M” series
2.1.3 Alternate manufacturers shall comply with these specifications, and shall not exceed the physical dimensions and weights indicated on the drawing schedule.
Single Phase systems over 2000VA
2.2 The Central Inverter System specified herein shall be:
2.2.1 Dual Lite “Spectron LSN” Series Inverter System.
2.2.2 Myers Power Products Illuminator “E” series
Vista USD Standards EMERGENCY LIGHTING EQUIPMENT #17031 – July 7, 2017 26 33 23-1 2.2.3 Equipment as manufactured by Digital Signal Power Manufacturer (DSPM) has been reviewed and is not an approved alternate for this project.
Three Phase systems
2.3 The Central Inverter System specified herein shall be:
2.3.1 High-Lites “H3FT” Series manufactured by Genlyte
2.3.2 Myers Power Products Illuminator “CIII” series
2.3.3 Equipment as manufactured by Digital Signal Power Manufacturer (DSPM) has been reviewed and is not an approved alternate for this project.
2.3.4 Provide, using the system’s RS232 port, a fax operating status reports is transmitted over a customer-supplied dedicated analog phone line to up to six locations. Phone numbers can be programmed locally using the unit keypad or computer terminal, or remotely via a modem. Each designated fax location automatically receives a unit status report following monthly and annual tests, or when an alarm condition is detected. Status reports include readings on key operating parameters, as well as complete alarm and inverter log printouts, in uncoded, user-friendly descriptions. This option also provides for two-way communications thru terminal emulation software, such as HyperTerminal (not supplied with the inverter system).
2.3.5 Provide a factory-installed, internally-mounted two-position “make before break” switch. Compatible with all input/output combinations and any combination or quantity of output circuit breakers. Allows connecting the utility power supply to the load without placing the inverter in emergency mode.
2.4 Maintenance, Service and Enhanced Warranty Plans. The following shall be offered to assure initial and long term viability of the system through additional maintenance and service plans and/or through enhancements to the standard two-year electronics limited warranty.
2.4.1 Factory Start-Up shall be supplied as an inverter system standard at no additional cost. The Factory Start-Up process shall verify correct installation and operation of the inverter system. Trained, factory authorized technicians shall administer an on-site, point-by-point check of the system to include:
2.4.1.1 Internal electrical connections
2.4.1.2 AC input and Battery connections
2.4.1.3 System operating voltages
2.4.1.4 System operating parameters
2.4.1.5 Initial system “power-up
2.4.1.6 Battery discharge test
2.4.1.7 Correction of existing deficiencies
2.4.1.8 Final testing, calibration and recording
Vista USD Standards EMERGENCY LIGHTING EQUIPMENT #17031 – July 7, 2017 26 33 23-2 2.4.1.9 Training of available operating personnel
2.4.2 Monitoring Program -an optional Monitoring Program shall provide for the continuous monitoring of the inverter system by the Factory Technical Support Group. All monthly and annual system tests shall be reviewed and analyzed for early warning signs of system malfunction. Any failures shall be automatically relayed to the service department where corrective action can be recommended to the owner/operator. For activation, a user supplied dedicated analog phone line must be available.
2.4.3 Preventive Maintenance Plan (PMP) - The Preventive Maintenance Plan shall provide optional warranty system coverage beyond the standard two-year factory warranty. PMP warranty service excludes the batteries, which are covered under a separate warranty plan. The purchase of a Fax Modem option shall be required when a Preventive Maintenance Plan is selected.
2.4.3.1 Additional 2-year warranty and 2-year service coverage, weekdays, Monday-Friday, 8AM to 5PM EST.If the standard factory warranty has expired before selection and purchase of a PMP plan, an on-site evaluation shall be scheduled to determine if the system requires parts and/or labor to return to factory specifications. Parts and labor required shall be charged at additional costs.
2.5 The system shall be contained in a code gauge, steel NEMA 1 enclosure, finished in a scratch resistant, powder coat finish, with a key lock, conduit knockouts at the top and sides, and front opening doors. Enclosures shall be designed to allow stacking to minimize the overall system’s footprint. All components shall be front accessible and incorporate a modular design and a quick disconnect means to facilitate servicing.
Emergency Power Control Relays - (Noted on the drawings as LVS EPC Control relay)
2.6 Insert Series power control modules are designed to allow locally switched lighting fixtures to be wired for emergency operation from either generator, inverter system, or secondary sources.
2.7 As Manufactured by:
2.7.1 “Highlights” HEPC Series Emergency Power Control modules (203) 575-2044 www.highliteslighting.com.
2.7.2 LVS Controls (800) 982-4587 www.lvscontrols.com.
2.8 During normal operation, LEDs on the module’s faceplate indicate the presence of both utility (Green) and emergency (red) power and the local switch will be capable of turning all circuit lighting fixtures on or off as required. During utility power failures, emergency lighting fixtures controlled by the module will illuminate regardless of local switch position. If, during normal operation, emergency backup power is lost, the module will automatically produce an audible alarm as an alert to this potentially hazardous condition.
2.9 Recent energy mandates require improved vigilance in the conservation of resources. By eliminating the need for night light circuits, power controls conserve energy by allowing all area ambient lighting to be turned off while still assuring the availability of emergency illumination in the event of a utility power failure.
Vista USD Standards EMERGENCY LIGHTING EQUIPMENT #17031 – July 7, 2017 26 33 23-3 2.10 The power control automatically initiates a test of the emergency lighting fixtures whenever the local switch is turned off. Upon turning off of the local switch, the designated emergency lighting fixtures will remain illuminated for an additional 5 seconds to assure system readiness. The power controls may also be checked manually at any time through the integral test switch provided on the module’s faceplate. With the local lighting turned off and both utility and emergency power present, pressing the test switch will cause the controlled emergency fixtures to illuminate for 5 seconds.
2.11 Adapts locally switched lighting fixtures for emergency operation, bypasses local switch during power failures. Compatible with motion detector and photocells.
2.12 The Module has a full 5-year replacement warranty.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 Input and output conductors shall be enclosed in separate conduits. All load side wiring shall be sized as required for voltage drop conditions to assure proper operation of connected loads.
3.2 All free standing electrical equipment or enclosures shall be anchored to the floor and braced at the top of the equipment to the structure. Where details have not been provided on the drawings, anchorage shall comply with CBC Section 1632A and Table 16-A0. The Contractor shall submit drawings signed by the Contractors registered structural Engineer indicating method of compliance prior installation.
3.3 The system shall allow connection of both “normally on” and "normally off” (optional) loads. Connected loads shall receive utility power during normal operation, and ‘no break” system inverter power during utility interruptions.
3.4 In emergency mode, the inverter system shall supply true digitally-generated AC sinusoidal output. Refer to plans for type and location of loads served by the system.
3.5 A factory trained service representative shall be dispatched to perform the initial system start-up.
3.6 Documents supplied with each system shall include:
3.7 The system shall be guaranteed, under normal and proper use, against defects in workmanship and materials for a period of two years from the date of shipment. Batteries supplied as part of the systems shall be covered under a separate pro-rata warranty as described below:
3.7.1 Sealed Lead Calcium, 10-year life expectancy – One year full replacement warranty plus an additional nine years pro-rata. For Inverters 2000 va and below.
3.7.2 Sealed Lead Calcium, 10-year life expectancy – One year full replacement warranty plus an additional nineteen years pro-rata. For Inverters 2200 va and above.
3.7.2.1 Note: Within 90days from date of shipment, batteries shall be connected to an energized charging system to maintain the Warranty. Battery life and capacity is rated at an optimum operating temperature range of 68F to 85F. Operating temperatures outside this range will
̊ ̊
Vista USD Standards EMERGENCY LIGHTING EQUIPMENT #17031 – July 7, 2017 26 33 23-4 affect battery life and capacity. Batteries are rated at 100% capacity at 77F.
3.8 Maintenance and service̊ programs shall be made available by the supplier to assure long-term reliability of the system.
END OF SECTION
Vista USD Standards EMERGENCY LIGHTING EQUIPMENT #17031 – July 7, 2017 26 33 23-5 SECTION 26 51 14
LED LIGHTING FIXTURES AND LAMPS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 This document is for use as a guide specification only and is not to be used directly as a bid specification. The intent is to outline the District standards for electrical products and installation at Vista Unified School District. Any deviation from these standards must be approved by the District.
1.2 Submit manufacturer's data for each fixture type including the following:
1.2.1 Lighting fixture catalog data and photometry. 1.2.2 Lamp catalog data for each fixture type. 1.2.3 Driver catalog data for each fixture type. 1.2.4 Fixture warranty.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 All fixtures of the same type shall be of one manufacturer and of identical finish and appearance. All fixtures and component parts shall bear the UL label.
2.2 All recessed fixtures shall be provided with frames appropriate for the type of ceiling involved. No fixtures shall be ordered until the ceiling construction has been verified by the Contractor.
MINIMUM LUMINARY REQUIREMENTS
2.3 Electrical Components, Devices and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70 by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
2.4 Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4.
2.5 CRI of minimum 80 CCT of 4100 K.
2.6 Rated lamp life of 50,000 hours minimum.
2.7 Lamps dimmable from 100 percent to 0 percent of maximum light output.
2.8 Nominal Operating Voltage: 120 V / 277 V ac
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 All lighting fixtures shall be supported as follows:
3.1.1 From the outlet box by means of a metal strap where its weight is less than five pounds.
3.1.2 From its outlet box by means of a hickey or other threaded connection where its weight is from five to fifty pounds.
3.1.3 Directly from the structural slab or joists where its weight exceeds fifty pounds.
Vista USD Standards LED LIGHTING FIXTURES AND LAMPS #17031 – July 7, 2017 26 51 14–1 3.1.4 Lighting fixtures shall be supported independent of the ceiling system or additional ceiling support must be added to carry the weight of the lighting fixtures. Recessed lighting fixtures supported from ceiling grid tees shall be furnished with hold down clips in conformance with CEC 410 - 16, spring clips will not be permitted. All fixtures which the manufacturer has not provided UL approved clips, must be attached to the fixture and ceiling grid by metal screws.
3.2 Class 1 wiring to the fixture must be installed either conduit or type MC-PCS cabling no open wiring shall be permitted.
3.3 Any driver which produces a greater than normal amount of noise shall be replaced by the contractor. Normal will be determined by the level of sound produced by other similar fixtures operating in the area.
END OF SECTION
Vista USD Standards LED LIGHTING FIXTURES AND LAMPS #17031 – July 7, 2017 26 51 14–2 27 10 00
VOICE / DATA INFRASTRUCTURE SPECIFICATIONS
PART 1 – SPECIFICATION ENGINEERING AND DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
1.1 This document is for use as a guide specification only and is not to be used directly as a bid specification. The intent is to outline the District standards for electrical products and installation at Vista Unified School District. Any deviation from these standards must be approved by the District.
1.2 Master Specifications document includes attached Sketches #3.1 through 3.7.
PART 2 – CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS
2.1 District requires a Panduit/General Cable PanGen structured cabling system for all existing sites being modified or future sites. The cabling infrastructure system shall be backed by a minimum 25-year factory system performance warranty between the School District and the component/cabling manufacturer. The warranty shall be administered by the Panduit Corporation for all claims and certifications. All companies bidding, submitting proposals, or engaged in the installation of the infrastucture, must provide a Certificate of Authorization to facilitate the warranty with all responses to Requests for Proposals, Requests for Quotation, or any other pricing method. The authorization must be in force a minimum of one (1) year prior to the bidding of any work. No Warranty Certifications provided to the Contractor for a single project shall be accepted as equal. The Contractor shall provide a list of references, for a minimum of five (5) projects, of work for VUSD or other school districts encompassing a similar scope in which the Infrastructure system was approved for the extended manufacturer factory warranty.
2.2 Warranty: Warranty shall be a full “Performance Warranty” installed by a “Certified Contractor” as specified by the approved manufacturer. The Contractor must provide documentation from manufacturer indicating their qualifications for installation of the system, in compliance with the manufacturer’s warranty program at the proper level of coverage. A “Component Warranty” will not be considered equal.
2.3 Contractor shall have on staff a minimum of (1) BICSI RCDD and a minimum of (2) BICSI Level Technicians on staff as full-time employees.
2.4 The Contractor shall be a California licensed C7 or C10 Premise Wiring Contractor with the approved structured cabling system certifications. Firms and their personnel must be regularly engaged in the installation of networking cabling and equipment.
2.5 All work shall be performed under the supervision of a company accredited and trained by the manufacturer. All personnel performing work on a project must have successfully completed the manufacturer’s training course prior to performance of any work on a project. Accreditation will consist of individual employee certifications issued by the manufacturer. All personnel engaged in the testing of fiber optic, Category-6 premise horizontal and distribution cable systems must have successfully completed the test equipment manufacturer’s training. Certification of such training must be presented at the time of the bid submittal.
Vista USD Standards VOICE – DATA /INFRASTRUCTURE #17031 – July 7, 2017 27 10 00 - 1
PART 3 – TYPICAL SITE REQUIREMENTS
3.1 Site Trenching Requirements
3.1.1 All trenching will follow requirements in District’s Maintenance and Operations Standards and relevant codes.
3.1.2 Trenching will be coordinated with District Project Manager. Contractor shall be responsible for identification, location and protection of existing underground utilities in accordance with applicable codes.
3.1.3 The trench will house underground rated non-metallic conduit designed to allow pathways for Low Voltage Systems feed cables.
3.1.4 All trenching for low voltage systems conduits will be a minimum of 21” below grade with a minimum of 6” separation from electrical conduits when sharing the same trench. All trenches shall be provided with warning identification tape in a bright, easily distinguishable color 12” below grade.
3.1.5 Trenches with multiple low voltage systems conduits shall be provided with conduit separation devices to organize and separate conduits within the trench.
3.2 Site Conduit Requirements
3.2.1 Each individual District Site Facility shall have a single MDF Room location. All Voice, Data and other Low Voltage Systems Main Equipment Control Cabinets shall be located in the MDF Room. All site conduit distribution and feed cabling shall originate from the MDF Room location.
3.2.2 Each Low Voltage System type fed from the MDF Room shall be furnished a minimum 2” conduit to the IDF Room or Cabinet or Low Voltage Systems Secondary Control panel. The conduit size must be increased when multiple feed cables are routed through the same conduit.
PART 4 – TYPICAL MDF AND IDF ROOM/CABINET REQUIREMENTS
4.1 Typical MDF (Main Distribution Frame) Room Requirements
4.1.1 Future or Modernized MDF Room dimension requirements shall be a minimum of 280 Sq. Ft. or 14’ wide by 20’ long with a minimum 36” entry door, hinged to open out. Room shall be sized to accommodate all Low Voltage Systems Head Ends and HVAC and Lighting Control Cabinets.
4.1.2 MDF Room shall be equipped with space for termination of all fiber optic feed cables, Voice Trunk feed cables, local voice and data cables and future capacity. MDF Room shall be furnished with minimum of four (4) Freestanding, 7-foot high, 19” wide (rack mount width) 4-Post equipment racks with cable runway support system. Three racks for data termination and network electronics and One (1) rack for Wireless Clock System Transmitter, future IP Intercom equipment and data systems overflow capability. All racks will be anchored to the floor.
4.1.3 MDF Room shall be provided with a Primary Ground Bus Bar. Bus Bar shall be mounted on the backboard within the room. A TMGB connection from the Bus Bar is required for each rack utilizing a minimum #6 AWG primary wire.
Vista USD Standards VOICE – DATA /INFRASTRUCTURE #17031 – July 7, 2017 27 10 00 - 2
4.1.4 Each rack installed in the MDF Room is to be provided with two (2) 20A, 120V dedicated circuits mounted at the rear of the rack, on each side, attached at the top of rack. Each MDF Room is to be provided with a 30A, 120V dedicated circuit for the local UPS power connection at the UPS mounting location.
4.1.5 MDF Room shall be provided with anti-static type flooring materials and accessible (T-Bar) ceiling. Each room shall be provided with a dedicated HVAC Unit based on a maximum of 36,000 BTUs to maintain a maximum of 76 degrees Fahrenheit.
4.1.6 MDF Room shall be provided with a dedicated 200-Amp 120/208Volt 3-Phase electrical panel. The panel shall service the electrical requirements of the MDF Room only.
4.1.7 Voice/Data Contractor is required to provide Category-6 outlets and voice trunk connections to the Main Head-End Cabinets for the Fire Alarm (FACP) and Security Systems. Voice trunk connections to Fire Alarm FACP shall comply with State and local fire alarm codes. Security System connections shall be provided per District requirements.
4.1.8 Refer to the MDF Room Sketch #3.1 for typical room layout and equipment placement, power requirements, power outlet locations and conduit entry locations. Actual room layout will be dependent on the space planning for the project.
4.2 Typical IDF (Intermediate Distribution Frame) Room Requirements
4.2.1 Each individual District Site Facility shall have multiple IDF Room or Stand-Alone IDF Cabinet locations. All Voice and Data Secondary Distribution equipment and terminations shall be in the IDF locations. All site distribution and feed cabling shall be terminated at the IDF locations.
4.2.2 Other Low Voltage Systems Secondary equipment shall only be co-located in the Typical IDF based on District Standards. Refer to Standards for each system type and the Typical IDF Room layouts for each system requirements.
4.2.3 Typical IDF Room Space Requirements; IDF Room space requirements shall be based on the number of racks required to service the local area within the building or buildings. IDF Cabinet locations shall be provided with different requirements and are listed separately.
4.2.4 Typical Requirements for all IDF Rooms;
4.2.4.1 Each IDF Room shall be equipped with space for termination of all fiber optic feed cables and Voice Trunk cables, local Voice/Data Category-6 UTP cables. Room shall also accommodate all required network electronics, UPS and power distribution surge protectors, wire management and control equipment.
4.2.4.2 The 4-Pair Voice Feed Cables are to be terminated on the Category-6 patch panels. Each 4-Pair cable shall be terminated on a Red color RJ- 45 modular insert for quick identification. Quantity of feed cables is based on the size of the IDF serviced.
Vista USD Standards VOICE – DATA /INFRASTRUCTURE #17031 – July 7, 2017 27 10 00 - 3
4.2.4.3 Room shall be sized to accommodate additional Low Voltage Control Systems Secondary Distribution Cabinets for the HVAC, Fire Alarm, Security and Lighting Control Cabinets.
4.2.4.4 Each room is to be provided with a minimum 36” entry door, hinged to open out.
4.2.4.5 IDF Room shall be provided with a Freestanding, 7-foot high, 19” wide (rack mount width) 4-Post equipment rack or multiple racks with cable runway support system. All racks will be anchored to the floor.
4.2.4.6 IDF Room shall be provided with a Primary Ground Bus Bar. Bus Bar shall be mounted on the backboard within the room. A TMGB connection from the Bus Bar is required for each rack utilizing a minimum #6 AWG primary wire.
4.2.4.7 Each rack installed in the IDF Room is to be provided with two (2) 20A, 120V dedicated circuits mounted at the rear of the rack, on each side, attached at the top of rack.
4.2.4.8 IDF Room is to be provided with a single 30A, 120V dedicated circuit for the local UPS power connection at the UPS mounting location. Location of outlet will be based on the quantity of racks provided.
4.2.4.9 Rooms to be provided with anti-static VCT type flooring materials and accessible (T-Bar) ceiling.
4.2.4.10 Each room to be provided with a dedicated HVAC Unit based on a maintaining a temperature range of 64-70 degrees Fahrenheit, with each room sized per the maximum BTU’s (British Thermal Units). The HVAC Unit may not be turned off by the Energy Management system during off-hours and Vacation breaks and must be able to provide service 24/7.
4.2.4.11 IDF Room to be provided with power from the nearest electrical panel. The number of circuits required will be based on the size of the room.
4.2.4.12 All low voltage systems site conduits will originate from the MDF Room location. The site conduits in each IDF Room, for each separate system, shall be routed to the control panel or Rack locations.
4.2.4.13 Refer to the IDF Room Sketches #3.2, 3.3 and 3.4 for power requirements, power outlet locations and conduit entry locations.
4.2.4.14 All rooms shall be designed to allow the installation of an Emergency Lighting Inverter within the room. This equipment requires a conditioned space.
4.2.5 Typical Large IDF Room Requirements;
4.2.5.1 Future or Modernized Large IDF Room dimension requirements shall be a minimum of 126 Sq. Ft. or 9’0” wide by 14’0” long.
4.2.5.2 Large IDF Room shall be provided with a minimum of three (3) 4-Post equipment racks with cable runway support system. All racks will be
Vista USD Standards VOICE – DATA /INFRASTRUCTURE #17031 – July 7, 2017 27 10 00 - 4
anchored to the floor. Racks shall accommodate a maximum of 480 Category-6 UTP cables on patch panels.
4.2.5.3 A minimum of (3) 4-Pair Voice feed cables to be provided to this IDF location.
4.2.5.4 Large IDF Room is to be provided with a minimum of nine (9) 20A, 120V dedicated circuits, One (1) 20A, 120V convenience circuit and one (1) 30A, 120V dedicated circuit for the local UPS power connection.
4.2.5.5 Large IDF Room is to be provided with a minimum 5,000VA extended run time UPS installed in the bottom of the center rack. The UPS must be provided with full depth rack mount support rails.
4.2.5.6 Each room to be provided with a dedicated HVAC Unit based on a maintaining a temperature range of 64-70 degrees Fahrenheit, with room sized for a maximum of 32,000 BTU’s.
4.2.6 Typical Medium IDF Room Requirements;
4.2.6.1 Future or Modernized Medium IDF Room dimension requirements shall be a minimum of 103.5 Sq. Ft. or 9’0” wide by 11’6” long.
4.2.6.2 Medium IDF Room shall be provided with a minimum of two (2) 4-Post equipment racks with cable runway support system. All racks will be anchored to the floor. Racks shall accommodate a maximum of 336 Category-6 UTP cables on patch panels.
4.2.6.3 A minimum of (2) 4-Pair Voice feed cables to be provided to this IDF location.
4.2.6.4 Medium IDF Room is to be provided with a minimum of seven (7) 20A, 120V dedicated circuits, One (1) 20A, 120V convenience circuit and one (1) 30A, 120V dedicated circuit for the local UPS power connection.
4.2.6.5 Medium IDF Room is to be provided with a minimum 3,000VA extended run time UPS installed in the bottom of one of the racks. The UPS must be provided with full depth rack mount support rails.
4.2.6.6 Each room to be provided with a dedicated HVAC Unit based on a maintaining a temperature range of 64-70 degrees Fahrenheit, with room sized for a maximum of 22,000 BTU’s.
4.2.7 Typical Small IDF Room Requirements;
4.2.7.1 Future or Modernized Small IDF Room dimension requirements shall be a minimum of 81 Sq. Ft. or 9’0” wide by 9’0” long.
4.2.7.2 Small IDF Room shall be provided with a minimum of one (1) 4-Post equipment rack with cable runway support system. Rack will be anchored to the floor. Rack shall accommodate a maximum of 168 Category-6 UTP cables on patch panels.
4.2.7.3 A minimum of (2) 4-Pair Voice feed cables to be provided to this IDF location.
Vista USD Standards VOICE – DATA /INFRASTRUCTURE #17031 – July 7, 2017 27 10 00 - 5
4.2.7.4 Each Small IDF Room is to be provided with a minimum of five (5) 20A, 120V dedicated circuits, One (1) 20A, 120V convenience circuit and one (1) 30A, 120V dedicated circuit for the local UPS power connection.
4.2.7.5 Small IDF Room is to be provided with a minimum 3,000VA extended run time UPS installed in the bottom of the rack. The UPS must be provided with full depth rack mount support rails.
4.2.7.6 Each room to be provided with a dedicated HVAC Unit based on a maintaining a temperature range of 64-70 degrees Fahrenheit, with room sized for a maximum of 12,000 BTU’s.
4.3 Typical IDF (Intermediate Distribution Frame) Cabinet Requirements
4.3.1 IDF Cabinets shall only be used if there is no other alternate and the building or space will not allow the modification or addition of an IDF Room. IDF Cabinets must only be utilized in areas with an existing or added HVAC Unit that can handle the space as well as the heat generated from the cabinet. IDF Cabinets are to be wall mounted and provided in one of three sizes. IDF Cabinet applications will be used at existing facilities with limited space availability.
4.3.2 IDF Cabinets will serve as the Secondary Voice/Data Distribution equipment and termination location only. Only site feed cabling shall for these systems is to be terminated at the IDF Cabinets.
4.3.3 Other Low Voltage Systems Secondary equipment may not be co-located within the IDF Cabinet due to space restrictions. Secondary Distribution Cabinets for the HVAC, Fire Alarm, Security and Lighting Control will be located in an adjacent location, based on availability. Coordination with the Mechanical Engineer may be required.
4.3.4 Typical IDF Cabinets for VUSD are allowed in three separate sizes; Full Height 48” High Wall Mount and Mini Wall Mount type cabinets. Type of cabinet required is to be determined by the space availability and the quantity of cables to be terminated at the IDF.
4.3.5 Typical IDF Cabinet Space Requirements; IDF Cabinet space requirements shall be based on the size of the cabinet and the swing clearance required to fully open the cabinet for service. IDF Cabinet locations shall be provided with different requirements and are listed separately.
4.3.6 Typical Requirements for all Full Height and 48” High Wall Mount IDF Cabinets;
4.3.6.1 Each IDF Cabinet shall be equipped with space for termination of fiber optic feed cables, Voice Trunk cables, local Voice/Data Category-6 UTP cables. Cabinet shall also accommodate all required network electronics, UPS and power distribution surge protectors, wire management and control equipment.
4.3.6.2 The 4-Pair Voice Feed Cables are to be terminated on the Category-6 patch panels. Each 4-Pair cable shall be terminated on a Red color RJ- 45 modular insert for quick identification. Quantity of Feed cables is based on the size of the IDF serviced.
Vista USD Standards VOICE – DATA /INFRASTRUCTURE #17031 – July 7, 2017 27 10 00 - 6
4.3.6.3 IDF Cabinet is to be provided with a painted fire-retardant plywood backboard. The backboard shall be 48” in width, sized to attach to a minimum of three (3) studs, with height as required to support full cabinet height.
4.3.6.4 IDF Cabinet shall be wall mounted on a plywood backboard. Cabinets shall also be provided with a plywood backboard inside the cabinet, in the backcan, for mounting of punch blocks, ground bus bar, fiber optic service loop and routing of cabling.
4.3.6.5 IDF Cabinet shall be provided with a small Ground Bus Bar. A TMGB connection from the Bus Bar is required to the body of the cabinet, utilizing a minimum #6 AWG primary wire.
4.3.6.6 Cabinet shall be located in a space or room with an HVAC Unit that can maintain a temperature range of 68-78 degrees Fahrenheit, with the heat generated by the cabinet included in the calculation of the mechanical sizing of the BTU’s (British Thermal Units) allowed. The HVAC Unit servicing the space or room, may not be turned off by the Energy Management system during off-hours and Vacation breaks and must be able to provide service 24/7.
4.3.6.7 IDF Cabinet is to be provided with a cooling fan unit connected to a thermostatic controller within the cabinet.
4.3.6.8 IDF Cabinet to be provided with power from the nearest electrical panel. The number of circuits required will be based on the size of the cabinet.
4.3.6.9 All low voltage systems site conduits will originate from the MDF Room location. The site conduits for the Voice and Data shall be routed directly to the cabinet location.
4.3.6.10 Refer to the IDF Cabinet Sketches #3.5 and 3.6 for power requirements, power outlet locations and conduit entry locations.
4.3.7 Typical Full Height IDF Cabinet Requirements;
4.3.7.1 The IDF Cabinet shall be wall mount type. The front section shall pivot to allow access to the rear of the equipment and access to the backcan area. Cabinet shall be provided with 70” (40 RU) of usable rack space, and 90.75” overall in height, to the top of the backcan. Low Voltage Systems conduits must enter the cabinet from either the top or bottom only.
4.3.7.2 IDF Cabinet shall accommodate a maximum of 144 Category-6 UTP cables on patch panels.
4.3.7.3 A minimum of (2) 4-Pair Voice feed cables to be provided to this IDF location.
4.3.7.4 Each IDF Cabinet is to be provided with a minimum of two (2) 20A, 120V dedicated circuits and one (1) 20A, 120V dedicated circuit for the local UPS power connection.
Vista USD Standards VOICE – DATA /INFRASTRUCTURE #17031 – July 7, 2017 27 10 00 - 7
4.3.7.5 Typical IDF Cabinet is to be provided with a minimum 1,500VA extended run time rack mounted UPS unit installed in the bottom of the cabinet. The UPS must be provided with heavy duty 2-Post front rack mount support ears kit.
4.3.7.6 Each Cabinet shall be located in a room with a dedicated HVAC Unit based on a maintaining a temperature range of 68-78 degrees Fahrenheit, Cabinet produces a maximum of 6,000 BTU’s to be calculated when sizing HVAC Unit.
4.3.7.7 Fiber optic service loop is to be mounted in the rear of the cabinet in the backcan.
4.3.8 Typical 48” High IDF Cabinet Requirements;
4.3.8.1 The IDF Cabinet shall be wall mount type. The front section shall pivot to allow access to the rear of the equipment and access to the backcan area. Cabinet shall be provided with 45.5” (26 RU) of usable rack space, and 48” overall in height. Low Voltage Systems conduits must enter the cabinet from either the top or bottom only.
4.3.8.2 IDF Cabinet shall accommodate a maximum of 96 Category-6 UTP cables on patch panels.
4.3.8.3 A minimum of (1) 4-Pair Voice feed cable to be provided to this IDF location.
4.3.8.4 IDF Cabinet is to be provided with a minimum of one (1) 20A, 120V dedicated circuit and one (1) 20A, 120V dedicated circuit for the local UPS power connection.
4.3.8.5 Typical IDF Cabinet is to be provided with a minimum 1,500VA extended run time rack mounted UPS unit installed in the bottom of the cabinet. The UPS must be provided with heavy duty 2-Post front rack mount support ears kit.
4.3.8.6 Cabinet shall be located in a room with a dedicated HVAC Unit based on a maintaining a temperature range of 68-78 degrees Fahrenheit, Cabinet produces a maximum of 3,000 BTU’s to be calculated when sizing HVAC Unit.
4.3.8.7 Fiber optic service loop is to be mounted in the rear of the cabinet in the backcan.
4.3.9 Typical Requirements for Mini 32” High Vertical Wall Mount IDF Cabinets;
4.3.9.1 The Mini 32” High Vertical Wall Mount IDF Cabinet is restricted by available space and therefore must be used when no other option is available for the area being served.
4.3.9.2 Refer to the IDF Cabinet Sketch #3.7 for power requirements, power outlet locations, equipment mounting locations and conduit entry locations.
Vista USD Standards VOICE – DATA /INFRASTRUCTURE #17031 – July 7, 2017 27 10 00 - 8
4.3.9.3 Maximum IDF Cabinet space only allows for termination of (1) 48-Port Category-6 UTP Patch Panel, (1) 1RU high fiber optic feed patch panel and (1) 48-Port Network Switch. Category-6 patch panel is mounted on the upper rack rails and fiber optic patch panel and network switch are to be installed on the lower vertical mount rack rails.
4.3.9.4 IDF Cabinet shall accommodate a maximum of 48 Category-6 UTP cables on patch panels.
4.3.9.5 Cabinet location requires (1) 20A, 120V Dedicated Duplex outlet inside the cabinet and (1) 20A, 120V general purpose outlet outside the cabinet on the backboard. A 6-Outlet surge suppressor is to be mounted at the bottom inside the cabinet. No UPS is to be provided for this size cabinet.
4.3.9.6 Ground Bus Bar and (1) 20A, 120V Duplex outlet for future equipment are to be mounted on the backboard adjacent to the cabinet.
4.3.9.7 A minimum of (1) 4-Pair Voice feed cable to be provided to this IDF location.
4.3.9.8 IDF Cabinet is to be provided with a painted fire-retardant plywood backboard. The backboard shall be 48” in width, sized to attach to a minimum of three (3) studs, and 48” height required to support full cabinet height and provide mounting space for required equipment.
4.3.9.9 IDF Cabinet shall be provided with a small Ground Bus Bar. Bus Bar shall be mounted on the backboard below the cabinet. A TMGB connection from the Bus Bar is required to the body of the cabinet, utilizing a minimum #6 AWG primary wire.
4.3.9.10 Cabinet shall be located in a space or room with an HVAC Unit that can maintain a temperature range of 68-78 degrees Fahrenheit, with the heat generated by the cabinet included in the calculation of the mechanical sizing of the BTU’s (British Thermal Units) allowed. Cabinet produces less than 1,000 BTU’s to be calculated when sizing HVAC Unit. The HVAC Unit servicing the space or room, may not be turned off by the Energy Management system during off-hours and Vacation breaks and must be able to provide service 24/7.
4.3.9.11 IDF Cabinet is to be provided with a cooling fan unit within the cabinet.
4.3.9.12 Fiber optic service loop is to be mounted above the cabinet or properly supported in the available accessible ceiling above the cabinet.
4.3.10 Refer to the Typical IDF Rooms and Cabinets sketches for typical layouts and equipment placement. Actual room and cabinet layouts will be dependent on the space planning or available existing space for the project.
PART 5 – APPROVED PRODUCTS
5.1 Products specified in this section outline the District approved materials and methods for installation of the structured cabling system components.
Vista USD Standards VOICE – DATA /INFRASTRUCTURE #17031 – July 7, 2017 27 10 00 - 9
5.2 Equipment qualifications: all hardware, components and installation services that shall be furnished as a minimum of EIA/TIA Level Category-6 and manufacturer classified Enhanced Category-6.
5.2.1 All non-consumable products shall be furnished with a minimum a 25-year guarantee. When installed, the PanGen Network Cabling System will operate the application(s) for which the system was designed to support.
5.2.2 All components, parts, infrastructure, patch cables, termination panels and cables must be classified by the manufacturer as a part of the “25-Year PanGen Certified” warranty program. Contractor may not mix in components from other certified programs or materials that are not considered part of the “25-Year PanGen Certified” warranty.
5.3 Equipment Racks and Cabinets; The following is a list of each type of District approved rack or cabinet products for the MDF Room and IDF Room or Cabinet locations;
5.3.1 Alternate equipment manufacturers other than those indicated will not be reviewed or approved for use on District projects.
5.3.2 (Open Frame) shall be manufactured by Chatsworth Products Inc. (CPI). CPI Model #50120-703 Quadrarack 4-Post equipment rack, 84” High by 20.3” Wide by 29” Deep, black color. See MDF and IDF Room sketches for quantity of racks required. Alternate rack option as manufactured by Hubbel Model #SF841929T NEXTFRAME 4-Post equipment rack.
5.3.3 (Full Height Enclosed Wall Mount Cabinet) shall be manufactured by Middle Atlantic. Middle Atlantic Model #SR40-32 SR Series pivoting equipment cabinet, 90.75” Overall Height by 23.5” Wide by 32” Deep (Usable 70” height and usable 30” depth), black color. See IDF Cabinet sketches for selection parameters for this type of cabinet. (No known alternate)
5.3.3.1 Provide with Plexiglass Front door option Model #PFD-40 with keylock. All cabinets shall be provided with the same keylock.
5.3.3.2 Cabinet may be furnished with the optional mounting base for installation of the UPS in the base of the cabinet, Middle Atlantic Model #SR-UPS-BKT.
5.3.3.3 Provide cabinet with (2) 4-1/2” fan kits, mounted in top of cabinet for ventilation, Middle Atlantic Model #QFAN with FANCORD-2X1 plug kit and thermostatic controller Model #FC-2-215-1CA.
5.3.3.4 Provide fire-retardant painted backboard in rear of cabinet, size as required. Backboard shall be furnished and installed by the Low Voltage Systems Contractor.
5.3.4 (48” High Enclosed Wall Mount Cabinet) shall be manufactured by Hubbell. Hubbell Model #HSQ4836 QUADCAB series dual swing wall mount equipment cabinet, 48.6” Overall Height by 23” Wide by 36” Deep (Usable 45.5” height and usable 25” depth), black color. See IDF Cabinet sketches for selection parameters for this type of cabinet. Alternate rack option as manufactured by Middle Atlantic Model #DWR-24-26PD DWR Series Cabinet. (Note: Optional cabinet selection has 24RU usable rack mounting space)
Vista USD Standards VOICE – DATA /INFRASTRUCTURE #17031 – July 7, 2017 27 10 00 - 10
5.3.4.1 Provide with Plexiglass Front door with keylock. All cabinets shall be provided with the same keylock.
5.3.4.2 Provide cabinet with fan kit for ventilation Hubbell Model #HWKF120 with thermostatic controller Hubbel Model #CTK.
5.3.4.3 Provide fire-retardant painted backboard in rear of cabinet Hubbell Model #REKBB40.
5.3.5 (32” High Enclosed Mini Wall Mount Cabinet) shall be manufactured by Hubbell. Hubbell Model #RE4B RE-BOX series wall mount equipment cabinet, 32” Overall Height by 24” Wide by 10” Deep (Vertical mounting for switches), black color. See IDF Cabinet sketches for selection parameters for this type of cabinet. Alternate rack option as manufactured by Middle Atlantic Model #HDR-9 HDR Series Cabinet. (Note: Optional cabinet selection is 4” taller in height)
5.3.5.1 Provide with vertical cabinet with keylock. All cabinets shall be provided with the NSQ Tool for opening the keylock.
5.3.5.2 Provide cabinet with fan kit for ventilation Hubbell Model #REKF with filter kit Model #REKFF. Must provide (2) fan kits and (1) filter kit per cabinet.
Infrastructure Cabling Requirements
5.4 The School District schools and support facilities shall be provided with the following minimum Voice/Data Infrastructure cabling requirements;
5.4.1 Data Infrastructure Fiber Optic Feed Cables –
5.4.1.1 Each IDF location shall be provided with a fiber optic feed cable originating from the MDF Room location. All IDF locations shall be home run to the MDF Room. District Standards do not allow for series style (daisy chaining) routing of the fiber optic feed cable.
5.4.1.2 District minimum requirement for the fiber optic feed cable is a 12- Strand, OM4+, 50/125um multimode in a single jacket. Total quantity of fibers to be extended to each IDF location is 12-Strands.
5.4.1.3 Provide Multimode 50/125-micron fiber optic glass, (minimum OM4+ laser-optimized grade, extended distance) for dual mode operation at 850 nm and 1300 nm wave lengths. Maximum attenuation at 3.0dB/km @ 850nm and 1.0dB/km @ 1310nm. Minimum 1-Gigabit Ethernet distance guarantee of 1100 meters @ 850nm and 550 meters @ 1300nm. Minimum 10-gigabit Ethernet distance guarantee of 600 meters @ 850nm. Fiber shall be ISO-TIA OM4 plus rated. General Cable Fiber Optic Glass Type “BM”.
5.4.2 Data Infrastructure Fiber Optic Termination –
5.4.2.1 Fiber optic cable shall be terminated at both ends with “LC” style connectors. Multimode terminations must be Black in color, Model #FLCSMBLY and single mode terminations must be Blue in color, Panduit Model #FLCSSBUY.
Vista USD Standards VOICE – DATA /INFRASTRUCTURE #17031 – July 7, 2017 27 10 00 - 11
5.4.2.2 MDF Fiber Patch Panel; All fiber feed cables shall be terminated in a single fiber optic patch panel up to 144-Strands. Quantities for fiber beyond 144-Strands shall be terminated in additional fiber optic patch panels, in maximum increments of 144-Strands. Fiber panel to be provided with a pull out, tilting termination and cable management tray. Provide fiber optic patch panels and associated components as manufactured by Panduit, Opticom Model #FRME2 with multimode LC- type Aqua color bulkhead panels Panduit Model #FAP12WAQDLC. Multimode bulkhead adapters must be bronze phosphorus type sleeves. Space for 25% future spare terminations shall be provided with fully loaded bulkheads for multimode. Unused bulkhead panel slots to be provided with blank panels.
5.4.2.3 IDF Fiber Patch Panel; Fiber optic cables shall be terminated on a minimum 24-Port rack mount fiber optic patch panel at each IDF location, loaded with a minimum of 12-Strand multimode duplex fiber bulkheads. Fiber panel to be provided with a pull out, tilting termination and cable management tray. Provide fiber optic patch panels and associated components as manufactured by Panduit, Opticom Model #FRME1 with multimode LC-type Aqua color bulkhead panels Panduit Model #FAP6WAQDLC. Multimode bulkhead adapters must be bronze phosphorus type sleeves. Unused bulkhead panel slots to be provided with blank panels.
5.4.2.4 Fiber cable routed to a 32”H Mini Vertical mount IDF Cabinet may not be more than 1RU in height. All other IDF Room and Cabinet types shall be provided with termination equipment (rack mounted), including all associated installation hardware.
5.4.3 Data Infrastructure Category-6 Cables –
5.4.3.1 Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) cable provided for all network and telephone connections shall be classified as Category-6 by the EIA/TIA and Enhanced Category-6 by the manufacturer of the cable. (Enhanced Category-6 is a classification only recognized by cable manufacturers for marketing purposes).
5.4.3.2 The Category-6 cables shall be CMR-rated for all indoor non-plenum applications and shall be CMP-rated for all indoor plenum applications in compliance with NEC (National Electrical Code) Standards.
5.4.3.3 Cables installed below grade, between buildings, shall be provided as OSP (Outside Plant) rated for UV resistance and jacket shall be abrasion resistant. Outside Plant cable shall be waterproof with a water blocking gel-filled construction and a PE (Polyethylene) outside jacket.
5.4.3.4 Category-6 UTP cable provided for all District projects shall be provided to be in compliance with the manufacturer’s extended warranty program. Approved Category-6 cables shall be as follows;
5.4.3.4.1 General Cable — GenSPEED 6500 Non-Plenum CMR-rated Cable Part #71339XX (XX stands for cable color and packing option)
Vista USD Standards VOICE – DATA /INFRASTRUCTURE #17031 – July 7, 2017 27 10 00 - 12
5.4.3.4.2 General Cable — GenSPEED 6500 Plenum CMP-rated Cable Part #71319XX (XX stands for cable color and packing option)
5.4.3.4.3 General Cable — GenSPEED 6 Outdoor OSP-rated Cable Part #7136100 (XX stands for cable color and packing option)
5.4.3.5 District Standard Color Code for Category-6 UTP shall be the following;
5.4.3.5.1 Connections for all Voice and Data ports shall be Orange color.
5.4.3.5.2 Connections for all Wireless Access Point ports shall be Green color.
5.4.3.5.3 Connections for all Audio-Visual port applications shall be Blue color. (Includes data connections at Flat Panels, Projectors, Sound System Cabinets, etc.)
5.4.3.5.4 Connections for all Security and Video Surveillance ports shall be Yellow color.
5.4.3.5.5 All Category-6 UTP cables installed for an Outside Plant cable run shall be Black color. This is the only color option for OSP-rated cable regardless of the application at the outlet location.
5.4.4 Data Infrastructure Category-6 Cable Termination –
5.4.4.1 District Standard is Category-6 Modular Patch Panels (rack mounted) with RJ45 style inserts, for terminating all twisted pair cable from each Voice/Data port served from the IDF or MDF location. All patch panels shall be either 24 or 48-port capacity. Patch panels of other sizes are not approved for use. Provide 25% spare capacity for future wiring requirements at each IDF or MDF location.
5.4.4.2 Approved patch panels for installation at IDF or MDF locations;
5.4.4.2.1 Panduit Mini-Com Series 24-Port Modular patch panel Part #CPP24FMWBLY, supplied with rear-mounted faceplates.
5.4.4.2.2 Panduit Mini-Com Series 48-Port Modular patch panel Part #CPP48FMWBLY, supplied with rear-mounted faceplates.
5.4.4.2.3 Patch panels shall be furnished Laser/Ink Jet Printer adhesive labeling to identify additional information required by the District labeling standards. Each panel shall be provided with Panduit Label Kit Part #C252X030FJJ.
5.4.4.2.4 Patch Panels to be provided with color coded Category-6, RJ-45, modular inserts. The 25% spare capacity for future at each IDF or MDF location shall be filled out with Voice/Data color modular inserts. Inserts shall be provided in the following colors per the District Standards;
Vista USD Standards VOICE – DATA /INFRASTRUCTURE #17031 – July 7, 2017 27 10 00 - 13
(i) Voice/Data – Orange
(ii) Wireless Access Points – Green
(iii) Audio-Visual Data Ports – Blue
(iv) Security and Video Surveillance – Yellow
(v) Voice Trunk 4-Pair from MDF Room - Red
5.4.4.2.5 Provide cable strain relief bars at the rear of each patch panel, all cables shall be secured to bars with velcro straps. Provide Panduit 5” deep strain relief bars Part #SRB19D5BL.
5.4.4.3 Category- UTP outlet connections at the outlet faceplate locations are to be provided with the same inserts and color code as the patch panels. Data outlets shall be Panduit Mini-Com Category-6 TX6 Plus Part #CJ688TGXX (XX=Color of Outlet).
5.4.4.4 Cables must be terminated at the data outlet with the Panduit #EGJT termination tool per District Standards.
5.4.4.5 Faceplates to be provided with label windows and two to six ports, depending on requirements. Standard District color shall be white and standard faceplates are to be single gang. Panduit Mini-Com Executive Series Faceplates. Blank inserts shall match faceplates.
5.4.4.6 All labels are to be installed under label the windows. Labels adhered to the surface of the faceplate are not acceptable per District Standards.
5.4.4.7 Final labeling format for all outlet faceplates and patch panels will be made by the Director of the District IT Department.
5.4.4.8 Specialty application faceplates –
5.4.4.8.1 Wall mounted wall-telephone faceplate with mounting studs – Panduit Part #KWP6PY (Includes Panduit Category-6 Keystone Data Jack)
5.4.4.8.2 Surface Mount for IP-Cameras – Panduit Part #CBXJ2XX-A (XX-Represents Color)
5.4.5 Voice Trunk Feed Category-6 Cables –
5.4.5.1 Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) cable provided for direct telephone trunk line connections shall be classified as Category-6 by the EIA/TIA and by the manufacturer of the cable.
5.4.5.2 The Voice Trunk cables shall be used to allow for direct trunk line connections from the Telephone Utility Co. to devices or systems that require direct trunk access, such as Security Panels, Fire Alarm panels, Elevator equipment, fax machines, etc.
Vista USD Standards VOICE – DATA /INFRASTRUCTURE #17031 – July 7, 2017 27 10 00 - 14
5.4.5.3 Cables installed below grade, between buildings, shall be provided as OSP (Outside Plant) rated for UV resistance and jacket shall be abrasion resistant. Outside Plant cable shall be waterproof with a water blocking gel-filled construction and a PE (Polyethylene) outside jacket.
Main Distribution Frame Equipment Requirements
5.5 The Main Distribution Frame shall be furnished with the following additional requirements;
5.5.1 The 4-Post equipment racks shall be provided with the following accessories;
5.5.1.1 All equipment racks are to be provided with 12” cable runway routed across and secured to the top of the racks, and cable runway shall be secured to the backboard for structural stability. Cable runway and required accessories and components shall be as manufactured by CPI (Chatsworth Products Inc.), 12” Universal Cable Runway in black, #10250-712. Cable runway accessories, supports and components shall be black in color.
5.5.1.2 LCD Monitor Shelf - (1) LCD monitor shelf (per room) with 105-key PS/2 keyboard tray for 4-post systems. Maximum 1RMU height, pull out shelf with rotatable monitor assembly. Includes 17" LCD monitor with minimum 1280x1024 resolution, with integrated 8-port KVM Switch. Provide keyboard with integrated touch pad. Middle Atlantic Part # RM- KB-LCD17X8KVM or approved equal by CPI.
5.5.1.3 Storage Drawer - (1) 5.25" high x 20"deep storage drawer, minimum 50lb rated, with locking hinged door. CPI Part #13083-719 or equal by Middle Atlantic. The location of the storage drawer shall be as determined by the District IT Department.
5.5.1.4 Vented Shelves - (1 per rack) adjustable full depth vented shelf for each 4-Post rack by CPI #15255-703 or approved equal by Middle Atlantic.
5.5.1.5 Provide full length vertical wire managers, CPI Double Sided Cabling Section, Part #12096-703 narrow width, on outside end of each rack in the overall layout, and Part #11729-703 full width between 4-Post racks.
5.5.1.6 (1) Grounding kit, connect grounding conductor to nearest ground buss bar. CPI Part #41016-001 or equal. All cable runway must be grounded and bonded, as well as the equipment racks.
5.5.1.7 Horizontal wire managers shall be provided between each patch panel and network switch. Provide 2RMU height managers. CPI Part #30130- 719.
5.5.1.8 (1) rack mounted surge-arrest style PDU per rack, 1 rack unit in height, TrippLite Model #PDUMH15NET2 with (8) NEMA 5-15R outlets, built-in SNMP Ethernet interface and NEMA L5-15P input with 5-20P adapter with 10-foot cord.
Intermediate Distribution Frame Equipment Requirements
5.6 The Intermediate Distribution Frame shall be furnished with the following additional requirements;
Vista USD Standards VOICE – DATA /INFRASTRUCTURE #17031 – July 7, 2017 27 10 00 - 15
5.6.1 The 4-Post equipment racks shall be provided with the following accessories;
5.6.1.1 All equipment racks are to be provided with 12” cable runway routed across and secured to the top of the racks, and cable runway shall be secured to the backboard for structural stability. Cable runway and required accessories and components shall be as manufactured by CPI (Chatsworth Products Inc.), 12” Universal Cable Runway in black, #10250-712. Cable runway accessories, supports and components shall be black in color.
5.6.1.2 Vented Shelves - (1 per rack) adjustable full depth vented shelf for each 4-Post rack by CPI #15255-703 or approved equal by Middle Atlantic.
5.6.1.3 Provide full length vertical wire managers, CPI Double Sided Cabling Section, Part #12096-703 narrow width, on outside end of each rack in the overall layout, and Part #11729-703 full width between 4-Post racks.
5.6.1.4 (1) Grounding lug on each rack, connect grounding lug to nearest ground buss bar with #6 AWG stranded Green Ground Wire. CPI Part #40167-001 or equal. All cable runway must be grounded and bonded, as well as the equipment racks.
5.6.1.5 Horizontal wire managers shall be provided between each patch panel and network switch. Provide 2RMU height managers. CPI Part #30130- 719.
5.6.1.6 (1) rack mounted surge-arrest style PDU per rack, 1 rack unit in height, TrippLite Model #PDUMH15NET2 with (8) NEMA 5-15R outlets, built-in SNMP Ethernet interface and NEMA L5-15P input with 5-20P adapter with 10-foot cord.
5.6.2 The wall mount cabinets shall be provided with the following accessories (Except for Mini-Type Cabinet);
5.6.2.1 (1) Grounding lug on each cabinet, connect grounding lug to nearest ground buss bar with #6 AWG stranded Green Ground Wire. CPI Part #40167-001 or equal.
5.6.2.2 Horizontal wire managers shall be provided between each patch panel and network switch. Provide 1RMU height managers. CPI Part #30139- 719.
5.6.2.3 (1) rack mounted surge-arrest style PDU per cabinet, 1 rack unit in height, TrippLite Model #PDUMH15NET2 with (8) NEMA 5-15R outlets, built-in SNMP Ethernet interface and NEMA L5-15P input with 5-20P adapter with 10-foot cord
5.6.3 The Mini-Type Cabinet wall mount cabinets shall be provided with the following accessories;
5.6.3.1 (1) Grounding lug on each cabinet, connected to the ground wire on the electrical outlet.
5.6.3.2 No wire managers to be provided for the Mini Cabinet.
Vista USD Standards VOICE – DATA /INFRASTRUCTURE #17031 – July 7, 2017 27 10 00 - 16
5.6.3.3 (1) wall mounted surge-arrest style power strip, mounted in the bottom of the cabinet, CyberPower Model #CSP604U with (6) NEMA 5-15R outlets and NEMA L5-15P input with 4-foot cord.
UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply) Equipment Requirements
5.7 All MDF/IDF locations, except the Mini-Type wall mount cabinet, to be provided with a UPS.
5.7.1 MDF/IDF Room UPS; Uninterruptible power supply with mounting brackets and all cables. UPS shall be provided with backplane configuration containing:
5.7.1.1 Minimum of (8) 15-amp, 120-volt, non-locking, NEMA 5-15R, output receptacles.
5.7.1.2 Input of (1) 15-amp, 120-volt, locking, NEMA 5-15P plug installed on 10'-0" power cord.
5.7.1.3 TrippLite Model # SMART1500RMXL2UA
5.7.1.4 Provide battery packs with mounting brackets for UPS. Install battery packs in the MDF/IDF rack or cabinet. Connect back-up battery packs to UPS with manufacturer provided cables. Provide UPS battery pack by TrippLite Model #BP36V15-2U.
5.7.1.5 Provide each UPS with the optional Network interface card – Model #SNMPWEBCARD in UPS. Power Management Software to be included with all UPS models.
5.7.1.6 Provide optional Environmental sensor/monitor for UPS. TrippLite Envirosense monitor unit, with Temperature, Humidity and Digital Inputs, connected to the UPS and mounted to the top of the rack.
5.7.1.7 All UPS products shall be furnished with a 3-Year warranty.
5.7.2 UPS not required for Mini-Type Wall Mount IDF cabinet.
Patch Cable Requirements
5.8 Patch cables for fiber optic and copper UTP connections.
5.8.1 Fiber Optic Patch Cables:
5.8.1.1 Multimode Patch Cables: Multimode fiber optic patch cables for connections to the network switches will be 50/125-micron fiber optic glass, (minimum OM4 laser-optimized grade) for dual mode operation at 850 nm and 1300 nm wave lengths. Fiber optic patch cords shall be terminated with LC connectors on both ends, with ceramic ferrules. All Multimode patch cords shall be Aqua (Lt.Blue) in color and 2 or 3- Meters in length.
5.8.2 Category-6 patch cables installed at the MDF/IDF location shall match the color of the outlet inserts on the patch panel and faceplate. The patch cables will be provided in 4-foot lengths for standard installations. Approved patch cables shall be as manufactured by Panduit:
Vista USD Standards VOICE – DATA /INFRASTRUCTURE #17031 – July 7, 2017 27 10 00 - 17
5.8.2.1 Patch cords shall be in compliance with the PanGen “Channel” warranty program.
5.8.2.2 Panduit Model #UTPSPXY-ZZ (X=length and ZZ=color in part number as required for the project)
5.8.3 Category-6 patch cables installed at the workstation (outlet) location shall match the color of the outlet inserts on the faceplate. The patch cables will be provided in 12-foot lengths for standard installations. Approved patch cables shall be as manufactured by Panduit:
5.8.3.1 Patch cords shall be in compliance with the PanGen “Channel” warranty program.
5.8.3.2 Panduit Model #UTPSPXY-ZZ (X=length and ZZ=color in part number as required for the project)
5.8.4 Category-6 patch cables installed at the IP-Camera locations shall Yellow in color. The patch cables will be provided in 2-foot length for installation within the IP-Camera location junction box. Approved patch cables shall be as manufactured by Panduit:
5.8.4.1 Patch cords shall be in compliance with the PanGen “Channel” warranty program.
5.8.4.2 Panduit Model #UTPSP2Y-YL
PART 6 – INSTALLATION PRACTICES
6.1 Copper Cable Installation Practices
6.1.1 Velcro cable management straps are required on all Category-6 cable bundles, the last 20 feet or upon entry into equipment closet, a maximum of 12" apart.
6.1.2 Velcro cable management straps are required on the rear of the equipment rack, with cables attached to the cable management bars. Straps shall be a maximum of 6" apart.
6.1.3 Provide 6 inches of cable slack in the junction boxes for all Category-6 UTP voice/data outlets.
6.1.4 In an accessible ceiling area, provide a 10-foot (Figure-8 configuration) service loop above the data/voice outlet locations.
6.1.5 Do not provide service loop length in the MDF/IDF Room or Cabinet (Except for slack required to open cabinet fully).
6.1.6 Open wiring run through the ceiling spaces shall be bundled together and supported above the ceiling. Cables must be fastened to the building structure via “j-hooks” or an approved Category 6 suspension system, and not directly in contact with ceiling system.
6.1.7 Category-6 Labeling Requirements;
Vista USD Standards VOICE – DATA /INFRASTRUCTURE #17031 – July 7, 2017 27 10 00 - 18
6.1.7.1 Each cable run shall be permanently labeled, at each end of the run, with a unique sequential number which corresponds to a similar number provided for each data outlet and patch panel port or termination block. A printed label shall be placed at each of the following locations;
6.1.7.1.1 On the cable at the rear of the patch panel or termination block. Requires the use of a self-laminating wrap around label. Self-laminating label 1.2" by 1.5" wrap around by Brady label Part #29689 (NO ACCEPTABLE EQUAL).
6.1.7.1.2 On each cable in the j-box behind the faceplate location. Requires the use of a self-laminating wrap around label. Self-laminating label 1.2" by 1.5" wrap around by Brady label Part #29689 (NO ACCEPTABLE EQUAL).
6.1.7.2 All faceplates shall be identified with permanent printed labels. Labels must be placed on the face of the faceplate, in the label holder window, label shall follow the format on the cable.
6.1.8 General Labeling Requirements;
6.1.8.1 All Copper patch panels shall be labeled with a 3/4" by 3/4" label, with a letter or number identifying the patch panel designation, adhered to the Left side of the patch panel.
6.1.8.2 Each patch panel port shall be identified with a unique sequential labeling scheme matching the labeling on the UTP cables. Port identification labeling pattern shall be consistent throughout a particular project and throughout the District.
6.1.8.3 Hand written labels are not permitted for any labeling application. Hand written labels used during installation process must be removed prior to the conclusion of the project.
6.1.8.4 All fiber optic and UTP feed cables shall be identified with a permanent, water resistant, printed labels.
6.1.8.5 Cables shall be labeled in the IDF/MDF Rooms and Cabinets at the site conduit entrance point into the room, Riser conduit entrance point and prior to entering either copper punch blocks or fiber optic patch panels. Labels for fiber and copper feeds shall include both the name of the origination point and the destination point, house pair (UTP) or house fiber strand count, cable composition (ie:12-Strand MM 50/125, OM4, LO).
6.1.8.6 All fiber optic service loops to be labeled with the same tag and information required at the entrance point to the fiber optic patch panel.
6.1.8.7 All fiber optic cables and/or innerduct shall be tagged with waterproof fiber optic label tags in every manhole or pullbox indicating the same information shown in the MDF/IDF locations. A minimum of (3) fiber optic tags are required from the conduit entrance point to the equipment rack, within a closet or cabinet.
Vista USD Standards VOICE – DATA /INFRASTRUCTURE #17031 – July 7, 2017 27 10 00 - 19
6.1.8.8 Fiber warning tags shall be placed on all fiber optic cable and/or innerduct routed through open ceiling environments at increments no less than 15 feet apart.
6.1.8.9 All labeling formats shall follow the District Labeling Standards. Labeling will follow recommended EIA/TIA standards as well as District labeling Standards. All labeling tags shall be placed on the cables in clear view and may not be in the middle of a cable bundle or within a termination cabinet.
6.2 Fiber-Optic Installation Practices
6.2.1 Fiber optic cables entering MDF/IDF Rooms or Cabinet locations must be provided with a 20-foot service loop stored on the backboard. The service loop must be provided with a 24” Diameter service loop manager attached to the backboard as manufactured by Leviton Part# 48900-FR or equal. Service loops containing multiple feed cables must have each feed cable individually labeled. All labels must be individually visible.
6.2.2 All fiber optic feed cables shall be provided with a service loop within the handhole or pull box, a full 360-degree loop of cable, completely around the interior perimeter of the handhole or pullbox.
6.2.3 Fiber optic cable installed in the ceiling of an interior space must be provided with riser or plenum rated innerduct, based on ceiling rating, beyond 50-feet into the building.
6.3 General Installation Practices
6.3.1 Pull strings must be installed with all cable runs including but not limited to; conduit stub ups, conduit sleeves, cable trays, open wiring routes, innerduct, and point-to-point conduits. Pull strings shall not be substituted for pull ropes in site conduits.
6.3.2 All site conduits for low voltage systems must be provided with a minimum ¼” polypropylene pull rope (Minimum 1130 LB. breaking strength) for future use, including empty conduits and conduits being modified with new cable pulled in by a low voltage contractor. Pull strings (3/16” or smaller) and true tape will not be considered equal by the District. Pull rope as manufactured by Greenlee Part#414 or equal.
6.3.2.1 Empty conduits shall be provided with conduit plugs with rope tie points on the plug to attach the rope to, as manufactured by Thomas & Betts or Carlon. Size of plug to fit conduit.
6.3.3 Protective plastic bushings or conduit connectors and bushings shall be provided at the ends of all exposed conduits used for the network infrastructure system cabling.
6.3.4 The minimum bending radius for any cable shall not be exceeded and the maximum pulling tension shall not exceed manufacturer's recommendations.
6.4 Penetrations through exterior walls must be made from the pull boxes, not directly with conduit. Roof penetrations will not be allowed without written approval from the District. All holes from penetrations must be sealed to conform with the existing building wall
Vista USD Standards VOICE – DATA /INFRASTRUCTURE #17031 – July 7, 2017 27 10 00 - 20
construction (i.e. stucco, wood, etc.). All sealants must be permanent and color matched or clear.
6.5 All new conduit installed on the outside of buildings shall be IMC or Rigid and must be painted to match the existing building surfaces. Additionally, all exterior conduits shall be braced vertically oriented. There shall be no horizontal runs of conduit along exterior walls and no conduit runs on roof tops, unless approved by District prior to installation. All pull boxes and conduit braces should be anchored with the proper size lag bolts to anchor systems into the wall studs or concrete block. The anchoring system of all wall- mounted equipment should comply with manufacturer specification, and conform to applicable National, State and local codes.
6.6 Cables installed in manholes and pullboxes must be installed on wall mounted cable support racks. Attach cables to racks with outdoor-rated, UV resistant cable ties. Cable ties may not be cinched down tight on cable jacket.
6.7 Feed cables must be pulled using a split mesh grip over the cable jacket. Connection directly to optical fibers and copper wire conductors is not allowed.
6.8 For each cable pull where a cable direction change is required, flexible feed-in tubes, pullout devices, multi-segmented sheaves, etc., shall be used to ensure proper cable pulling tensions and side wall pressures. Cables shall not be pulled directly around a short right-angle bend. Do not use devices with multi-segment "roller" type sheaves.
6.9 All cable provided for any District project must be new and delivered to the project site in the original packaging.
6.10 Where cables are not installed in a conduit or other raceway system, they shall not be routed parallel with other line voltage equipment or wiring (120 volt and above) within 36" or within 12" of line voltage equipment or wiring where crossing. Where OSP-Rated Category-6 cables or Indoor/Outdoor Riser-Rated fiber optic feed cables are routed exposed through ceilings for more than 50'-0", install in innerduct or EMT conduit system.
6.11 The Contractor shall bear the costs of all shipping to a project site and of all unusual storage requirements, make appropriate arrangements, and coordinate with authorized personnel at the site, for the proper acceptance, handling, protection, and storage of equipment and materials so delivered.
6.12 Firestopping; Where conduits or cable sleeves pass through a fire-resistant portion of a structure, intumescent firestopping caulk or putty must be provided to maintain the rating of the wall, floor or barrier being penetrated. Sealing of all penetrations with an approved fire barrier is required, both around the conduit or sleeve and within the sleeve. Conduits and sleeves must remain accessible for future use. Permanent sealants may not be used to seal sleeves and conduits.
6.12.1 The fire-stopping materials used such as intumescent caulk or putty, fire resistant mineral wool, mortar (for concrete or cement), self-sealing penetrations and endothermic materials, are required. A complete firestopping submittal will be due prior to the start of any network infrastructure project detailing the types of penetrations, types of barriers and types of firestopping materials to be used to protect the District School or Facility. Submittal shall include the name of the Site, Building Name or Number, Room Number, type of penetration to be installed and material to be used for the application.
Vista USD Standards VOICE – DATA /INFRASTRUCTURE #17031 – July 7, 2017 27 10 00 - 21
6.12.2 Standard non-intumescent expanding foam (such as “Great Stuff” expanding foam in a can) is not an acceptable sealant for any conduit or sleeve penetration or as a substitute for any fire protection material. Intumescent, re-enterable, quick curing firestopping expanding foam, as manufactured by 3M Part #FIP 1-Step or equal, is an acceptable alternate.
PART 7 - TESTING
7.1 All Category-6 cables shall be point to point (link) tested after installation/termination, and verified to operate at minimum 1000Mbps. Performance of installed cables shall satisfy all currently approved standards and approved addendums to the EIA/TIA 568B and ISO/IEC standards for Category-6 wiring.
7.2 Upon completion of testing of all copper and fiber optic network infrastructure cabling, the installing. Contractor must furnish a copy of the original database files, downloaded from the original tester, in the original format on a USB flash drive. The installing Contractor must provide the original database files with an original copy of the cable tester’s manufacturer management software program for record management and archiving, in Windows format. The Contractor must provide the District (3) copies of the test results.
7.3 The Contractor will repair or replace any network infrastructure cable runs or connecting hardware that do not pass testing criteria.
7.4 Multimode fiber optic cables shall be tested bi-directionally at 850nm and 1300nm. All fiber strands shall be tested with an OTDR (Optical Time Domain Reflectometer) or an OTDR software application on a PC. All fiber test results must contain source and destination information that matches IDF or MDF labeling requirements.
7.5 Test procedures shall comply with EIA/TIA 526-14 Method B. Test results shall meet the minimum following criteria:
7.5.1 Fiber optic test results shall not exceed 2db attenuation loss in addition to inherent loss published by manufacturer tested at minimum 200 Mhz for 850nm and 500 Mhz for 1300nm for the fiber optic cable.
7.5.2 Test all voice/data cables minimum Category-6 UTP cable to test results for “Channel Testing” requirements @ 250 Mhz per current EIA/TIA standards requirements.
7.6 End to end attenuation testing shall be performed with a temporary test jumper cable at each end of the installed fiber cable. The test jumper must be the same size and grade of fiber optic glass as the installed fiber optic backbone cable. The measured attenuation of the test jumpers, test connectors, and test interconnection sleeve between the two test jumpers shall be less than 1dB as calibrated at the time of the test at indicated wave lengths and frequencies.
7.7 Contractor must provide the District (3) copies of any project’s As-Built drawings at the completion of the project, in an AutoCAD drawing format version released within 3 years of the project completion date. As-built drawings must include a copy of all building floor plan drawings and the project site plans. The As-Built drawings must include all voice/data outlet locations, major cable routes with type of support installed (J-Hooks, cable tray, etc.), outlet and cable identification numbers, locations of all sleeves and riser penetrations, routes of voice/data feed cables with types and sizes of cables, conduit sizes and handhole sizes for all site cabling and locations of all IDF locations as well as the MDF Room location. As-Builts must also provide detailed rack elevations of the MDF
Vista USD Standards VOICE – DATA /INFRASTRUCTURE #17031 – July 7, 2017 27 10 00 - 22
Room and all IDF locations, showing all network electronics equipment, patch panels and connections.
7.8 As-Built drawings must also include locations of all low voltage Utility Service providers and incoming conduit sizes and routes, including but not limited to, Telephone Service provider, Data Services providers, etc.
7.9 As-Built drawings must be delivered to the District within six (6) weeks upon completion of a project. Documents and network media devices shall be delivered by the Contractor to the District at no cost to the District.
END OF SECTION
Vista USD Standards VOICE – DATA /INFRASTRUCTURE #17031 – July 7, 2017 27 10 00 - 23
Vista USD Standards VOICE – DATA /INFRASTRUCTURE #17031 – July 7, 2017 27 10 00 - 24
Vista USD Standards VOICE – DATA /INFRASTRUCTURE #17031 – July 7, 2017 27 10 00 - 25
Vista USD Standards VOICE – DATA /INFRASTRUCTURE #17031 – July 7, 2017 27 10 00 - 26
Vista USD Standards VOICE – DATA /INFRASTRUCTURE #17031 – July 7, 2017 27 10 00 - 27
Vista USD Standards VOICE – DATA /INFRASTRUCTURE #17031 – July 7, 2017 27 10 00 - 28
Vista USD Standards VOICE – DATA /INFRASTRUCTURE #17031 – July 7, 2017 27 10 00 - 29
Vista USD Standards VOICE – DATA /INFRASTRUCTURE #17031 – July 7, 2017 27 10 00 - 30
27 51 16
CLOCK SYSTEM
PART 1 – SPECIFICATION ENGINEERING AND DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
1.1 This document is for use as a guide specification only and is not to be used directly as a bid specification. The intent is to outline the District standards for electrical products and installation at Vista Unified School District. Any deviation from these standards must be approved by the District.
1.2 The Clock System provides time notification for the schools and support for the class pass bell system.
1.3 The Clock System design requirements shall be based on a wireless, FM-Based distribution system with clocks individually battery powered. The District Standard for wireless Clock Systems is as manufactured by Primex Wireless - XR Wireless Clock System.
1.4 Applicable National, State and Local Electrical and Building Codes shall be considered for design and followed for the installation of the clock system.
PART 2 – CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS
2.1 District requires the Clock System Contractor to be an Authorized Reseller, Distributor and Service provider of the clock system. All companies bidding, submitting proposals, or engaged in the installation of the clock system, must provide a Certificate of Authorization to facilitate the warranty with all responses to Requests for Proposals, Requests for Quotation, or any other pricing method. The authorization must be in force a minimum of one (1) year prior to the bidding of any work. No Warranty Certifications provided to the Contractor for a single project shall be accepted as equal. The Contractor shall provide a list of references, for a minimum of five (5) projects, of work for VUSD or other school districts encompassing a similar scope in which the Clock system was approved for the manufacturer factory warranty.
2.2 The Contractor shall be a California licensed C7 or C10 Low Voltage Systems Contractor with the approved system certifications. Firms and their personnel must be regularly engaged in the installation of wireless clock systems and equipment.
2.3 All work shall be performed under the supervision of a company accredited and trained by the manufacturer.
PART 3 – SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
3.1 System Operational Description: all hardware, components and installation services shall be in compliance with the manufacturer’s operational requirements.
3.1.1 All components, parts, transmitters, clocks, antennas and GPS devices must be installed by “Primex Certified Installer”. Contractor may only install or mix in components from other approved Primex product partners to be considered part of the “Certified” installation.
Vista USD Standards CLOCK SYSTEM #17031 – July 7, 2017 27 51 16 - 1
3.1.2 System shall operate on a 72MHz frequency. The 72MHz frequency transmitter efficiently sends time synchronization signals through commercial building materials to ensure all devices receive important time updates, even for Daylight Saving Time and after a power outage.
3.1.3 The system supports an FCC license for operation of a 72MHz transmitter result in safe and interference free operation for users.
3.1.4 System shall provide wireless time from a master time source. The time source will either be the atomic clock on the GPS system or the clock from a defined NTP server that the system transmitter can access via the customer Local Area Network (LAN). The master time will be synchronized to UTC.
3.1.5 Analog Clocks shall be synchronized to within 10 milliseconds 6 times per day when operating clock strikes 2:01 AM, 6:01 AM, 10:01 AM, 2:01 PM, 6:01 PM, and 10:01 PM, and the system shall have an internal oscillator that maintains plus or minus one second per day between synchronization, so that clock accuracy shall not exceed plus or minus 0.2 seconds.
3.1.6 System must operate in accordance with a “Radio Station Authorization”, Form FCC 601 – LM, granted by the Federal Communications Commission (FCC). This license will be issued to and held by the end user.
3.1.7 If transmitter stops transmitting valid time signals due to power failure, the clocks will continue to function as accurate quartz clocks until a valid time signal is decoded. If signal transmission is not restored after 48 hours, the second hand will “five-step” as a visual indicator that the signal has been lost. Should the clocks lose power and signal, the clocks will not function.
3.1.8 Manufacturer provides a one year warranty on GPS receiver, transmitter, and satellite transmitter. All other devices and components are provided by the manufacturer with a 1 year warranty.
3.1.9 Contractor shall provide a five-year extended warranty on the transmitter and clocks to the District.
PART 4 – APPROVED PRODUCTS
4.1 Products specified in this section outline the District approved materials and methods for installation of the wireless Clock system components.
4.2 Transmitters: The following is a list of each type of District transmitters for the School Campus and Facilities locations;
4.2.1 Each School shall be provided with a 5-Watt Transmitter at the MDF Room location. The transmitter will cover the entire school campus area.
4.2.2 Provide a 5-watt Transmitter in the MDF Room as manufactured by Primex Wireless Model #XR05EM with an external roof mounted antenna and a GPS Receiver.
4.2.3 GPS Time Source: With the transmitter in GPS mode, it powers to a connected GPS engine mounted with a clear view of the sky. Upon power, the GPS module seeks the GPS satellites in orbit to determine position and UTC time. Once the transmitter acknowledges receivable GPS data, it downloads time data and
Vista USD Standards CLOCK SYSTEM #17031 – July 7, 2017 27 51 16 - 2
synchronizes its internal master clock to GPS time. The transmitter then starts to transmit its internal time once every second. The transmitter updates its internal clock every time it receives valid time data from the GPS.
4.2.4 External Antenna: The antenna connects to the transmitter via a 50-ohm coaxial cable on the roof. External Antenna must be installed by a certified Primex Wireless installer.
4.2.4.1 Cabling: The maximum antenna cable length shall be 100 feet (30.48m) between transmitter and antenna.
4.2.4.2 External Antenna shall be as manufactured by Primex.
4.2.5 GPS Receiver: The GPS Receiver connects to the transmitter via a cable from the roof. The GPS Receiver shall be complete including a waterproof case, designed for roof or outdoor mounting. Provide mounting bracket for attachment to roof structure. GPS Receiver must be installed by a certified Primex Wireless installer.
4.2.5.1 Cabling: The maximum antenna cable length shall be 100 feet (30.48m) between GPS Receiver and transmitter. The GPS Receiver shall meet the following specifications:
4.2.5.2 GPS Receiver shall be as manufactured by Primex.
4.3 Standard Clocks: Each location on the project drawings is to be provided with an analog, wall mounted clock. The Standard Clock for the Schools and District Facilities shall be provided with the following features and requirements:
4.3.1 Standard Analog clocks shall be wall mounted. Face shall be white and the Hour and minute hands shall be black.
4.3.2 Clock faces shall be provided with a customized logo for the School District by the Manufacturer. Artwork will be provided to the Contractor by the District. Contractor shall coordinate the artwork with the manufacturer to insure the clocks are properly manufactured.
4.3.3 Clock shall have a battery-power supply built into the clock assembly.
4.3.4 Battery-operated analog clocks shall have up to a 5-year battery life. Battery life is based on common operating conditions and may very due to installed site conditions. Installer will furnish clock batteries in accordance with Manufacturer instructions. Battery-operated analog clocks shall remember the time during changing of batteries.
4.3.5 Analog clock receivers shall be as follows: Receiver sensitivity: >-110 dBm, Receiver power: Dual Alkaline batteries or AC-powered, Antenna type: internal, Antenna gain: -7 dB.
4.3.6 Standard Clock shall be 12.5” Traditional Series Analog Clock, with a black outer casing. Clocks located in the Locker Rooms, Wrestling or any type Sports Activity Room shall be provided with wire guards.
Vista USD Standards CLOCK SYSTEM #17031 – July 7, 2017 27 51 16 - 3
4.3.7 Gym Clocks: Gymnasiums shall be provided with the 16” Traditional Series Analog Clock, with a black outer casing. The Gymnasium clocks shall be provided with wire guards.
PART 5 – INSTALLATION PRACTICES
5.1 Clocks shall be wall mounted using the manufacturer furnished mounting template. The clocks shall be mounted using the vandal-resistant mounting pattern.
5.2 Velcro Install GPS unit on roof in location indicated, in clear view of the sky. Install unit in location free from standing water and above accumulations of leaves or debris. Seal cable connection to GPS with cable connection sealant. Any added cable lengths must be protected from outside elements 12" apart.
5.3 Locate transmitter in a penthouse, electrical closet or telecommunications room in a central location in the building. Clearance around all side of the transmitter to comply with local building codes 6" apart.
5.4 Attach GPS receiver to transmitter using cable. Set GPS/LAN DIP switch to GPS.
5.5 Transmitter is connected to external antenna via a 50-ohm coaxial cable.
5.6 Cable routing should comply with ANSI EIA/TIA-569 and local building codes.
5.7 Provide conduit to roof from transmitter location, a minimum of 1-1/4-inch diameter.
5.8 Transmitter enclosure must be bonded to an earth ground per ANSI EIA/TIA 607, NEC Article 250, and local building codes.
5.9 Antenna should be mounted to a mast on the roof of the building connecting to the transmitter via a 50-ohm coaxial cable.
5.10 Consult manufacturer instruction manual for specific clearances and mounting instructions.
5.11 Antenna must be bonded to an earth ground per ANSI EIA/TIA 607, NEC Article 250, and local building codes.
5.12 Configure and set clock to correct time in accordance with manufacturer instructions.
5.13 Observe clock until valid signals are received and clock adjusts itself to correct time.
5.14 Install each clock per its model mounting specifications per manufacturer instructions and mounting instructions at the indicated location.
5.15 Secure to wire guards to wall, using approved theft-resistant fasteners
5.16 Prior to final acceptance, clean exposed surfaces of devices, using cleaning methods recommended by Manufacturer.
5.17 Remove temporary labels from clock faces. Do not remove labels from backs of clocks.
5.18 Provide training to Owner's representative on setting, adjusting and configuring device and routine maintenance.
Vista USD Standards CLOCK SYSTEM #17031 – July 7, 2017 27 51 16 - 4
5.19 Provide training to District representative on installing the software, adjusting and programming the transmitter, setting and adjusting system devices and routine maintenance.
5.20 All devices must be tested at their operational location under normal operational conditions to assure reception of signal.
END OF SECTION
Vista USD Standards CLOCK SYSTEM #17031 – July 7, 2017 27 51 16 - 5
SECTION 28 30 00
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 This document is for use as a guide specification only and is not to be used directly as a bid specification. The intent is to outline the District standards for electrical products and installation at Vista Unified School District. Any deviation from these standards must be approved by the District.
1.1 The equipment and installation shall comply with the current applicable provisions of the following standards:
NFPA 72-2016...... National Fire Alarm Code with California Amendments. CBC - 2016...... California Building Code (CBC), Part 2, Title 24, CCR. CEC - 2016...... California Electrical Code, (CEC), Part 3, Title 24, CCR. CFC - 2016...... California Fire Code (CFC), Part 9, Title 24, CCR.
1.2 The system and all components shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. for use in Fire Protective Signaling Systems under the following standards as applicable:
UL 38 ...... Manually Actuated Signaling Boxes. UL 50 ...... Cabinets and Boxes. UL 268 ...... Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. UL 268A ...... Smoke Detectors for Duct Applications UL 346 ...... Waterflow Indicators for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. UL 464 ...... Audible Signaling Appliances. UL 521...... Heat Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. UL 864 ...... Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. UL 1481...... Power supplies for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. UL 1971...... Visual Signaling Appliances.
1.3 Only Fire Alarm Control Panel Equipment and Peripheral Field Devices have been shown on the Contract Bid Single Line Block Diagram. Specific and complete wiring between Control Equipment and Peripheral Equipment has been deleted for clarity.
1.4 Submittal shall be made in accordance with Division 26 01 00 – Shop Drawings and Submittals. This submittal shall include the following:
1.4.1 Complete bills of quantities, including all materials, components, devices, wiring and equipment required for this work. The bills of quantities shall be tabulated respective of each and every system as specified, and shall contain the following information for each item listed:
1.4.1.1 Quantity of each type of equipment item. 1.4.1.2 Quantities of 10% spare devices as per 1.16. 1.4.1.3 Description of each item. 1.4.1.4 Manufacturer's Name and Model Number. 1.4.1.5 Manufacturer's Specification Sheet. 1.4.1.6 Back box type and dimensions per device type. 1.4.1.7 California State Fire Marshall Listing Sheets for all components. 1.4.1.8 Equipment items which have individual components, will require that all component parts be listed individually.
Vista USD Standards FIRE ALARM SYSTEM #17031 – July 7, 2017 28 30 00–1 1.4.1.9 Letter indicating the contractor’s intent to comply with Phase II submittal drawings.
1.5 Phase II Submittal shall be provided within (20) working days after the approval of the Phase I submittals and prior to any fabrication or field conduit installations. All shop drawings shall be engineered and drawn on a CAD System. Each submission shall include 'D' or ’E’ size print copies to match the contract drawings, and one (1) data disk copy with files in an AutoCAD 2000i or 2004 format.
1.5.1 Provide complete shop drawings to include the following:
1.5.1.1 Complete floor plans, at scale of contract documents, showing the locations throughout the project of all devices, panels conduits, wireways, tray, pullboxes, junction boxes, number and type of conductors, and other devices.
1.5.1.2 Point to point wiring diagrams showing wiring from panel terminals to each device.
1.5.1.3 Riser diagram indicating all wiring and circuits.
1.5.1.4 Current State Fire Marshal listing sheets for all components and devices.
1.5.1.5 Provide battery power supply calculations, indicate point of power supply connection, means of disconnect, over-current protection, etc. for each panel.
1.5.1.6 Provide detailed information on conductors to be used-manufacturer, type, size, insulation, etc.
1.5.1.7 Provide voltage drop calculations for all conductor run is from each panel (i.e., main FACP, remotes, power extenders, etc.) for each panel.
1.5.1.8 Provide written sequence of system operation matrix.
1.5.1.9 Provide list of zones. (Every device that is addressable.)
1.5.1.10 Provide detailed drawing for annunciator panel indicating all zones and initiating devices.
1.6 All equipment and material shall be new and unused, and listed by Underwriter's Laboratories for the specific intended purpose. All control panel components and field peripherals shall be designed for continuous duty without degradation of function or performance. All equipment covered by this specification or noted on Installation. Drawings shall be equipment suited for the application and shall be provided by a single manufacturer or be recognized and UL listed as compatible by both manufacturers.
1.7 Basic System Functional Operation, upon operation of any automatic, manual or other initiation device the following shall occur:
1.7.1 The system alarm LED shall flash.
1.7.2 A local piezo electric signal in the control panel shall sound.
Vista USD Standards FIRE ALARM SYSTEM #17031 – July 7, 2017 28 30 00–2 1.7.3 A backlit 80-character LCD display shall indicate all information associated with the fire alarm condition, including the alarm point and its location within the protected premises.
1.7.4 History storage equipment shall log the information associated with each new fire alarm control panel condition, along with time and date of occurrence.
1.7.5 All system output programs assigned via control by event equations to be activated by the particular point in alarm shall be executed, and the associated system outputs (alarm notification appliances and/or relays) shall be activated.
1.7.6 LED display and audible signaling at the remote annunciator indicating building, fire zone, and type of device.
1.7.7 Automatic retransmission to a UL central station for fire department notification.
1.7.8 Automatic shutdown of air conditioning units shall be performed by control modules at each unit when required as part of a complete area coverage design scheme. Each building shall shut down all A/C units and dampers within that building as one zone.
1.8 All equipment and components shall be new, and the manufacturer's current model. The materials, appliances, equipment and devices shall be tested and listed by a nationally recognized approval agency for use as part of a protective signaling system.
1.9 All equipment and components shall be installed in strict compliance with manufacturer's recommendations. Consult the manufacturer's installation manuals for all wiring diagrams, schematics, physical equipment sizes, etc., before beginning system installation.
1.10 All wiring shall be installed in a conduit system.
1.11 The contractor shall provide as a part of this contract additional control modules, heat detectors, smoke detectors, duct detectors, manual pull stations, strobes, speakers, speaker/strobes exterior speakers devices etc. along with all required programming, to equal 10% of the total quantity of devices shown on the drawings, or a minimum of three (3) for each type, whichever is greater. Installation of 50’ of conduit, boxes and all wiring for each of the devices shall be included, and required locations coordinated with CSFM final approved shop drawings. Any devices not required to be included during construction shall be delivered to the District at the completion of the project. The quantities of these devices shall be listed as a part of the Phase I submittals.
1.12 The installing contractor shall provide a copy of current documentation, indicating that the contractor installing the fire alarm systems or devices and wiring, is certified by Underwriters Laboratories (UL) in its product directories under the listing category "PROTECTIVE SIGNALING SERVICES - LOCAL, AUXILIARY, REMOTE STATION, AND PROPRIETARY.” The contractor shall be certified by the manufacturer to install and program the system. The contractor must also provide complete installation of all wiring and equipment, and software programming. Supervised installation of the wiring, devices and/or any software programming shall not be permitted.
1.12.1 The installing contractor must also be an “authorized dealer” by the equipment manufacturer, and must have completed all required training prior to the bid of this project.
Vista USD Standards FIRE ALARM SYSTEM #17031 – July 7, 2017 28 30 00–3 1.12.2 The fire alarm system installation shall be warranted by the manufacturer’s representative.
1.12.3 The Contractor shall have a current California C-10 or C-7 Contractor’s License, and all individuals working on this project shall have passed the Department of Industrial Relations Division of Apprenticeship Standards – “Fire / Life Safety Certification Program.”
1.12.4 The installing contractor shall provide, at the time of submittal, a letter of intent to provide an extended service warranty. This warranty shall extend for a total of three (3) years, starting at the completion, testing, and training of this project. The service warranty shall cover all material and labor to keep operational all system devices installed under this project, and shall include two (2) complete U.L. system’s tests and cleaning of all devices at year two (2) and year three (3) of the warranty. Routine cleaning of devices, other than at the two (2) specified U.L. system’s testing periods, will not be included as a part of this warranty.
1.12.5 The installing contractor shall provide, at the time of submittal, a letter indicating that the installation crew for this project meets the following NICET certifications:
1.12.5.1 25% of the installing field personnel must have completed NICET Level 2 Certification.
1.12.5.2 One of the installing field personnel and /or supervisor must have completed NICET Level 3 Certification.
1.12.5.3 Contractor shop drawings shall be signed by an individual who has completed NICET Level 4 Certification.
1.13 All conduit and standard backboxes will be furnished and installed by the Division 26 Contractor. Specialty boxes will be furnished by the equipment supplier to be installed by the Division 26 Contractor.
1.14 Equipment and materials shall be the standard product of FCI.
1.15 Alternate equipment as manufactured by any other manufacturer not specifically listed above will not be approved for use on this project.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 Main Fire Alarm Control Panel:
2.1.1 Fire alarm control panel shall be FCI E3 and provide Voice Evacuation.
2.1.2 The system shall be controlled and supervised by a microprocessor based monitoring fire alarm control panel. The systems shall be addressable, field configurable, programmable and editable. The system shall continuously scan devices for change of status. Each device shall have its own unique address, but shall also be grouped by building as a separate zone for remote annunciation and alarm report purposes.
2.1.3 The fire alarm control panel shall be housed in a lockable, code gauge steel cabinet with 80character LCD display, master controller operators panel, indicating lamps, silence switch and reset switch mounted on cabinet front. The fire alarm control panel shall be physically and visually located in the general
Vista USD Standards FIRE ALARM SYSTEM #17031 – July 7, 2017 28 30 00–4 office for monitoring by staff, and shall sound the “Voice Message” in all zones. Signal duration shall be field programmable and initially set at three minutes. Provide all control modules, synchronous modules, etc., to provide a complete working system per all codes that apply.
2.1.4 The fire alarm control panel shall come with standardized software for on-site customization of the system. The unit shall be capable of providing a 600-event historical log with zone or point selectable alarm verification.
2.1.5 Provide a minimum 100 watts of amplification in each FACP with a minimum of 25% spare capacity.
2.1.6 The unit shall support a minimum of 3000 intelligent addressable points and one output point, SPST contact per zone. Provide the number of modules necessary to control and supervise fire alarm devices as shown on the Drawings, as well as to provide 25% spare capacity.
2.1.7 The unit shall also provide a minimum of (2) class B strobe circuits with additional circuits as indicated on the drawings.
2.1.8 The fire alarm control panel shall be capable of providing a walk test.
2.2 The power feed for the FACP shall be 3-wire, 120volt, AC, single phase (20A circuit) permanently labeled “FIRE ALARM CONTROL POWER”, terminating at the master fire alarm control and supervisory panel. The label shall be red with 1/4” high white lettering. The source circuit breaker must be provided with a lock-on device.
2.3 In addition to the AC circuit, the panel shall be equipped with a DC battery to activate an audible alarm and pilot light in case of a power failure on the AC circuit.
2.4 The master fire alarm panel shall be equipped with a manual pull lever type, supervised report station located in the office area. Exact location to be determined at time of construction.
2.5 Provide document storage box at both main fire alarm panels. Provide a complete set of ASBUILT drawings at each location.
2.6 With the exception of the manually operated report station required at the master fire alarm panel and large assembly areas, the remainder of the school facility shall be equipped with approved, electronically supervised, automatic fire detection devices, such that every room, space, including concealed spaces, such as the attic spaces above ceilings, etc., is provided with approved coverage.
2.7 REMOTE POWER SUPPLIES shall provide a minimum of (4) Class B NAC circuits.
2.8 MANUAL FIRE ALARM STATIONS shall be addressable test-reset lock in order that they may be tested, and so designed that after actual emergency operation, they cannot be restored to normal, except by use of a key. Manual pull stations must comply with CBC sections 11B-309 and 11B-403.
2.9 SPEAKER / STROBE DEVICE shall be of the semi-flush type designed for mounting to a standard 4 11/16” deep electrical back box. Each device shall be provided with a semi- flush accessory plate. Exterior speakers shall be weatherproof.
Vista USD Standards FIRE ALARM SYSTEM #17031 – July 7, 2017 28 30 00–5 2.10 SPEAKERS shall operate at 70 VRMS and provide tap setting from 1/8 to 2 watts and provide efficient design for high intelligibility at a minimum wattage across a frequency range of 300 to 8000 HZ and shall be white in color. Speakers shall be ADA, NFPA and ANSI compliant.
2.11 STROBES. The strobe unit shall have a meantime between failure (MTBF) of 1,000 hours or greater. The strobe section shall have a minimum flash rate of approximately one flash per second, with candela rating as per UL standard 1971. Housing shall be white.
2.12 HEAT DETECTOR DEVICES shall be analog addressable, fixed temperature x rate of rise, fixed at 200ΕF and a 15ΕF/min rate of rise. In janitor rooms equipped with kilns, devices shall be fixed at 200ΕF.
2.13 SMOKE DETECTOR DEVICES shall be analog addressable, photo-electric.
2.14 DUCT TYPE DETECTORS shall be analog addressable, photo-electric type, provide with remote test switch and auxiliary contacts as required for control of A/C units or smoke dampers.
2.15 DIGITAL ALARM COMMUNICATOR TRANSMITTER. The control panel shall meet the requirements of UL 864 for central station connections, and shall be UL listed for use with the fire alarm control panel. The communicator shall be connected to supervise two telephone lines, all wiring required for this connection shall be provided by the fire alarm contractor Coordinate interface with District monitoring company as required.
2.16 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR shall be an 80 character backlit, alphanumeric, LCD readout display. The display shall include alarm, supervisory, and trouble condition LEDs and tone alert. Each condition shall have a dedicated acknowledge push button switch to silence the local tone alert but leaves the LED lights on until all conditions have been restored. This annunciator shall be capable of display and support of both main panels.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 All wiring shall be (min) #18 AWG copper or as noted on drawings. All underground conductors shall be UL wet location rated for use in wet locations, West Penn “Aquaseal” or equal. There shall be no splices in underground handholes or vaults. A multi- conductor cable rated for use in wet locations will also be acceptable. It must be labeled “FIRE ALARM” in all pull boxes, using a water-tight labeling system.
3.2 Interior, dry location wiring for low voltage initiating circuits shall be #18 AWG copper, twisted shielded pair minimum, signaling circuits shall be No. 14 AWG minimum, and wiring for 120 volt circuits shall be No. 12 AWG minimum. All wiring shall be color coded, solid copper conductor. Use of power limited cable shall be restricted to controls listed for this purpose. Single conductors shall be type THHN/THWN-2 insulated copper.
3.3 Wire markers shall be provided for each wire connected to equipment. The marker shall be of the taped bank type, of permanent material, and shall be suitable and permanently stamped with the proper identification. The markers shall be attached in a manner that will not permit accidental detachment. Changing of wire colors within circuits shall be unacceptable.
3.4 A terminal cabinet shall be installed in the electric room for the fire alarm systems at each building. All fire alarm wiring shall terminate on UL approved strips in this terminal
Vista USD Standards FIRE ALARM SYSTEM #17031 – July 7, 2017 28 30 00–6 cabinet. All wiring shall be labeled at each termination strip. Wiring shall be configured such that all end-of-line resistors will be installed at the terminal cabinet.
3.5 Fire Sprinkler Activation detecting System(s) shall each be indicated on a separate zone in the fire alarm control panel.
3.6 Fire Alarm Control Panel and all other equipment shall be mounted with the center of all operable reset buttons, located a maximum of 48" front approach / 54" side approach above floor level.
3.7 Contractor shall provide complete wiring between all equipment.
3.8 The Fire Alarm/Life Safety Installation shall comply fully with all Local, State and National Codes, and the Local Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) DSA.
3.9 The Fire Alarm Control Panel and power supply shall be connected to a separate dedicated branch circuit, maximum 20 amperes. This circuit shall be labeled at the Panelboard as FIRE ALARM CIRCUIT.
3.10 The Control Panel Cabinet shall be grounded securely to a power system ground conductor. Provide a 1/2-inch conduit and 1#12 grounding conductor to the building electrical service ground bus.
3.11 Conduit shall enter into the Fire Alarm Control Panel back box only at those areas of the back box which have factory conduit knockouts.
3.12 All field wiring shall be completely supervised. In the event of a primary power failure, disconnected standby battery, removal of any internal modules, or any open circuits in the field wiring; an audible and visual trouble signal will be activated until the system and its associated field wiring are restored to normal condition.
3.13 All cables and wiring shall be listed for Fire Alarm/Life Safety use, and shall be of the type as required by and installed per CEC Article 760.
3.14 Final System Acceptance
3.14.1 Provide an NFPA Certificate of Compliance to DSA and the engineer of record. Complete fire alarm system shall comply with Chapter 14 of NFPA for testing and inspection and be sound-tested for audibility in all spaces requiring voice evacuation. This testing shall be performed in the presents of the project electrical engineer. Adjust speaker taps or provide additional speakers as required to provide correct audibility.
3.14.2 Beam detectors shall be tested by two methods:
3.14.2.1 Manual slow cover test to confirm reflector alignment is correct.
3.14.2.2 Software fire test per UL268.5 to demonstrate when signal level is reduced simulating obstruction the detector will go into alarm.
3.14.3 The system will be accepted only after a satisfactory test of the entire system has been accomplished by a Factory-Trained Distributor in the presence of a representative of the authority having jurisdiction and the Owner's representative. This contractor shall provide all personnel, ladders and testing equipment to
Vista USD Standards FIRE ALARM SYSTEM #17031 – July 7, 2017 28 30 00–7 assist the local authority in completing this test. Actuate each device and verify that the system performs as specified.
3.14.4 The Contractor will present a complete set of "as-built" Fire Alarm/Life Safety system drawings, and the factory supplied Operator's Manuals as required by the General Provisions section of this specification.
END OF SECTION
Vista USD Standards FIRE ALARM SYSTEM #17031 – July 7, 2017 28 30 00–8 SECTION 32 1216 ASPHALT PAVING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Aggregate base course. B. Single course bituminous concrete paving. C. Surface sealer. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Asphalt Cement: ASTM D946. B. Aggregate for Base Course: uniformly graded in accordance with Section 203, SSPWC.. C. Crushed Aggregate Base: Crushed rock and rock dust conforming to the requirements of Section 200, SSPWC, with 3/8 inch sieve requirement waived, or Class II aggregate base as defined In Section 26, CSS. 2.02 ASPHALT PAVING MIXES AND MIX DESIGN A. Use dry material to avoid foaming. Mix uniformly. B. Mix: Caltrans Standard Section 39, 3/8 inch or ½ Inch maximum aggregate size, medium gradation curve, AR-4000 or AR-8000 as required by outside temperatures at time of laying. C. Reclaimed Asphalt Pavement (RAP) not permitted. 2.03 SUB-BASE A. Bring areas to be surfaced to required sub-grades by cutting and filling with. suitable equipment. B. Bring to optimum moisture content and compact to minimum 95 percent density in accordance with ASTM D1557 by rolling with a power roller. Provide a hard, even surface to receive subsequent base and paving. All exposed sub-grades shall be compacted by rolling or tamping to a minimum of 95 percent of maximum density. C. Finish sub-grade to required grades with allowance for compression and for thickness of base course and finish paving thickness. 2.04 SOIL STERILIZATION A. After sub-base has been compacted and approved by the Geotechnical Engineer, treat areas to be paved with the specified soil sterilizer. B. Exercise caution during storage of material and during application. Prevent injury to humans, animal life, adjacent plant life and property. Keep soH sterilization materials minimum three feet from tree wells or any plant life. C. Legally dispose containers. 2.05 BASE COURSE A. Place and compact aggregate base upon finished sub-grade in conformance with Section 301-2 SSPWC. B. Thickness of Base after Compaction: As indicted on Drawings but not less than 4 inches. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION - PRIMER AND TACK COAT A. Apply primer coat or base course surfaces in conformance with Section 302-5.3, SSPWC, at rate of .10 to .25 gallons per sq. yd. Allow to cure prior to application of asphalt course. B. Apply tack coat to contact surfaces of curbs, gutters and adjacent materials except where expansion joints occur, in conformance with Sect!on 302-5.4, SSPWC.
Vista USD Standards and 32 1216 - 1 ASPHALT PAVING Specifications C. Coat surfaces of catch basin frames with oil to prevent bond with asphalt pavement. Do not tack coat these surfaces. 3.02 PLACING ASPHALT PAVEMENT - SINGLE COURSE A. Install redwood headers. B. Place asphalt In conformance with Section 302-5, SSPWC. Conform to temperature maximums and minimums specified therein. Materials shall not be applied which have cooled below the lower limit allowable. C. Place to thickness as Indicated on drawings but not less than 3 inches if not indicated. D. Install drainage grilles and frames In correct position and elevation. E. Compact pavement by rolling with equipment specified In Section 302-5.6, SSPWC. Do not displace or extrude pavement from position. F. Develop a uniform pattern of smooth continuous compaction. Compaction equipment shall not leave roller marks, rock pockets, ridges or depressions. 3.03 PLACING ASPHALT PAVEMENT - OVERLAY A. Follow guidelines set forth in Paragraph 3.02. B. Ensure Pavement Reinforcing Fabric is installed completely and properly on section to receive overfay asphalt. C. Place to thickness as indicated on drawings but not less than 1-1/2 inches if not indicated. 3.04 SEAL COAT A. Application: Apply Seal Coat to surface in accordance with Section 302??8.2, SSPWC. All asphalt pavements shall be sealed with two coats of specified seal coat product with surface preparation and application to conform to Plans and Specifications and Manufacturer's recommendations. B. Apply seal coat 30 days or more after surface course application, In accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations. C. Misting: Just prior to seal coating, the asphalt may need to be sprayed with a mist of water in an amount that will leave the surface damp but with no puddles or visible water. D. Weather limitations: The seal coat shall not be applied when the surface has puddles or visible water or when the humidity or impending weather conditions will not allow proper curing nor when the atmospheric or pavement temperature is below 50 degrees Fahrenheit (10 degrees Centigrade). E. Spreading Equipment: Rubber faced squeegee attached to tank or hand squeegee. F. Add water to specified seal coat material. When air temperatures of 90 degrees F or more are encountered during application, consult manufacturer for recommendations. G. Seal Coat product may be mixed with water to obtain desired consistency, 10% to MAXIMUM OF 20% water may be added. Note: as the pavement Increases In roughness, the amount of dilution shall be decreased. care must be taken not to over dilute. H. The Seal Coat product shall be mixed constantly by skid; trailer or truck mounted tank with agitation systems capable of thoroughly blending material. I. If pavement surface exhibits imperfections as determined by the District Representative, the addition of sand aggregate to seal coat, and amounts thereof, shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. J. Curing: The mixture shall be permitted to dry for a minimum of 24 hours after the final application before opening to traffic and shall be sufficiently cured to drive over without damage to seal coat. END OF SECTION
Vista USD Standards and 32 1216 - 2 ASPHALT PAVING Specifications SECTION 32 1313 CONCRETE PAVING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Concrete walks. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FORM MATERIALS A. Wood form material, profiled to suit conditions. B. Joint Filler: Preformed; non-extruding bituminous type (ASTM D1751) or sponge rubber or cork (ASTM D1752). 1. Thickness: 1/2 inch (12 mm). 2.02 REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 80 (80,000 psi) (550 MPa) yield strength; deformed billet steel bars; unfinished. B. Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: Plain type, ASTM A1064/A1064M; in flat sheets; unfinished. C. Dowels: ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 40 - 40,000 psi (280 MPa) yield strength; deformed billet steel bars; unfinished finish. Dowel sizing shall be as indicated on drawings. 2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Obtain cementitious materials from same source throughout. B. Cement: ASTM C150/C150M, Normal - Type I Portland cement, gray color. C. Fine and Coarse Mix Aggregates: ASTM C33/C33M. D. Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Class C or F. E. Water: Clean, and not detrimental to concrete. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class A. B. Joint Sealer: Type as specified in Section 07900. 2.05 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN A. Proportioning Normal Weight Concrete: Comply with the 2010 Calififornia Building Code, Chapter 19A. B. Admixtures: Add acceptable admixtures as recommended in ACI 211.1 and at rates recommended by manufacturer. C. Concrete Properties: 1. Compressive strength, when tested in accordance with ASTM C39/C39M at 28 days; 3,250 psi (22.41 MPa). 2. Fly Ash Content: Maximum 15 percent of cementitious materials by weight. 3. Minimum cement content per cubic yard: 6.5 sacks. 4. Maximum water-cement ratio per 94-pound sack of cement (gallons): 6.75. 5. Water-Cement Ratio: Maximum 50 percent by weight. 6. Total Air Content: 4 percent, determined in accordance with ASTM C173/C173M. 7. Maximum Slump: 4 inches (100 mm) +/- 1" (+/- 25.4 mm). 8. Maximum Aggregate Size: 1 inch (25.4 mm). END OF SECTION
Vista USD Standards and 32 1313 - 1 CONCRETE PAVING Specifications SECTION 32 1726 TACTILE WARNING SURFACING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Plastic tactile and detectable warning tiles for pedestrian walking surfaces. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Plastic Tactile and Detectable Warning Surface Tiles: 1. Safety Step TD: www.safetysteptd.com. 2.02 TACTILE AND DETECTABLE WARNING DEVICES A. Plastic Tactile and Detectable Warning Tiles: ADA Standards compliant, pre-molded tactile dome sheet composed of fiber-reinforced, polymermodified cement and coated with an acrylic resin emulsion. Mats are 1 mm thick with truncated domes .9 inches in diameter by .2 inches high. B. Detectable warning surfaces shall comply with CBC Section 11B-705.1. C. Detectable warning surfaces shall be yellow, conforming to FS 33538 of Federal Standard 595B, except for locations at curb ramps, islands, or cut through medians where color used shall contrast visually with that of adjacent walking surfaces, either light-on-dark, or dark-on-light per CBC section 11B-705.1.1.3 and 11B-705.1.1.5. D. Detectable warning surfaces shall differ from adjoining surfaces in resiliency or sound-on-cane contact per CBC section 11B-705.1.1.4. E. Material Properties: 1. Water Absorption: 6.5% water ponding, when tested in accordance with ASTM D570. ASTM E96: 0.0102 grams/24 hours. 2. Slip Resistance: .80 minimum combined wet/dry static coefficient of friction, when tested in accordance with ASTM C1028. 3. Compressive Strength: [5,690 PSI] pounds per square inch ([39] MPa), minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM C109. 4. Tensile Strength: [855] pounds per square inch ([5.89] MPa), minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM C190. 5. Chemical Stain Resistance: No reaction to 1 percent hydrochloric acid, motor oil, calcium chloride, gum, soap solution, bleach, or antifreeze, when tested in accordance with ASTM D543. 6. Abrasion Resistance: less than 1.5% thickness loss when tested in accordance with ASTM D1242. 7. Flame Spread Index: 25, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 8. Adhesion: No delamination of tile prior to board failure in a temperature range of 20 to 180 degrees F (minus 7 to 82 degrees C), when tested in accordance with ASTM C903. 9. Loading: No damage when tested according to AASHTO LRFD test method HS20. 10. Salt and Spray Performance: No deterioration or other defect after 200 hours of exposure, when tested in accordance with ASTM B117. 11. Shape: As required by application. 12. Pattern: In-line pattern of truncated domes complying with ADA Standards. 13. Color: FED-STD-595C, Table IV, Federal Yellow No. 33538. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Bond Coat Adhesive: Water based acrylic emulsion resin adhesive. 1. SSTD-589 as manufactured by Safety Step TD. B. Top Coat: Water based pigmented acrylic. 1. SSTD-100 as manufactured by Safety Step TD.
Vista USD Standards and 32 1726 - 1 TACTILE WARNING Specifications SURFACING C. Clear Finish Sealer: Water based, clear, acrylic sealer. 1. SSTD-1250 as manufactured by Safety Step TD. D. Texture: Skid Resistant Silica END OF SECTION
Vista USD Standards and 32 1726 - 2 TACTILE WARNING Specifications SURFACING SECTION 32 3113 CHAIN LINK FENCING AND GATES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Types of Fence 1. Buried perimeter fencing shall be a fence with 8'-0" of chain link fabric, top, and bottom rails. The bottom rail and fabric shall be buried 6" below grade. 2. Standard fencing shall be a fence with 8'-0" of chain link fabric and top rails. If required the bottom rail shall be within two inches above the finish grade. 3. Standard fencing will be used as non-preimeter fences and for perimeter fences placed over concrete or asphalt paved surface. Exceptions to this rule shall be indicated on drawings. B. Relocation of Existing Fencing 1. Any existing fence to be removed and relocated shall be taken down, have concrete broken off posts, and be reinstalled in accordance with these specifications. The contractor is permitted to keep the removed posts and install new posts. Splicing posts by welding is not permitted. C. Underground Utilities 1. Identification and repair of any and all underground utilities (irrigation, power, water, and low voltage wiring) affected by work being done is the responsibility of the contractor. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Chain Link Fences and Gates: 1. Allied Tube and Conduit. 2. American Security Fence Corporation. 3. Anchor Fence Div. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Posts, Rails, and Frames: ASTM F 1083 Schedule 40 hot-dipped galvanized steel pipe, welded construction, minimum yield strength of 25 ksi. B. Wire Fabric: ASTM A 392 zinc coated steel chain link fabric. C. Concrete: ASTM C 94; Normal Portland Cement, 2,500 psi strength at 28 days, 3 inch slump; 3/4 to 1 inch nominal sized coarse aggregate. D. Fencing Materials: Posts, gate frames, braces, rails, stretcher bars, truss rods and tension wire shall be of galvanized steel. Gate hinges, post caps, stretcher bar bands, bolts, hardware, and other parts shall be of steel, malleable iron, ductile iron, except that post tops, rails ends, clips may be of aluminum. All fencing, pipe, fabric, and accessories shall conform to the specifications described in the “Product Manual” published by the Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute unless further restricted by this section. 2.03 COMPONENTS A. Line Posts: All line posts shall be nominal 2-3/8"inch, 2.375 inch O.D. galvanized tubing for fabric height up to 8 feet, and 2-7/8 inch O.D. for fabric height over 8 feet to 16 feet or less. B. Terminal Posts: Angels, corners, ends and pull posts shall be nominal 3-7/8 inch schedule 40 galvanized tubing for fabric height up to 8 feet, and, 4 inch O.D. for fabric height over 8 feet to 16 feet or less. 2.88 inch. C. Top and Brace Rail: All top rails shall be nominal 1-5/8 inch schedule 40 galvanized tubing. Top rails shall be provided with expansion coupling and shall be securely fastened to gate and terminal posts by means of suitable hot-dipped galvanized connections. Top rail shall pass through the extension arms to form a continuous brace from end to end of each stretch of fence.
Vista USD Standards and 32 3113 - 1 CHAIN LINK FENCING AND Specifications GATES D. Bottom Rail: All bottom rails shall be nominal 1-5/8 inch, 1.625 inch O.D schedule 40 galvanized tubing. Bottom rail shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's directions using couplings. E. Gates: Gate frames shall be nominal 1-5/8 inch, O.D. schedule 40 galvanized tubing welded at all joints to provide rigid water-tight construction. Gate fabric shall match the line fence fabric in all regards with the exception of the mesh size which shall be 1 inch on the gates. Gates shall be 8-feet high with heavy malleable iron extension arms as previously described. Swing gates shall be furnished with pivot-type hinges, center stop, and hold open devices. Gates shall provide clear openings as shown on the drawings. F. Gate Posts 1. Man Gate Posts: Posts shall be 4-5/8" OD schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe. 2. Drive Through Gate Posts: Posts shall be 6-5/8" OD schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe. 3. All gate posts shall be provided with heavy malleable iron extension arms as previosuly described. G. Fabric shall be ASTM A392, Class 1, zinc coated (1.2 oz.), steel wire/fabric, woven in a 2 inch mesh size, 9 gauge coated wire size, galvanized after weaving, with salvage knuckle end closed, bottom salvage knuckle end closed. H. Tension Wire: 9 gage thick steel, single strand. I. Tension Bar shall be 3/16” x 3/4 inch hot-dipped galvanized steel. J. Tie Wire: 9 gauge steel tie wire and hog rings zinc coated. K. Pipe: All posts, braces, rails and gate framing members shall be coated with zinc by the hot-dip process after fabrication. The strip steel used in the manufacturer of the pipe shall conform to either ASTM A-120 (Schedule 40) or ASTM A0569 (SS 40 by Allied Tube and Conduit Corporation or equal). Pipe conforming to ASTM A-120 shall receive not less than 1.8 ounces per square foot of zinc coating. Pipe conforming to ASTM A-569 shall be triple coated with a minimum of 0.9 ounces per square foot of zinc, 15 micrograms per square inch of chromate, and 0.3 mils of polyurethane finish. Pipe shall be straight or have an installed deflection not greater than ½” per span or post. L. Bracing: Rails shall be nominal 1-5/8 inch, 1.660 inch O.D. schedule 40 galvanized tubing with adjustable truss braces 3/8” in diameter and all fittings hot-dipped galvanized. All end and corner posts, unless otherwise shown, shall be suitably braced with pipe set in horizontal position, with adjustable truss braces between terminal and first line posts, complete with all fittings. Terminal posts shall be braced laterally in an approved manner. M. Barbed Wire Support Arms: All posts shall be provided with pressed copper-bearing galvanized steel extension arms. All end posts shall be provided with heavy malleable iron extension arms. All extension arms shall be heavily coated with zinc by the hot dip process. Each extension arm shall be sized to carry three strands of 12-1/2 gauge, 4 PT, Class III barbed wire at an angle of 45 degrees, the upper strand 12" out from the fence line and 12" above the top of the fabric. Arms shall be the type that allow top rail to pass through their bases to form a continuous brace. Barbed wire arms shall be of sufficient strength to withstand a weight fo 250 pounds applied at the outer or the top strand of barbed wire. N. Barbed Wire: Barbed wire shall be of the four-point pattern, composed of two strands of No. 12-1/2 gauge, copper bearing steal wire, Class III with large hard temper barbs spaced a maximum of 5 inches apart, and shall be heavily galvanized by the hot dip process. Each extension arm shall carry three strands of barbed wire at an angle of 45 degrees, the upper strand 12 inches out from the fence line and 12 inches above the top of the fabric. Install three strands on the extension arms at the top of the fence and over gate. The extension arms shall be installed so they are pointing to the exterior perimeter created by the fence. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Caps: Formed steel, malleable cast iron, or aluminum, sized to post diameter with set screw retainer.
Vista USD Standards and 32 3113 - 2 CHAIN LINK FENCING AND Specifications GATES B. Fittings: Sleeves, bands, clips, rail ends, tension bars, fasteners and fittings; steel. C. Gate Hardware at Maintennace Gate Only: Fork latch with gravity drop; two 180-degree gate hinges per leaf and hardware for padlock. D. Accessible Gate Hardware: Refer to drawings and details. 1. Gates equipped with panic hardware shall utilize the following hardwarwe: a. Von Duprin 99EO-626-299 w/ PA option. b. Von Dupring 994L-626 Trim w/ breakaway lever. c. Falcon Rim Cylinder 953-626. 2.05 FINISHES A. Components (Other than Fabric): Galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 123, at 1.8 oz/sq ft. B. Hardware: Galvanized to ASTM A 153/A 153M, 1.3 oz/sq ft coating. C. Accessories: Same finish as framing. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that line of fence has been properly identified. B. Verify that proper grade has been established. C. Verify location of underground utilities and structures. D. Begin fence construction only after adequate clearance on both sides of fence is available. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Concrete Placement: Posts and gat hold open devices shall be placed in concrete. Concrete shall meet the minimum requirements of Section 03 3000 Cast-In-Place Concrete. B. Post Setting and Spacing 1. All posts shall be spaced in the line of fence not to exceed 10-foot centers for a fence not exceeding 8 feet and 8-foot centers for a fence height greater than 8 feet not exceeding 16 feet. 2. All post shall be set in a concrete foundation to a depth of not less than 36 inches for a fence not exceeding 8 feet and a minimum of 60 inches for a fence height greater than 8 feet not exceeding 16 feet. 3. Set terminal posts (end, corner, and gate) at beginning and end of each continuous length of fence and at abrupt changes in vertical and horizontal alignments. C. Install framework, fabric, accessories and gates in accordance with ASTM F 567. The fence erection, including all connections, shall be made in accordance with manufacturer’s directions and the “Product Manual” published by the Chain Ling Manufacturers Institute. D. Place fabric on outside of posts and rails. Fabric shall be stretched out enough to resist a 6-inch deflection laterally, top or bottom, when force is exerted with the hand. Fabric shall be attached to and supported by terminal and gate posts by means of 3/16 x ¾ inch hot- dipped galvanized tension bars. 1. Fabric shall be fastened to line posts and to the top and bottom rails by means of tie wire spaced approximately two feet apart. There shall be two complete wraps made with the tie wire around the fabric on all perimeter security fence. 2. Posts bracing and other structural members of the fence shall be located on the inside of the security fence. 3. The fence and gate fabric for fences 16 feet in height shall be 2 pieces of 8 foot high 9 gauge material overlapped 4 inches and hog tied every 12 inches using 9 gauge galvanized steel wire per SNL Standard Drawing CJI005STD. E. Set intermediate posts plumb, in concrete footings with top of footing 2 inches above finish grade. Slope top of concrete for water runoff. F. Line Post Footing Depth Below Finish Grade: ASTM F 567.
Vista USD Standards and 32 3113 - 3 CHAIN LINK FENCING AND Specifications GATES 1. For fence less than 5'-0" in height footing shall be 32" dep, for fences between 5'-0" and 8'-0" footings shall be 36" deep. 2. Diameter - 9" minimum. G. Corner, Gate and Terminal Post Footing Depth below Finish Grade: ASTM F 567. All posts shall be spaced in the line of the fence not to exceed 10-foot centers for a fence height not exceeding 8 feet. Gate post footings shall be a minimum of 12" in diameter and a minimum of 36" deep. Terminal and corner post footings shall be a minimum of 4 times the O.D. of the post diameter and 32" in depth for gates under 5'-0" and 36" deep for fences over 5'-0", but under 8'-0". H. Brace each gate and corner post to adjacent line post with horizontal center brace rail and diagonal truss rods. Install brace rail one bay from end and gateposts. All ends of corner posts, unless otherwise shown, shall be suitably braced with pipe set in horizontal position, with adjustable truss braces between terminal and first line of posts, complete with all fittings. I. Provide top rail through line post tops and splice with 6-inch long rail sleeves. Top rail shall pass through the extension arms to form a continuous brace from end to end of each stretch of fence. J. Install center brace rail on corner gate leaves. K. Do not stretch fabric until concrete foundation has cured 48 hours. L. Stretch fabric between terminal posts or at intervals of 100 feet maximum, whichever is less. M. Position bottom of fabric 2 inches above finished grade. N. Fasten fabric to top rail, line posts, braces, and bottom tension wire with tie wire or hog rings at maximum 15 inches on centers. O. Attach fabric to end, corner, and gateposts with tension bars and tension bar clips. P. Do not attach the hinged side of gate to building wall: provide gate posts. Q. Install gate with fabric to match fence. Install two hinges per leaf up to 4 feet, and 3 hinges per leaf anything over 4 feet,with latch, catches, and drop bolt. R. All bolts shall be cut flush on the face of the nut, and shall have a smooth surface. S. All screw, nuts, bolts, bars, wire mesh, hinges and hinge pins shall be securely fastened inward to preclude surreptitious removal and assure visual evidence of tampering. All bolts protruding into areas of travel or that will pose a threat of injury will be cut so as only 2 or less threads are exposed beyond the nut. T. Hardware accessible from outside the area shall be restrained by peening, brazing or spot welding to preclude removal. 1. Exceptions: Carriage bolts with round head need not be restrained when used to connect top or bottom rail, latches or center stop. Carriage bolts need not be restrained when used on hardware where the nut is not accessible from the outside. 2. Exceptions: Bolts and hardware on fence other than perimeter security fence shall not be restrained unless directed otherwise. U. Surfaces that have been cut, filed, or where the galvanized coating has been damaged shall be coated with a zinc enriched paint, anti corrosive aluminum paint or suitable substitute to prevent corrosion per ASTM A-780. V. Clearances 1. The bottom rail shall be installed so that it is not over 2 inches above grade at any point (standard fence only). 2. Provide suitable closure at irregularities in grade, such as curbs or ditches. a. Provide suitable extension from the bottom rail made from an equivelant material. b. Fabric closures shall be sufficiently secured to the bottom rail and extensions with fabric ties, Overlap the fabric for the enclosure a minimum of 6 inches above the bottom rail. 3. Vertical posts shall not exceed 5 inches open space to the adjacent post or solid structure.
Vista USD Standards and 32 3113 - 4 CHAIN LINK FENCING AND Specifications GATES 4. Gates in the closed position shall have vertical and horizontal clearances not greater than 6 inches. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/8” Tolerance. B. Maximum Offset From True Position: 1/2 inch. C. Components shall not infringe adjacent property lines. D. The bottom rail shall be installed so that it is not over 2 inches above grade at any point. E. Vertical posts shall not exceed 6 inched open spaces to the adjacent post or solid structure. F. Gates in the closed position shall have vertical and horizontal clearance not greater than 6 inches. G. Provide suitable closure at irregularities in grade, such as curbs or ditches. This can be accomplished with suitable extensions from the bottom rail made from an equivalent material. Vertical posts shall not exceed 6 inched open spaces to the adjacent post or solid structure. If fabric is utilized in the closure it shall be sufficiently secured to the bottom rail and extensions with fabric ties. Overlap the fabric for the enclosure a minimum of 6 inches above the bottom rail. END OF SECTION
Vista USD Standards and 32 3113 - 5 CHAIN LINK FENCING AND Specifications GATES Vista Unified School District Irrigation Specifications SECTION 32 84 00
Content: SUMMARY: 1. General Irrigation Notes 1.1 Related Documents 1.2 Related Requirement 1.3 Definitions 1.4 Performance Requirements 1.5 Action Submittals 1.6 Informational Submittals 1.7 Closeout Submittals 1.8 Warranty 1.9 Maintenance Material Submittals 1.10 Quality Assurance 1.11 Delivery, Storage, and Handling 1.12 Project Conditions 2 Irrigation Components 2.1 Pipes, Tubes, and Fittings 2.2 Backflow Prevention Device 2.3 WYE Strainers 2.4 Flow Sensors 2.5 Isolation Valves 2.6 Automatic Control Valves 2.7 Quick Coupler Valves 2.8 Transition Fittings 2.9 Dielectric Fittings 2.10 Miscellaneous Piping Specialties 2.11 Sprinklers 2.12 Control Equipment Enclosure 2.13 Rain Gauge Equipment 2.14 Remote Control Valves 2.15 Controller Communication 2.16 Controller Wiring 2.17 Wire Splice Kit 2.18 Warning Tape 2.19 Booster Pump System 2.20 Thrust Blocks 2.21 Sand Bedding 3 Irrigation Installation 3.1 Examination 3.2 Preparation 3.3 Excavation and Backfilling of Trenches for Irrigation
IRRIGATION 328400 - 1
3.4 Point(s) of Connection 3.5 Solvent Welded Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe Installation 3.6 Copper Pipe Installation 3.7 Brass Pipe Installation 3.8 Concrete Thrust Blocks Installation (Up to 3 Inch Size Pipe) 3.9 Joint Restraint Installation (4 Inch Size Pipe and Greater) 3.10 Backflow Prevention Device and Enclosure Installation 3.11 Flow Sensor Installation 3.12 Master Valve Installation 3.13 Isolation Ball and Gate Valve Installation 3.14 Valve Boxes 3.15 Quick Coupling Valve Installation 3.16 Electric Remote Control Valve Installation 3.17 Controllers 3.18 Valve Box Installation 3.19 Sprinkler Installation 3.20 Automatic Controller Unit Installation 3.21 Booster Pump Installation 3.22 Electric Wire Installation 3.23 Communication and Control Equipment Cable Installation 3.24 Control Equipment Field Testing 3.25 Meg-Ohm Testing 3.26 Control Equipment Supplier Support 3.27 Repairs 3.28 Field Quality Control 3.29 Demonstration 4 Notes 4.1 General Irrigation Notes 4.2 Valve Installation Note 4.3 Additional Notes 5 Details 5.1 Pipes, Tubes, and Fittings 5.2 Backflow Prevention Devices 5.3 Flow Sensors 5.4 Master Valves 5.5 Isolation Valves 5.6 Automatic Control Valves 5.7 Quick Coupler Valves 5.8 Valve Boxes 5.9 Sprinklers 5.10 Rain gauge Equipment 5.11 Wiring 5.12 Controllers and Controller Assemblies 5.13 Thrust Blocks
IRRIGATION 328400 - 2
Vista Unified School District Irrigation Specifications SECTION 32 84 00
Section 1 - General Irrigation Notes:
PART 1 GENERAL
IRRIGATION 328400 - 3
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Piping. 2. Encasement for piping. 3. Manual valves. 4. Pressure-reducing valves. 5. Automatic control valves. 6. Automatic drain valves. 7. Transition fittings. 8. Dielectric fittings. 9. Miscellaneous piping specialties. 10. Sprinklers. 11. Quick couplers. 12. Drip irrigation specialties. 13. Controllers. 14. Boxes for automatic control valves.
1.3 RELATED REQUIREMENT:
A. Section “Landscape Specifications” for coordinating installation of irrigation systems with plantings.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Lateral Piping: Downstream from control valves to sprinklers, specialties, and drain valves. Piping is under pressure during flow.
B. Mainline Piping: Downstream from point of connection to water distribution piping to, and including, control valves. Piping is under water-distribution-system pressure.
C. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or for remote-control, signaling power-limited circuits.
1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Irrigation zone control shall be automatic operation with controller and automatic control valves, unless indicated otherwise on Drawings.
B. Location of Sprinklers and Specialties: Design location is diagrammatic and approximate. Make minor adjustments necessary to avoid plantings and obstructions such as signs and light standards. Maintain 100 percent irrigation coverage of areas indicated.
IRRIGATION 328400 - 4
C. Minimum Working Pressures: The following are minimum pressure requirements for piping, valves, and specialties unless otherwise indicated: 1. Irrigation Main Piping: 100 psi 2. Lateral Piping: 70 psi
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.
B. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Irrigation systems, drawn to scale, on which components are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from Installers of the items involved. Also, include adjustments necessary to avoid plantings and obstructions such as signs and light standards.
B. Zoning Chart: Show each irrigation zone and its control valve.
C. Controller Timing Schedule: Indicate timing settings for each automatic controller zone.
1.8 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For sprinklers, controllers and automatic control valves to include in operation and maintenance manuals.
B. Record Documents: Submit Record Drawings and Specifications at least 15 days prior to requesting inspection for Substantial Completion. After review, the District will either return the Record Documents to the Contractor requesting further information or will notify Contractor that the Record Documents are acceptable. After the District has accepted the Record Documents, an inspection for Substantial Completion may be scheduled.
1. Record Documents for this purpose shall be black line prints marked in red ink. Record Drawings shall indicate the following:
a. Zoning changes. b. Dimensions from two permanent points of reference (i.e. building corners, fixed hardscape corners, road intersections, permanent existing utilities, etc.), to the location of the following items as applicable:
1) Water meters. 2) Pump stations. 3) Connection to existing water lines. 4) Routing of pressure supply lines at every 100 feet along routing. 5) Backflow prevention devices. 6) Pressure regulators. 7) Flow sensors. 8) Master valves. 9) Isolation gate valves.
IRRIGATION 328400 - 5
10) Isolation ball valves. 11) Quick coupling valves. 12) Electric remote control valves. 13) Field satellite units/controllers. 14) Grounding rods. 15) Control wire routing. 16) Communication cable routing. 17) Communication cable and control wire splices. 18) Other equipment installed as a part of the Contract Documents, as directed by District.
2. Submit final corrected set of Record Documents prior to requesting inspection for Final Completion. Submit these drawings as electronic submittals. Maintenance Period will not commence until after submittal of final Record Documents.
C. Controller Charts:
1. Provide scaled drawings for each controller unit installed. The controller drawings shall be a scaled drawing of the area covered by that controller unit and shall be at the maximum scale that will fit inside the controller door without folding the drawing. The chart shall consist of a site plan, entire or partial, showing building(s), walks, roadways, and walls. Drawings shall show valves and sprinkler heads serviced by that particular controller, identifying each station by separate color. Valve numbers shall match the schedule and the drawings. Provide draft for District review prior to submittal. Drawing shall be laminated plastic, and secured to the inside door of the controller enclosure. 2. Submit additional copies of color coded controller drawings as follows: two 11-inch x 17- inch laminated copies; one 8-inch x 11-inch laminated copy; and one 11-inch x 17-inch non-laminated copy. 3. Submit controller charts prior to requesting an inspection for Substantial Completion.
D. Equipment Certifications:
1. Submit the following prior to requesting an inspection for Substantial Completion:
a. All manufacturers' rebate certificates (bonus dollars). b. All manufacturers’ warranty information stating length of warranty and how to exercise warranty on all valves, irrigation controllers, sprinklers, and other components. c. Central Irrigation Control System equipment installation certification letter from the factory-authorized service representative. d. Contractor is responsible to submit backflow certification test(s) as required by local water purveyor to both the water purveyor and the District.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Contractor agrees to repair or replace irrigation system components and appurtenances that are defective, faulty, or fail in materials, workmanship, or operation within specified warranty period.
1. Defects and failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Leaks and breaks on valves, piping, fittings, or other components. b. Electrical disconnects and short-circuits.
IRRIGATION 328400 - 6
c. Faulty performance of remote control valves, quick coupler valves, and manual valves. d. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. e. Settlement of trenches, valve boxes, and other components.
1) Repair shall include replacement and repair of soil, finish grades, mulch (organic and inorganic), turfgrass, plant materials, hardscape elements, paving surfaces, etc.
2. Warranty Period: One year from the date of completion of the Maintenance Period.
1.10 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Five (5) rotor sprinklers with nozzles of each type used, for every 100 rotor sprinklers installed on the project. Five (5) rotor sprinklers with nozzles, minimum. 2. Two (2) quick coupler keys with swivel hose bib attachment, as described within these specifications, for every 20 quick coupler valves installed, minimum of one (1). 3. Two (2) sets of the required equipment specific specialty tools for removing, disassembling and adjusting each type of rotor or spray sprinkler, isolation valve, and electric control valve used on the project. This shall include, but not limited to; nozzle adjustment/removal tool, small screwdriver for spray nozzle adjustment, arc adjustment key/screwdriver, insertion collar for pop-up rotor head repairs, locking cover key for quick coupler valves, channel lock pliers, universal screwdriver, and nut driver for valve box bolts. 4. Two (2) keys for opening and locking each automatic controller. 5. One (1) remote control transmitter and receiver, Hunter Roam Kit. 6. One (1) painted steel operation key for cross handle isolation valves. 7. One (1) painted steel tee-handled operation key for 2inch square nut isolation gate valves. Length of stem to operate deepest buried valve. Socket matching valve operating nut for Project. 8. Five (5) spare keys matching equipment enclosure locks used.
1.11 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified irrigation system Contractor whose work has resulted in successful installation and operation of planting irrigation systems. 1. Experience: Five years' experience in landscape irrigation system installation. 2. Contractor's Field Supervision: Maintain an experienced full-time supervisor on Project site when work is in progress. 3. Maintenance Proximity: Not more than two hours’ normal travel time from Installer's place of business to Project site.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
C. Copper Piping Components: Installation of copper piping, backflow prevention devices, and related work shall be accomplished by a Plumbing Contractor, licensed to perform that work.
IRRIGATION 328400 - 7
1.12 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store plastic piping protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.
B. Protect valves, fittings, and appurtenances from moisture, dirt, grease, and other possible contaminants.
1.13 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Interruption of Existing Water Service: Do not interrupt any District services without prior advance notification and approval of the District.
1. Notify Grounds Supervisor no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of water service. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of water service without Ground Supervisor’s written permission. 3. Obtain Ground Supervisor’s written approval of exact length of time for each shut-off or work session.
Vista Unified School District Irrigation Specifications SECTION 32 84 00
Section 2 - Irrigation Components:
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS
A. General:
1. Pipe sizes shall be nominal inside diameter unless otherwise noted. 2. Pipe shall be identified with indelible markings including manufacturer's name, nominal pipe size, schedule or class, pressure rating, NSF (National Sanitation Foundation) seal of approval, and date of extrusion.
B. Pressure Supply Line:
1. Fittings, 3 Inch Size Pipe and Greater:
a. Fittings: Ductile iron, slanted, deep bell, gasketed style made in accordance with ASTM A-536, Grade 65-45-12 & AWWA C153. Fittings shall have four lugs to accommodate joint restraints and other fittings. Bell section shall allow 5-degree
IRRIGATION 328400 - 8
freedom of pipe deflection within the bell end. All gaskets shall be manufactured of high grade EPDM rubber and shall be rib-enforced “U-Cup” design to seal and assist in restraining pipe at all pressures. Epoxy coating on interior & exterior surfaces of fittings shall be fusion bonded epoxy, 10-12 mil thickness. The epoxy coated fittings shall pass 90-day immersion tests per CSA Z245.20-98. b. No male adapters permitted.
2. Joint Restraints, 4 Inch Size Pipe and Greater:
a. Joint Restraints: Ductile iron with epoxy coating and made in accordance with ASTM A-536, Grade 65-45-12 & AWWA C153. All restraints shall have blunt cast serrations. Machine-threaded restraints shall not be allowed. Epoxy coating shall be fusion bonded epoxy, 10-12 mil thickness. The epoxy coated restraints shall pass 90-day immersion tests per CSA Z245.20-98. b. Pipe to Fitting Connections: Joint restraint set shall consist of two half-clamps and hardware that attaches PVC pipe to ductile iron fittings. Valves shall be treated as a dead end and shall be mechanically restrained for serviceability. c. Pipe to pipe connections: Joint restraint set shall consist of four half clamps, two tie-bars and hardware that restrains bell-spigot PVC pipe connection. d. Joint restraints as manufactured by Leemco, Inc.
3. Threaded Nipples: ASTM D2464, Schedule 80 with molded threads. Threaded connections to be toe nipples or nipples cut to size. 4. Joint Cement and Primer: Type as recommended by manufacturer of pipe and fittings.
C. Non-pressure Lateral Lines:
1. PVC Schedule 40, conforming to ASTM D1785-83. 2. Fittings: Standard weight, Schedule 40, injection molded PVC, complying with ASTM D1784 and D2466, cell classification 12454-B. 3. Threads: Injection molded type (where required). 4. Tees and Ells: Side gated. 5. Threaded Nipples: ASTM D2464, Schedule 80 with molded threads. 6. No ½” PVC permitted. 7. No male adapters permitted.
D. Sleeves and Conduit:
1. Sleeves for pressure supply line up to 3-inch size pipe and non-pressure supply lines shall be twice the nominal size of the pipe unless indicated otherwise on Drawings. 2. Sleeves for pressure supply lines 4-inch size and larger shall be 2-1/2 times the nominal size of the pipe to accommodate any joints and joint restraints inside the sleeve unless indicated otherwise on Drawings. 3. Sleeve Material (Provide size specified unless indicated otherwise on Drawings):
a. PVC SCH 40 for pressure supply mainline. b. PVC SCH 40 for non-pressure lines. c. One 2 inch PVC SCH 40 sleeve for up to 30 direct burial control wires. d. One 3 inch PVC SCH 40 sleeve for between 31 and 50 direct burial control wires. e. One 3 inch PVC SCH 40 sleeve for each 1-1/4-inch master valve and flow sensing cable conduit. f. One 3 inch PVC SCH 40 sleeve for each 1-1/2-inch communication cable conduit.
4. Conduit Material (Provide size specified unless indicated otherwise on Drawings):
IRRIGATION 328400 - 9
a. One ¾ inch PVC SCH 40 conduit for up to 5 wires. b. One 1 inch PVC SCH 40 conduit for up to 8 wires. c. One 1¼ inch PVC SCH 40 conduit for up to 15 wires. d. One 1½ inch PVC SCH 40 conduit for up to 20 wires. e. One 2 inch PVC SCH 40 conduit for up to 30 wires. f. One 2½ inch PVC SCH 40 conduit for up to 35 wires. g. One 1¼ inch PVC SCH 40 wire conduit for Master Valve and Flow Sensing cable. h. One 1-1/2-inch PVC SCH 40 wire conduit for 2-wire path communication cable.
E. Copper Pipe and Fittings:
1. Pressure supply line or non-pressure lateral line in structure: Type K Copper hard tempered, in accordance with ASTM B4284. 2. Fittings: Wrought copper, solder joint type. 3. Joints: Solder shall be made up of 45 percent silver, 15 percent copper, 16 percent zinc and 24 percent cadmium and solids at 1125 deg F and liquids at 1145 deg F.
F. Brass Pipe and Fittings:
1. Pressure Supply Line (from point of connection through backflow prevention device): Brass pipe, regular weight, 85 percent red brass, ANSI Schedule 40 screwed pipe. 2. Fittings: Medium brass, screwed at 125-pound class.
2.2 BACKFLOW PREVENTION DEVICE 1. Backflow devices 2” or less shall be one of the following: a. Wilkins 975XL b. Wilkins 975XLSE c. Febco 825Y d. Febco 825YA 2. Backflow devices larger than 2” to be determined by Grounds Supervisor and/or Landscape Architect.
B. Backflow Prevention Device Enclosure: Provide vandal-resistant enclosure to fit entire backflow prevention assembly with all components, and allow sufficient clearances all around with no contact and operational obstructions. 1. Hardware: All locking and mounting hardware shall be 100 percent stainless steel. 2. Model: Heavy Duty Stainless Steel enclosures made by VIT Products.
2.3 WYE STRAINERS
A. Wye Strainers 2 inches and Smaller: Brass or bronze body, 300 lb. Class with internal 20-mesh stainless steel screen with tapered self-aligned seats.
B. Wye Strainers 2-1/2-inches and Larger: Cast iron body, 125 lb. Class with 50-mesh monel metal screen.
C. Metal screen shall be accessible for maintenance without removing the device from line.
IRRIGATION 328400 - 10
2.4 FLOW SENSORS
A. Hunter Flow Sync with properly-sized FCT Tee as specified by manufacturer and Grounds Supervisor. Sensor and Tee sizing to be made by Hunter Industries technician or Grounds Supervisor.
2.5 ISOLATION VALVES
A. Isolation Gate Valve - Mainline Pipe 3/4-inch through 2-inch in Size. 1. Model shall be either: a. A.Y. McDonald #76101 b. Jones Valve J-1900 curb stops
B. Isolation Gate Valve - Mainline Pipe 2-1/2 inches and Larger. 1. Model: Clow F6102 Flanged Resilient Wedge Valve.
C. Manifold Isolation Valves 1. All manifold isolation valves shall be either: a. A.Y. McDonald #76101 b. Jones Valve J-1900 curb stops, line-sized.
2.6 AUTOMATIC CONTROL VALVES
A. Valve identification tags shall be pre-printed, double-sided standard yellow tags made of polyurethane with reinforced attachment hole. Lettering shall be hot-stamped with alpha- numeric numbering matching controller station, minimum of 1 inch height.
2.7 QUICK COUPLER VALVES
A. Quick Coupler Assembly: 1. Quick Couple Valve Model to be one of the following: a. Rainbird ¾-inch 33DLRC with key 33DK b. Rainbird 1-inch 44LRC with key 44K
2.8 TRANSITION FITTINGS
A. General Requirements: Same size as, and with pressure rating at least equal to and with ends compatible with, piping to be joined.
B. Transition Couplings:
1. Description: Romac, metal sleeve-type coupling for underground pressure piping.
C. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Fittings:
1. Description: PVC one-piece fitting with manufacturer's Schedule 80 equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent-cement-socket or threaded end.
IRRIGATION 328400 - 11
2.9 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials or ferrous material body with separating nonconductive insulating material suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.
B. Dielectric Unions:
1. Description: Factory-fabricated union, NPS 2 and smaller.
a. Pressure Rating: 150 psig minimum at 180 deg F. b. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded ferrous.
C. Dielectric Flanges:
1. Description: Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 and larger.
a. Pressure Rating: 150 psig minimum. b. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.
D. Dielectric-Flange Kits:
1. Description: Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges, NPS 2- 1/2 and larger.
a. Pressure Rating: 150 psig minimum. b. Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic. c. Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene. d. Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers.
E. Dielectric Couplings:
1. Description: Galvanized-steel coupling.
a. Pressure Rating: 300 psig at 225 deg F. b. End Connections: Female threaded. c. Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining.
F. Dielectric Nipples:
1. Description: Electroplated steel nipple complying with ASTM F 1545.
a. Pressure Rating: 300 psig at 225 deg F. b. End Connections: Male threaded or grooved. c. Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, propylene.
2.10 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Pressure Gages: ASME B40.1. Include 4-1/2-inch- diameter dial, dial range of two times system operating pressure, and bottom outlet.
IRRIGATION 328400 - 12
2.11 SPRINKLERS
A. All heads to have anti-drain valves built-in.
B. Heads utilized for large turf areas shall be Hunter I-20 through I-40 depending on the area being applied.
C. Heads utilized for shrubs and trees shall be either Rainbird 1806 SAM or Rainbird 1812 SAM. To be used with Hunter PCN-50 bubblers at plant locations.
D. No overhead spray systems allowed except for large turf fields.
E. No drip of laser tubing allowed.
F. Swing joint assemblies for 3/4 inch and greater sprinkler inlets shall be pre-assembled, double O-ring, Schedule 80 PVC.
2.12 CONTROL EQUIPMENT ENCLOSURE: 1. Controller enclosures shall be one of the following: a. VIT stainless steel model #SB-24SSW for wall mount applications b. VIT stainless steel model #SB-24SS for pedestal mount applications
B. Radio Remote Control Equipment:
1. Hunter Roam Kit
C. Irrigation Controllers: 1. Hunter ACC-1200 2. All controllers to be equipped with the following” a. Hunter ACC-COM-LAN network module b. Hunter Wireless Solar Sync device c. Hunter ROAM XL Remote control
D. Stand-Alone Controllers: 1. These are not District standard and must be approved prior to specification. 2. Hunter ACC 1200 (Standard metal cabinet) 3. Irritrol Sentar II 6, 12, 18, 24, and 36 station controller
2.13 RAIN GAUGE EQUIPMENT
A. A rain sensor to connect to District’s remote Irrigation Central Control System. The tipping rain collector shall be manufactured by Texas Electronics Inc., Dallas, TX, Model No. TR-4. Conduit for roof mounting shall comply with Division 26 sections.
2.14 REMOTE CONTROL VALVES
A. All Remote Control Valves to be brass unless otherwise specified by grounds supervisor.
B. Superior Brass 950 is the standard Remote Control Valve for the District. All other Remote Control Valves must be approved through the Grounds Department prior to installation. Remote Control Valve to be one of the following:
IRRIGATION 328400 - 13
1. Superior Brass 950 Series ¾-inch to 3-inch 2. Rainbird 100-EFB-CP 1-inch Brass Valve 3. Rainbird 150-EFB-CP 1-½ -inch Brass Valve 4. Rainbird 200-EFB-CP 2-inch Brass Valve
2.15 CONTROLLER COMMUNICATION
A. Ethernet connection from ACC-COM-LAN to local area network for central control 1. Cat 5 or cat 6 female ethernet junction terminal at controller per district standards, contact district IT department
2.16 CONTROLLER WIRING
A. Conventional 1. All direct-bury pilot and common control wiring shall be UF14 single-conductor wire unless otherwise specified by Grounds Supervisor and/or Landscape Architect. Any wire run exceeding 500-feet shall be increased to 12-guage UF wire for the entire length. 2. Colors shall be the following unless otherwise specified by Landscape Architect: a. White for common wires b. Black for pilot wires c. Red for spares 3. No 14-guage wiring permitted into the controller or enclosure. 14-guage wiring shall transition outside of controller room or enclosure to multi-conductor 18-gauge sprinkler wire. 4. No direct-buried splices are permitted. 5. No junction boxes are permitted unless the length of wiring run is found to exceed 500- feet by the Grounds Supervisor and/or Landscape Architect. 6. Wiring shall be in their own dedicated sleeve and not installed inside any other sleeve.
B. Decoder System 1. The decoder output module shall have 6 two-wire output paths to the field. The decoders may be wired in sequence over any combination of the two-wire paths, including all 99 on a single two-wire path. Each path may extend up to 10,000 ft./3km to the end of the wire run over 14 AWG (1.5mm dia.) wire, or 15,000 ft./4.5km over 12 AWG (2mm dia.) wire. 2. The wire paths shall be twisted pair, solid-core, color-coded red/blue pairs, enclosed in a PE sleeve available in 6 different colors for in-ground identification. 3. The two-wire paths shall be Hunter Industries Model ID1xxx for 14 AWG (1.5mm) conductors, or Model ID2xxx for 12 AWG (2mm) conductors for extended range (over 10,000 ft./3km, up to 15,000 ft./4.5km), where “xxx” indicates the external sleeve color- code. 4. The two-wire paths may be spliced, or “teed”, permitting extensions of the path in multiple directions. In general, the distance from the controller to the end of any one end of a “tee” or wire run shall not exceed the maximum for the gauge of wire, even if the total of all wire exceeds that number. For example, a path comprised of IDWIRE1 (rated for 10,000ft./3km) could extend 5000 ft./1.5km to a “tee” splice, and each arm of the tee could extend an additional 5000 ft./1.5km. The total wire connected would equal 15,000 ft./4.5km, but the distance from the controller, to the end of each run, would be 10,000ft./3km or less, meeting the specification. All wire splices must be made in a valve box with DBR-6 or equal direct-burial waterproof connectors. 5. The decoder output module shall be compatible only with Hunter Industries ICD Series decoders, and shall not be connected to any other model or brand of decoder. The decoder output module shall have a port for programming station addresses directly into
IRRIGATION 328400 - 14
each field decoder, and shall not require the use of serial numbers. Each decoder shall have one or more (in the case of multiple output decoders) station addresses programmed at the controller location with the ACC control panel, and the station number(s) shall be noted on the side of the decoder prior to installing in the valve box.
2.17 WIRE SPLICE KIT
A. No direct-burial splicing permitted without prior authorization by Grounds Supervisor. 1. For any approved direct bury splicing use only: Splice using 3M 3570G-N.
B. Wire splices inside valve and junction boxes shall be either: 1. Spears DS-100 Dri-Splice with DS-300 sealant only. 2. DBRY-6 for Hunter products.
2.18 WARNING TAPE
A. Tape shall be detectable blue color marking tape with the words “Caution – Irrigation Line Buried Below” in 1 inch size minimum letters. The warning message shall be encased within the tape to prevent ink rub-off and be impervious to acid, alkali, and other destructive elements typically found in soil. Minimum thickness 4.5 mil, with 0.0035 mil solid aluminum foil core. Widths shall be at least three-fourths of the diameter of the pipe being protected, 3-inch size minimum.
2.19 BOOSTER PUMP SYSTEM
A. A variable-frequency drive (VFD) simplex water pressure booster system. The system shall be a completely prefabricated system with pump, piping, electrical, and structural elements. Booster pump system shall include a stainless-steel enclosure. The entire booster pump assembly shall be UL Listed and Approved.
B. All system piping shall be type “L” copper. All fittings shall be copper or brass, with unions or flanges to allow for system disassembly or major component removal. System shall incorporate an integral full pipe size bypass line with isolation valve to allow for pump removal and repair without disrupting water supply to system.
C. Isolation valves shall be all brass quarter turn ball valves with hard chrome ball on lines 2- inches and less. Isolation valves shall be lug style butterfly valves with Buna-N elastomeric seats, ductile iron nickel coated disc, and stainless steel stem with handle and 10 position galvanized memory plate on lines 2-1/2 inch and greater.
D. Gauges shall be 2-1/2 inch diameter face, glycerin-filled with stainless steel casing and brass internals.
E. Flow activated paddle style magnetically coupled flow switch, sensitive to flows as low as 1 fps, mounted on piping and interconnected to time delay relay to shut down pump on no-flow conditions, time delay relay adjustable from 0 to 5 minutes.
F. Pump system shall be mounted on a structural aluminum skid with mounting flanges on front and back to allow for mounting of skid to concrete pad. Skid equipped with pipe support on
IRRIGATION 328400 - 15
suction and discharge piping. All nuts and bolts and washers to be heavy zinc coated steel on skid and piping. Skid shall include mounting hardware for integral aluminum enclosure.
G. The system enclosure shall be vandal and weather resistant, marine grade aluminum alloy 5052-H32 construction with rectangular punch-outs for viewing and heat dissipation. The enclosure shall be low profile hinged top design with padlock provision. The cover shall be secured to the concrete pad with stainless steel hardware.
H. Pump Assembly shall include variable-frequency drive (VFD) system to convert incoming 1- phase power to 3-phase power for the motor. VFD system to receive feedback signal from system mounted stainless steel pressure transducer, and in conjunction with internal software driven PID control loop maintain customer adjustable constant system discharge pressure by varying the speed of the pump in response to varying system load.
2.20 THRUST BLOCKS
A. Concrete thrust and anchor blocks shall consist of Portland cement concrete, Class C, at 2,500 psi with 4 inches slump.
2.21 SAND BEDDING
A. Sand bedding material shall be clean, washed, construction grade type.
B. Sand bedding material shall be free of rocks, clay, organic matter, or other objectionable material.
C. Sand bedding material shall not contain angular material, as described in ASTM D2488.
IRRIGATION 328400 - 16
IRRIGATION 328400 - 17
Vista Unified School District Irrigation Specifications SECTION 32 84 00
Section 3 - Irrigation Installation Specifications:
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine field conditions with installer present prior to beginning the work of this Section. Grading operations shall be completed and approved prior to beginning work.
B. Verify all sleeve locations prior to beginning work of this Section. Flag all existing sleeves and conduits installed by other trades.
C. Verify location of existing underground utilities, valves, manholes, catch basins, and other appurtenances that will affect the layout of the sprinkler system. Verify location of existing trees, new specimen trees, and other obstructions that will affect the layout of the sprinkler system. Verify location of stub outs and points of connection to the water supply system. Verify location of all new and existing architectural elements.
D. Report any conflicts and discrepancies to the Construction Manager immediately. Do not begin work until conflicts and other unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Locations of piping and equipment indicated on Drawings is diagrammatic and approximate and shall be adjusted as necessary and as directed to meet existing conditions and obtain complete water coverage.
B. Preserve and protect all existing trees, plants, monuments, structures, hardscape and architectural elements to remain from damage due to work in this section. If damage does occur to inanimate objects and structures, repair or replace such damage to the satisfaction of the District. Contractor, at Contractor’s expense, shall replace damaged or injured living plant material.
C. Sprinkler lines shall have a minimum clearance of 12 inches from each other and from other utility lines. Do not install parallel lines directly over one another.
D. Construct irrigation system to the sizes and grades at the locations indicated. Mark with powdered agricultural gypsum or marking paint routing of pressure supply line and stake the location of each spray head, rotor, flush valve assembly, electric control valve and other related equipment for the first three zones. Project Inspector shall review staking with Contractor and direct any necessary changes prior to proceeding to other zones. This review does not in any way alleviate Contractor from the responsibilities associated with proper uniformity and distribution of head placement after staking.
E. Install sleeves to accommodate pipes and wires under paving, hardscape areas, sidewalks, and paths prior to asphalt and concrete operations. Compact backfill around sleeves to 95
IRRIGATION 328400 - 18
percent Modified Proctor Density within 2 percent of optimum moisture content in accordance with ASTM D1557. Where not yet utilized, close sleeve ends with cloth duct tape.
F. Install landscape headers, sidewalks, roadways, curbs, walls, concrete bands, mowing strips, and other permanent hardscape elements before installation of sprinkler system.
G. Plant specimen trees 24-inch box and larger before installation of the irrigation system.
3.3 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING OF TRENCHES FOR IRRIGATION
A. Follow layout indicated on Drawings as closely as possible in excavating trenches. Trenches shall be straight in alignment and support pipe continuously on bottom of trench. Remove rocks and debris greater than 1 inch in diameter. Over excavate as required for bedding material.
B. Specified depths of pressure supply lines, laterals and pitch of pipes as stated in this Section are minimums. Settlement of trenches lower than grades indicated on Drawings is cause for removal of finish grade treatment, refilling trenches, re-compacting and repairing of finish grade treatment.
C. Trenching or other work required in this section under the limb spread of existing trees shall be done by hand or by other methods to prevent damage or harm to limbs, branches, and roots.
D. Trenching in areas where root diameter of existing trees exceeds 1 inch shall be done by hand. Exposed roots of this size shall be heavily wrapped with moistened burlap to avoid scarring or excessive drying. Where a trenching machine is operated in proximity to roots that are less than 1 inch, the wall of the trench shall be hand trimmed, making clean cuts through roots.
E. Trenches adjacent to or under existing trees shall be closed within 24 hours. When this is not possible, the side of trench closest to the tree or trees affected shall be covered with moistened burlap.
F. Protect, maintain, and coordinate work with other contracts, trades, and utilities. Exercise extreme care in excavating and working in areas where utilities exist. Repair damaged caused by Contractor operations at no cost to the District.
G. Use caution where trenches and piping cross existing roadways, sidewalks, hardscape, paths, or curbs. Repair damaged caused by Contractor operations at no cost to the District.
H. Depth of Trench in Landscape Areas (unless indicated otherwise on Drawings):
1. Pressure Supply Line: 18 inch from top of pipe to finish grade. 2. Non-Pressure Line (for all rotor sprinkler heads and 12-inch pop-up heads): 18 inch from top of pipe to finish grade. 3. Non-Pressure Line (for all non-rotor sprinkler heads and 6-inch pop-up heads): 12 inch from top of pipe to finish grade. 4. Control Wiring: Directly at side and bottom of mainline piping trench. 5. Communication Cable: Opposite side of control wiring inside conduit, never direct- buried. 6. Pressure Supply Line Locator Tape: 6 inch above top of pipe, at a maximum depth of 12 inch below finish grade.
I. Width of Trench (unless indicated otherwise on Drawings):
IRRIGATION 328400 - 19
1. Pipe greater than 3 inch: 14-inch minimum. 2. Pipe less than 3 inch: 7-inch minimum.
J. Distance Between Trenches:
1. Irrigation trench to irrigation trench: 6-inch minimum. 2. Irrigation trench to other trade trenches: 12-inch minimum.
K. Sleeves: Provide specified sized sleeves for piping located under asphalt paving or concrete.
L. Boring: Boring is only permitted where pipe must pass under an obstruction that cannot be avoided or removed. Backfill shall match surrounding soil density and grain. Boring under existing paving, sidewalks, or hardscape shall be permitted at Contractor's risk. Contractor shall repair all damage to such items caused by Contractor operations at its own expense.
M. Backfilling: Backfilling of trenches shall not be done until all required testing for the irrigation system has been completed:
1. Material: Excavated material is generally considered to be adequate for backfilling operations. Before beginning the backfilling operation, insure that backfill material is free from debris and rocks greater than 1 inch in diameter, and is not mixed with topsoil. Legally dispose of these materials after being separated from backfill. 2. Bed pressure supply line with construction grade sand 6 inch above and 6 inch below pipe. Remaining backfill shall be as described above. 3. Bed all electrical control wire and communication cable wire, trenched separate from pressure supply line, with construction grade sand 6 inch above and 6 inch below wires. 4. Bed all sleeves with sand bedding with construction grade sand 6 inches above and 6 inches below pipe sleeves. 5. Set in place, cap and pressure test piping in the presence of the Project Inspector prior to backfilling. 6. Compact backfill to a 90 percent maximum density in accordance with ASTM D1557 with a mechanical tamper. Do not leave trenches open for a period greater than 48 hours. Open trenches shall be protected in accordance with current OSHA regulations. Slightly mound filled trenches for settlement after backfilling is compacted. 7. Smooth trenches to match surrounding finish grade prior to requesting inspection for Substantial Completion.
3.4 POINT(S) OF CONNECTION
A. Point(s) of connection shall be approximately as indicated on Drawings. Connect new underground piping and valves, and provide all flanges, adapters, or other necessary fittings.
3.5 SOLVENT WELDED POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE INSTALLATION
A. Polyvinyl chloride pipe shall be cut with an approved PVC pipe cutter designed only for that purpose.
B. All plastic-to-plastic solvent weld joints shall use solvent recommended by the pipe manufacturer. Do not install solvent weld pipe when temperature is below 40 deg F.
C. Wipe pipe ends and fittings clean before welding solvent is applied. Welded joints shall be given a minimum of 15 minutes to set before moving or handling.
IRRIGATION 328400 - 20
D. Snake pipe from side-to-side on trench bottom to allow for expansion and contraction.
E. All changes of direction over 15 degrees shall be made with appropriate fittings.
F. When pipe laying is not completed by the end of the workday, close pipe ends with tight plug or cap.
G. Install pressure supply line locating tape along the entire length of pressure supply line.
H. Coordinate pressure supply line with sand bedding operations.
I. No water shall be permitted in the pipe until inspections have been completed and a period of at least 24 hours has elapsed for solvent weld setting and curing.
J. Center load pipe with small amount of backfill to prevent arching and slipping under pressure. Leave joints exposed for inspection during testing.
K. All PVC fittings and piping shall be solvent welded with Weld-On P-69 primer and P-711 glue.
L. Lateral lines and Main lines are primer-required.
M. Manufacturer’s label instructions must be followed when performing all solvent welding.
3.6 COPPER PIPE INSTALLATION
A. Copper piping shall be cut by a power hacksaw, a circular cutting machine using an abrasive wheel, or by means of a hand hacksaw. No piping shall be cut with a metallic wheel cutter of any description. All pipes shall be reamed and rough edges or burrs removed so that a smooth and unobstructed flow is obtained.
B. Eccentric reducing fittings shall be used where change in pipe size occurs. Bushings shall not be used unless specifically authorized by the Project Inspector.
C. Apply emery cloth to pipe ends and wipe with clean cloth prior to solder welding pipe end to fitting. Apply an even layer of flux along area to be soldered. Apply solder uniformly around joint and let cool. After cooling lightly apply emery cloth along soldered area until smooth.
D. All exposed piping under structural slabs shall be stenciled with "Irrigation Main" or "Irrigation Lateral" as required, at ten foot intervals in black permanent ink lettering, 3/4 inch minimum high.
3.7 BRASS PIPE INSTALLATION
A. Brass piping shall be cut by a power hacksaw, a circular cutting machine using an abrasive wheel, or by means of a hand hacksaw. All pipes shall be reamed and rough edges or burrs removed so that a smooth and unobstructed flow is obtained.
B. Eccentric reducing fittings shall be used where change in pipe size occurs. Bushings shall not be used unless specifically authorized by the Project Inspector.
C. Carefully and smoothly place joint compound on the male thread only. All screwed joints shall be tightened with tongs or wrenches. Caulking of any kind is not permitted.
IRRIGATION 328400 - 21
D. All exposed piping under structural slabs shall be stenciled with "Irrigation Main" or "Irrigation Lateral" as required, at ten foot intervals in black permanent ink lettering, 3/4 inch size minimum.
3.8 CONCRETE THRUST BLOCKS INSTALLATION (UP TO 3 INCH SIZE PIPE)
A. Install concrete thrust blocks behind each fitting according to the following:
1. Provide thrust blocks on all 3 inch and below bell end solvent weld pipe and fittings, and ends where line changes 30 degrees and greater. 2. Provide thrust blocks of concrete having a compression strength of 2,500 psi or greater. 3. Form thrust blocks against solid unexcavated earth that has been undamaged by mechanical equipment. 4. The space between pipe and trench wall shall be filled to the height of the outside diameter of the pipe. Size thrust block in accordance with ASAE Standards. 5. If unable to form approved thrust block against solid unexcavated earth, mechanical joint restraints shall be used.
3.9 JOINT RESTRAINT INSTALLATION (4 INCH SIZE PIPE AND GREATER)
A. All changes of direction 30 degrees and greater and locations of pipe reductions shall be mechanically restrained with joint restraints. Additional adjacent joints shall also be restrained per manufacturer’s recommendations.
B. Install joint restraints as per manufacturer’s recommendations.
C. Concrete thrust blocks shall not be used on 4-inch size pipe and greater.
3.10 BACKFLOW PREVENTION DEVICE AND ENCLOSURE INSTALLATION
A. Install backflow prevention device and associated equipment as close as possible to the water meter or point-of-connection. Verify exact location in the field with the Project Inspector prior to layout and installation.
B. Coordinate installation with local water purveyor and comply to their specifications.
C. Install backflow prevention device and enclosure per manufacturer’s recommendations. Install keyed lock.
3.11 FLOW SENSOR INSTALLATION
A. Install Hunter Flow-Sync flow sensors as indicated in Drawings and per manufacturer’s recommendations. Install with a minimum of 2 feet or 10 times the pipe diameter, whichever is greater, straight pipe without fittings prior to the sensor. Install with a minimum of 1 foot or 5 times the pipe diameter, whichever is greater, straight pipe without fittings after the sensor. Install with a cover of 6-inch minimum and 12-inch maximum over top of the flow sensor. Fit each valve with a rectangular valve box, set over 3/4 inch gravel.
IRRIGATION 328400 - 22
B. Flow sensor wire may be extended to a maximum distance of 2,000 feet from the location of the assembly to which it is connected. Wire shall be installed in a 1-1/4-inch gray PVC Schedule 40 pipe.
C. Connection of flow sensor wires shall only be within the valve box of the flow sensor. Wire connections on the cable shall be made with wire splice kit, installed per manufacturer’s specifications. No splices shall be allowed without prior written approval of the Grounds Supervisor.
D. Install flow sensor cable and normally open master valve cable in same conduit and apart from all other wires. Connection of these cables to the controller terminals shall be by equipment supplier during their certification of equipment installation.
3.12 MASTER VALVE INSTALLATION
A. Install master valve per Drawings and manufacturer’s instructions. Install after the backflow assembly and prior to the flow sensor. Install with a cover of 4-inch minimum and 8-inch maximum over top of flow control stem. Fit each valve with a rectangular valve box, set over 3/4 inch gravel with filter fabric.
B. Install master valve cable in same conduit with flow sensor cable and apart from all other wires. Connection of these cables to the controller terminals shall be by equipment supplier during their certification of equipment installation.
C. Connection of master valve wires shall only be within the valve box of the master valve. Wire connections on the cable shall be made with wire splice kit, installed per manufacturer’s specifications.
3.13 ISOLATION VALVE INSTALLATION
A. Install isolation valves in separate round valve boxes as indicated on Drawings.
B. Fit each valve with a round valve box and ensure clearances will allow full and complete operation of valve and valve handle within box.
C. Mainline Isolation Valves 1. Mainline isolation valves 2-1/2 -inch or larger shall be installed with van stone flanges for glued piping systems, and with mechanical joints on all other pipeline types. 2. Mainline isolation valves 2-inch or smaller shall be installed with schedule 80 toe nipples. No male adapters allowed. 3. Mainline isolation valves shall be nut-operated type. 4. Mainline isolation valves shall be installed with section of schedule 40 or C1200 PVC pipe sleeve over bonnet to allow operation of valve from the surface. 5. Area between pipe sleeve and valve box shall be filled with ¾-inch gravel to 4-inch below to top of sleeve.
3.14 VALVE BOXES
A. Valve boxes shall be installed onto bricks and leveled to grade
B. Bottom 6-inches shall be graveled with ¾-inch gravel
IRRIGATION 328400 - 23
C. Valve lids shall be branded with District-approved nomenclature
D. Top of box must be no more than 1-inch above final grade
E. No filter fabric or other geotextile to be used under any valve, splice, isolation, quick coupler, or junction boxes.
3.15 QUICK COUPLING VALVE INSTALLATION
A. Install quick coupling valves with brass riser set in a 1 cubic foot concrete footing. Set plumb and true in center of box with QCV top 3 inch below box lid. Ensure that proper quick coupling key operation is provided with each installation.
B. Install in separate round valve box as indicated on the Drawings.
C. Fit each valve with a round valve box and ensure clearances will allow full and complete operation of valve and valve handle within box.
3.16 ELECTRIC REMOTE CONTROL VALVE INSTALLATION
A. Install each electric control valve in a separate valve box so that cross handle is 3- to 5-inch minimum below valve box cover. Install with union type connection. Fit each valve with a rectangular valve box, set over 3/4 inch gravel.
B. Group electric remote control valves together with no more than 4 per manifold. Allow a maximum of 12 inch between each valve boxes. Install valve boxes in the same direction and parallel with one another and perpendicular to paving, hardscape, sidewalks and paths. Install each manifold group with a mainline-sized Jones valve.
C. Connection of electric remote control valve wires shall only be made within the valve box of the electric remote control valve. Wire connections on electric remote control valve 24-volt wire shall be made with DS-100 and DS-300 Sealant or DBRY-6 only.
D. After final wiring and approval of controller station sequencing, secure valve identification tag to valve solenoid wires.
E. Control wiring shall have 18-inches extra length and coiled in box.
F. All threaded fittings to be installed with schedule 80 toe nipples only. No male adapters permitted.
G. No direct-bury wiring connections permitted.
3.17 CONTROLLERS
A. Irrigation controllers shall be installed into interior electrical or utility rooms as determined by Grounds Supervisor and/or Landscape Architect.
B. Irrigation controllers that must be installed onto exterior walls or at remote locations shall be installed within a stainless-steel enclosure approved by the grounds supervisor.
IRRIGATION 328400 - 24
C. Irrigation controllers shall be installed with Hunter Solar-Sync wireless device.
D. Controllers shall be installed with all required Ethernet adapters, network interface devices, device-specific wiring and related equipment to ensure network communication with district central server.
3.18 VALVE BOX INSTALLATION
A. Install valve boxes with each type of irrigation equipment so that top of valve box is no more than 1-inch above finish grade. Valve box extensions are not acceptable except for mainline isolation gate valves.
B. Brand the valve box lid of associated equipment with District-approved nomenclature as instructed by Grounds Supervisor.
C. Letter and number size of brands shall be no less than 1 inch and no greater than 1½ inch in height and shall be 1/8-inch maximum in depth. Submit sample branding to the Project Inspector prior to commencement of work. Coordinate with Project Inspector for any non-listed equipment box identification required.
D. Inspection for Substantial Completion shall not be allowed until all branding is complete and approved by Project Inspector.
E. Plastic valve box covers shall be secured with a stainless-steel locking bolt mechanism.
3.19 SPRINKLER INSTALLATION
A. Flush all piping with full water pressure and install sprinklers after hydrostatic test is completed. All piping and heads shall be flushed prior to nozzling.
B. All heads shall be equipped with a built-in low-head drainage device and installed with a pre- made Sch. 80 Double-O-Ring assembly.
C. Heads shall be set and compacted to eliminate settling and movement.
D. All heads shall be nozzled uniformly with other heads on the same valve zone.
E. Locate part circle sprinklers to maintain a minimum distance of 2 inch to a maximum of 4 inch between paving, hardscape, sidewalks, and paths and a minimum distance of 12 inch from walls.
F. Spray heads and rotors shall not exceed the maximum head and row spacing indicated on Drawings or staked in the field unless approved by the Project Inspector. In no case shall spray heads or rotors be installed at a distance between heads that exceeds the manufacturer's recommended distance.
G. Angled nipples on swing joints below spray heads and rotors or any sprinkler type, where applies, shall not exceed 45 deg nor be less than 10 deg.
H. After installation adjust nozzle sizes, arcs, and radius of throw to allow head to head uniform distribution. No overspray will be allowed on paving, hardscape, sidewalks, running tracks,
IRRIGATION 328400 - 25
buildings, structures, neighboring properties, and paths. Adjust all spray heads and rotors to correct height as indicated below: 1. Heads shall be installed in shrub beds and slopes ¼-inch above finish grade. 2. Heads shall be installed in turf applications at finish grade and must never create a potential tripping hazard.
I. Adjust adjacent new plant material placement or trim existing plants so that they do not interfere with uniform distribution of each spray head or rotor.
J. Project Inspector may request nozzle changes and/or adjustments without additional cost to the District.
3.20 AUTOMATIC CONTROLLER UNIT INSTALLATION
A. Conventional Controller 1. Verify electrical power at location of automatic controller unit prior to its installation. Control unit shall have a dedicated separate circuit on the panel. Electrical panel and circuit number serving the irrigation control equipment shall be labeled inside the controller enclosure. 2. Hardwire controller to the on/off switch and existing power source. Controller shall never be plugged into a socket. 3. Controller shall be tested with complete electrical connections. 4. Connect electric remote control valve assembly wiring to controller unit in the same numerical sequence as indicated on the Drawings, or as directed by the Grounds Supervisor in the field. All Irrigation controllers shall be installed with a permanently mounted remote-control device. 5. Connect flow sensing and master valve wiring to controller into proper terminals for their designed purpose. 6. Install a separate ground wire for each controller unit as indicated on the Drawings and per manufacturer’s requirements. Each Controller and decoder shall be grounded as required by the California Electrical Code and the manufacturer’s written instructions. Provide 8-foot long grounding rod. No solder connections will be allowed. Resistance to ground shall be no greater than 5 ohms. 7. Below ground conduit shall be PVC SCH 40 electrical conduit with appropriate sweeps and fittings. Conduit sweeps shall extend a minimum of 3 inch above concrete controller base. 8. Each automatic controller unit shall be completely operable and sequence tested prior to scheduling an inspection for Substantial Completion. 9. Irrigation controllers shall be installed with Hunter Solar-Sync wireless device. 10. Controllers shall be installed with all required Ethernet adapters, network interface devices, device-specific wiring, and related equipment to ensure network communication with district central server.
B. Hunter ACC Two-Wire Controller 1. The decoder output module shall in no way reduce the range of features or programming capabilities of the standard ACC controller. The decoder output capability shall be compatible with any of the enclosure configurations (steel wall, metal pedestal, plastic pedestal) available for the ACC controller. 2. The decoder output module shall have an intrinsic capability of up to 99 stations, and shall occupy 3 modular expansion slots inside the ACC controller cabinet 3. The decoder output module shall have 6 two-wire output paths to the field. The decoders may be wired in sequence over any combination of the two-wire paths, including all 99 on
IRRIGATION 328400 - 26
a single two-wire path. Each path may extend up to 10,000 ft./3km to the end of the wire run over 14 AWG (1.5mm dia.) wire, or 15,000 ft./4.5km over 12 AWG (2mm dia.) wire. 4. The wire paths shall be twisted pair, solid-core, color-coded red/blue pairs, enclosed in a PE sleeve available in 6 different colors for in-ground identification. 5. The two-wire paths shall be Hunter Industries Model ID1xxx for 14 AWG (1.5mm) conductors, or Model ID2xxx for 12 AWG (2mm) conductors for extended range (over 10,000 ft./3km, up to 15,000 ft./4.5km), where “xxx” indicates the external sleeve color- code. 6. The two-wire paths may be spliced, or “teed”, permitting extensions of the path in multiple directions. In general, the distance from the controller to the end of any one end of a “tee” or wire run shall not exceed the maximum for the gauge of wire, even if the total of all wire exceeds that number. For example, a path comprised of IDWIRE1 (rated for 10,000ft./3km) could extend 5000 ft./1.5km to a “tee” splice, and each arm of the tee could extend an additional 5000 ft./1.5km. The total wire connected would equal 15,000 ft./4.5km, but the distance from the controller, to the end of each run, would be 10,000ft./3km or less, meeting the specification. All wire splices must be made in a valve box with DBR-6 or equal direct-burial waterproof connectors. 7. The decoder output module shall be compatible only with Hunter Industries ICD Series decoders, and shall not be connected to any other model or brand of decoder. The decoder output module shall have a port for programming station addresses directly into each field decoder, and shall not require the use of serial numbers. Each decoder shall have one or more (in the case of multiple output decoders) station addresses programmed at the controller location with the ACC control panel, and the station number(s) shall be noted on the side of the decoder prior to installing in the valve box.
3.21 BOOSTER PUMP INSTALLATION
A. Install booster pumps on cast-in-place concrete equipment base(s).
B. Support connected water piping so weight of piping is not supported by booster pump.
3.22 ELECTRIC WIRE INSTALLATION
A. Low Voltage Wiring:
1. Bury control wiring in same trench as pressure supply line as specified. 2. Bundle all 24 volt wires at 10 foot intervals with electrical tape. 3. Provide expansion loops at every pressure supply line angle fitting, inside each electric remote control valve box, and at 250 feet length intervals along routing. Form expansion loop by wrapping wire a minimum of 10 times around a 3/4 inch pipe and withdrawing pipe. 4. Limit splicing of electrical wiring. Provide each splice made at intervals or in electric remote control valve assembly valve boxes with approved direct burial waterproof connectors. 5. Wire splices occurring at intervals outside electric control valve box shall be installed in a separate valve box. 6. Provide one electrical control wire for every electric remote control valve. Piggy-backing like zones on the same electrical control wire or into the same station terminal is unacceptable. 7. Install two spare #14-1 electrical control wires (with common wire) from the automatic controller unit pedestal to the last electric control valve on each leg of pressure supply line. Locate the spare wires in their own valve box as specified. Provide one additional
IRRIGATION 328400 - 27
spare electrical control wire at every electric remote control valve manifold (valve grouping). In addition to these spare wires, provide additional wires as indicated on Drawings and locate them in the same valve box as the spare wires. Length of spare wires at each end enclosure shall be sufficient for connection into possible fixture equipment or connection point.
B. Power Source Wiring: Install 120-volt power source to automatic controller unit as required by California Electric Code.
C. Two-Wire Decoder Wiring: 1. Earth grounding shall be connected via a factory supplied copper ground lug inside the controller, for connection to earth ground hardware via 6 AWG(4mm dia.) copper wire (see ASIC Earth Grounding Guideline 100-2002 for details of earth grounding irrigation control systems available online at www.asic.org). Ground wire shall be extended underground, at right angles to any communications wiring, to approved direct burial earth grounding hardware at least 6 ft./2m from the controller location. Earth Ground shall be have an impedance of 10 Ohms or less, or shall meet the standards of the Earth Grounding Guideline cited above. 2. The controllers shall be equipped with an integrated, pre-wired SmartPort input to permit connection of wireless remote controls and other devices as specified by the manufacturer. Wireless remote control shall permit individual start of individual stations and Programs, and shall also enable remote shut down of all irrigation at the controller. 3. The controller shall be adaptable to compatible computerized central control systems through an optional communications module, with a selection of common communications media including hardwired cable, UHF radio, dial-up modem, and cellular telephone. When configured for operation within a central system, the controller shall feature full two-way communications with the central computer. The compatible control system shall be Hunter Industries Model IMMS 2.0 Irrigation Management and Monitoring System. 4. The controller shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s published instructions. The controller shall carry a conditional five year exchange warranty. The automatic controller(s) shall be the ACC series controller as manufactured for Hunter Industries Incorporated, San Marcos, California. 5. The controller shall be UL and c-UL listed. The controller shall be CE and C-tick approved and shall have WEEE recyclability markings as required. 6. The wall mount controller shall be model ACC-1200. 7. The optional steel pedestal shall be model ACC-PED and the controller cabinet shall be installed on the pedestal according to the manufacturer’s instructions. 8. The plastic pedestal configuration shall be model ACC-1200PP. 9. Station expansion modules (6 stations each) shall be Hunter Model ACM-600. 10. Compatible Flow Meter shall be Hunter Industries Model HFS, with appropriately sized FCT fitting for the pipe. 11. The wireless remote control shall be Hunter Industries Model ICR.
3.23 COMMUNICATION AND CONTROL EQUIPMENT CABLE INSTALLATION
A. Install communication cable in conduit and according to manufacturer's specifications. Control equipment cable (flow sensor and master valve) shall be in the same conduit. All cable shall be pulled by hand and shall be a continuous wire run. A minimum of 2 feet of slack shall be left at each field controller and within pull boxes.
B. Irrigation interconnect cable and flow sensor cable shall be installed within continuous run with no splices. Communication cables conductors shall be installed with NO UNDERGROUND
IRRIGATION 328400 - 28
splices. All splices that are required to be made must be approved by the Grounds Supervisor prior to installation and shall be placed in a suitable type valve box. Splices in communication cable are only allowed at the following locations:
1. At each decoder location. 2. At the end of each entire length of communication cable line.
C. Central control system communication cable installation and splicing or radio communication shall be tested and certified in writing by the appropriate manufacturer's representative. The system shall also be tested online with the central computer system prior to requesting walk- through for Substantial Completion.
3.24 CONTROL EQUIPMENT FIELD TESTING
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust electrical components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, as follows:
1. Test each circuit for continuity. 2. Test each circuit for leaks to ground with an ohmmeter after each interconnect circuit has been installed and connections have been made. No circuit checking lower than 1 megohm will be acceptable. 3. Test the grounding system with a meter. System resistance shall not measure more than 5 ohms. 4. Perform operational test and demonstrate that each part of the system functions as specified. Do not start operational test without written approval to do so from the Construction Manager.
a. The operational test for each new or modified electrical system shall consist of not less than five days of continuous, satisfactory operation. If unsatisfactory performance of the system develops, the condition shall be corrected and the test shall be repeated until the five days of continuous satisfactory operation are obtained. b. Shutdown caused by factors beyond the Contractor’s control shall not constitute discontinuity of the operational test.
5. Any material revealed by these tests to be faulty shall be replaced or corrected, and the same test shall be repeated until no fault is evident. 6. Record results of circuitry tests and submit to Construction Manager.
3.25 MEG-OHM TESTING
A. To ensure all low-voltage wiring is free from ground faults, contractor is required to have all wiring meg-ohm tested before any backfilling, and final acceptance by the District. 1. Contractor to obtain meg-ohm testing for all UF wiring. 2. Once meg-ohm test is 100% passing, the Grounds Supervisor shall be notified at least two days in advance for a district representative to inspect and accept final meg-ohm test. 3. The minimum insulation resistance to ground shall be fifty (50) meg-ohms. Any wiring not meeting this requirement shall be replaced at the contractor’s expense.
IRRIGATION 328400 - 29
3.26 CONTROL EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER SUPPORT
A. Engage control equipment supplier to provide the following field support services:
1. Conduct on-site system familiarization meeting for Contractor and District personnel to ensure that all personnel understand the system installation technique. 2. Provide on-site technical assistance during installation period when requested by Contractor or Construction Manager. 3. Test grounding system to verify that equipment is properly grounded. 4. Perform continuity and resistance test on communication wire to ensure that proper voltage will be delivered to the equipment on line. 5. Hook-up communication and sensor wire to the proper terminals inside the enclosures to ensure that good connections are made. 6. Certify that equipment conforms to and is installed in accordance with plans, specifications and manufacturers recommendations. 7. Address satellites and decoders. 8. Test system components for proper operation. 9. Verify system flow range and calibrate pulse transmitter.
3.27 REPAIRS 1. All PVC repairs shall be made utilizing Romac couplings in conjunction with solvent weld fittings only. 2. Slip-fix, compression couplings or other similar type repair fittings are not permitted. 3. Other transitional and mechanical joints permitted with prior approval of the Grounds Supervisor. 4. Repairs shall be inspected by the Grounds Supervisor or their delegated district personnel prior to backfilling. 5. Lines shall be flushed prior to charging for use. 6. Lines shall be sanitized where required by local health codes. 7. When re-routing of lines in necessitated the proposed re-route shall be approved by the Grounds Supervisor prior to re-routing.
3.28 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following tests and inspections. All tests and inspections are required to be performed in the presence of the Project Inspector, who may delegate authority to the District Landscape Inspector. Provide three days’ notice to the Project Inspector prior to performing tests and requiring inspections.
1. Hydrostatic Pressure Testing the Pressure Supply Line: After backfilling, flushing, and prior to the installation of each electric remote control valve, isolation ball valve, quick coupling valve, and manual drain valve, pressure test the irrigation system utilizing the following procedure:
a. Pressurize the irrigation system to 40 psi greater than the designated static pressure or 150 psi whichever is greater for a period of no less than 4 hours. The pressure gauge used for the pressure test shall not exceed readings greater than 300psi. Pressure pump and other equipment necessary for the test shall be furnished by Contractor. b. Test is acceptable if no leakage occurs within the system for the duration of the testing period.
IRRIGATION 328400 - 30
c. If leaks occur, repair said leaks and begin pressure test again. Repeat this operation until no leaks occur in the irrigation system. d. Before requesting a walk through for Substantial Completion, the entire irrigation system shall remain under pressure for a period of no less than 48 hours.
2. Inspections: Inspection will be performed by the Project Inspector at the following times:
a. Upon installation and testing of main lines and lateral lines; when pipes are laid and are to be submitted to pressure tests. Do not cover lines until they have been inspected and approved. b. Upon installation and testing of valves, quick couplers, backflow preventer device, automatic controllers, control valves, and wires. c. When the cooling system is completed, perform a coverage test, in the presence of the Project Inspector, to determine if the coverage is complete and adequate. Furnish materials and perform construction required to correct inadequacies in the coverage. d. Final inspection and performance test shall be at the same time as the final inspection of the landscape construction.
3. Flushing: Center-load all piping prior to flushing. After all new irrigation piping and risers are in place and connected and all necessary diversion work has been completed and prior to the installation of sprinkler heads and quick coupling valves, thoroughly flush piping system under full head of pressure. After the furthermost riser from the point of connection begins to flush, continue flushing for duration of five minutes. After the system is thoroughly flushed, cap all risers.
4. Walk-Through for Substantial Completion:
a. Before requesting a walk-through for Substantial Completion, the following requirements must be entirely satisfied:
1) The entire irrigation system shall be completely installed, flushed and satisfactorily pressure tested. 2) All valve boxes shall be branded. 3) All automatic controllers or field satellite units are fully operable, control equipment has been certified and operation tested for interface with the District’s Irrigation Central Control System (through District’s Irrigation Control System Specialist).
b. Once the above requirements have been met a walk-through for Substantial Completion shall be requested. The following procedures shall be used during the walk-through:
1) Contractor shall have two personnel available with radio communication for the entire length of the walk-through. 2) All valve box lids shall be removed from valve boxes and placed faced up adjacent to the valve box prior to beginning the walk through. 3) The scheduling of each walk-through type will be divided over several days as needed to provide adequate time to complete the review of all zones. The walk through will be divided into two sections and proceed as follows:
a) Visual Walk Through: This will consist of walking through the entire irrigation system and examining all components of the system without turning on zones. A punch list will be developed identifying
IRRIGATION 328400 - 31
deficiencies in the construction and workmanship of the system when compared to the requirements of the Contract Documents. b) Operational Walk-Through: This will consist of walking through the entire irrigation system observing each zone in a fully operable condition. Valves must be activated from the automatic controller unit. Manual bleeding of individual electric remote control valves is not acceptable. A punch list will be developed identifying deficiencies in the operation of each zone in the system evaluating, but not limited to: head spacing, row spacing, nozzle sizing, correct radius of throw, correct stationing, and flushing operation of zones when compared to the requirements of the Contract Documents. c) Once the Walk-Through for Substantial Completion has been completed, a copy of the punch list will be forwarded to the Contractor who shall repair, replace, and adjust all items on the punch list prior to requesting a final walk-through.
5. Final Walk-Through
a. Before requesting a final walk-through, the following requirements must be entirely satisfied:
1) Each item on the Substantial Completion punch list shall have been thoroughly addressed and resolved by Contractor. 2) Controller charts for each automatic controller unit shall have been completed, installed, and submitted to the District.
b. Once the above requirements have been met, a final walk-through shall be request-ed. The following procedures will be used during the walk-through:
1) Contractor shall have two personnel available with radio communication for the entire length of the walk-through. 2) Only those valve box lids shall be removed from valve boxes as indicated on the Substantial Completion punch list. The valve box lids shall be placed face up adjacent to the valve box prior to beginning the final walk- through. 3) The final walk-through shall be divided into two sections and proceed as follows:
a) Visual Walk-Through: This will consist of walking through the punch list items created at the time of the walk-through for Substantial Completion, examining all components of the system without turning on zones. Any remaining deficiencies in the construction and workmanship of the irrigation system when compared to the Substantial Completion punch list and Contract Documents will be noted. b) Operational Walk-Through: This will consist of walking through the Substantial completion punch list items and observing each zone in a fully operable condition. Valves shall be activated from the automatic controller unit. Manual bleeding of individual electric remote control valves will not be acceptable. Any remaining deficiencies in the operation of each zone in the system including but not limited to head spacing, row spacing, nozzle sizing, correct radius of throw, correct stationing, and flushing operation of zones,
IRRIGATION 328400 - 32
when compared to the Substantial Completion punch list and Contract Documents, will be noted.
6. Any additional walk-throughs required due to Contractor’s inability to address all issues on the punch lists described above shall be provided at Contractor's expense, including costs of District’s consultants.
B. Booster Pump Start-Up: Provide the services of a factory representative or trained service professional on the job site to check installation and perform the startup and instruct the operating personnel. Submit a startup report containing voltage and amperage readings, suction and discharge pressure readings, estimated flow conditions, and general operating characteristics.
3.29 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train District's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain equipment, sprinklers, specialties, and accessories.
IRRIGATION 328400 - 33
SECTION 32 9000 LANDSCAPING Sections: 1 General Landscape Notes 1.1 Related Requirements 1.2 Definitions 1.3 Quality Assurance 1.4 Coordination 1.5 Delivery, Storage, and Handling 1.6 Field Conditions 1.7 Warranty 2 Landscape Components 2.1 Plant Material 2.2 Turf and Grass Material 2.3 Plant Fertilizers 2.4 Turf and Grass Fertilizers 2.5 Plant Mulches 2.6 Turf and Grass Mulches 2.7 Weed-Control Barriers 2.8 Pesticides 2.9 Tree-Stabilization Materials 2.10 Landscape Edgings 2.11 Tree Grates 2.12 Turf and Grass Erosion Control Materials 2.13 Miscellaneous Products 3 Landscape Installation 3.1 Examination 3.2 Plant Preparation 3.3 Turf Area Preparation 3.4 Preparation for Erosion-Control Materials 3.5 Planting Area Establishment 3.6 Seeding 3.7 Hydroseeding 3.8 Sodding 3.9 Excavation for Trees and Shrubs 3.10 Tree and Shrub Planting 3.11 Tree Stabilization 3.12 Root-Barrier Installation 3.13 Placing Soil in Planters 3.14 Planting Area Mulching 3.15 Edging Installation 3.16 Tree Grate Installation 3.17 Plant Maintenance 3.18 Turf Maintenance 3.19 Pesticide Application 3.20 Plant Repair and Replacement
Vista USD Standards and 32 9000 - 1 LANDSCAPING Specifications
3.21 Turf Renovation 3.22 Plant Cleaning and Protection 3.23 Turf Cleanup and Protection 3.24 Plant Maintenance Service 3.25 Turf Maintenance Service 3.26 Satisfactory Turf 4 Notes 4.1 General Landscape Notes 4.2 Tree Protection Notes 5 Details 5.1 Shrub Planting 5.2 Tree Planting 5.3 Landscape Edging
Vista USD Standards and 32 9000 - 2 LANDSCAPING Specifications
Vista Unified School District Landscape Specifications SECTION 32 90 00
Section 1 – General Landscape Notes
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Plants. 2. Tree stabilization. 3. Tree-watering devices. 4. Landscape edgings. 5. Tree grates.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 015639 "Temporary Tree and Plant Protection" for protecting, trimming, pruning, repairing, and replacing existing trees to remain that interfere with, or are affected by, execution of the Work. 2. Section 129200 "Interior Planters and Artificial Plants" for planters for live and artificial interior plants. 3. Section 329200 "Turf and Grasses" for turf (lawn) and meadow planting, hydroseeding, and erosion-control materials. 4. Section 329600 "Transplanting" for transplanting non-nursery-grown trees.
1.3 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section “Irrigation Specifications” for coordinating installation of irrigation systems with plantings.
1.4 ALLOWANCES
A. Allowances for plants are specified in Section 012100 "Allowances."
1. Perform planting work under quantity allowances and only as authorized. Authorized work includes work required by Drawings and the Specifications and work authorized in writing by Architect.
Vista USD Standards and 32 9000 - 3 LANDSCAPING Specifications
2. Notify Architect/Agencies authorized representative weekly of extent of work performed that is attributable to quantity allowances. 3. Perform work that exceeds quantity allowances only as authorized by Change Orders.
B. Furnish trees as part of tree allowance.
1.5 UNIT PRICES
A. Work of this Section is affected by unit prices specified in Section 012200 "Unit Prices."
B. Unit prices apply to authorized work covered by quantity allowances.
C. Unit prices apply to additions to and deletions from the Work as authorized by Change Orders.
1.6 DEFINITIONS
A. Backfill: The earth used to replace or the act of replacing earth in an excavation. This can be amended or un-amended soil as indicated.
B. Bare-Root Stock: Plants with a well-branched, fibrous-root system developed by transplanting or root pruning, with soil or growing medium removed, and with not less than the minimum root spread according to ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of plant required.
C. Caliper: Diameter of a trunk measured by a diameter tape at a height of 12 inches (300 mm) above the ground.
D. Compost: The product resulting from the controlled biological decomposition of organic material that has been sanitized through the generation of heat and stabilized to the point that it is beneficial to plant growth.
E. Container-Grown Stock: Healthy, vigorous, well-rooted plants grown in a container, with a well- established root system reaching sides of container and maintaining a firm ball when removed from container. Container shall be rigid enough to hold ball shape and protect root mass during shipping and be sized according to ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of plant required.
F. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil.
G. Imported Soil: Soil that is transported to Project site for use.
H. Organic Matter: The total of organic materials in soil exclusive of un-decayed plant and animal tissues, their partial decomposition products, and the soil biomass; also called “humus” or “soil organic matter.”
I. Pesticide: A substance or mixture intended for preventing, destroying, repelling, or mitigating a pest. Pesticides include insecticides, miticides, herbicides, fungicides, rodenticides, and molluscicides. They also include substances or mixtures intended for use as a plant regulator, defoliant, or desiccant.
J. Pests: Living organisms that occur where they are not desired or that cause damage to plants, animals, or people. Pests include insects, mites, grubs, mollusks (snails and slugs), rodents (gophers, moles, and mice), unwanted mammals (rabbits, etc.), unwanted plants (weeds), fungi, bacteria, and viruses. Vista USD Standards and 32 9000 - 4 LANDSCAPING Specifications
K. Planting Area: Areas to be planted.
L. Planting Soil: Existing, on-site soil; imported soil; or manufactured soil that has been modified with soil amendments and perhaps fertilizers to produce a soil mixture best for plant growth.
M. Plant; Plants; Plant Material: These terms refer to vegetation in general, including trees, shrubs, vines, ground covers, ornamental grasses, bulbs, corms, tubers, or herbaceous vegetation.
N. Root Flare: Also called "trunk flare." The area at the base of the plant's stem or trunk where the stem or trunk broadens to form roots; the area of transition between the root system and the stem or trunk.
O. Stem Girdling Roots: Roots that encircle the stems (trunks) of trees below the soil surface.
P. Subgrade: The surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete, or the top surface of a fill or backfill before planting soil is placed.
Q. Subsoil: Soil beneath the level of subgrade; soil beneath the topsoil layers of a naturally occurring soil profile, typified by less than 1 percent organic matter and few soil organisms.
R. Surface Soil: Soil that is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile. In undisturbed areas, surface soil is typically called "topsoil"; but in disturbed areas such as urban environments, the surface soil can be subsoil.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified landscape installer whose work has resulted in successful establishment of plants.
1. Professional Membership: Installer shall be a member in good standing of either the Professional Landcare Network or the American Nursery and Landscape Association. 2. Experience: Five years' experience in landscape installation. 3. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time supervisor on Project site when work is in progress. 4. Personnel Certifications: Installer's field supervisor shall have certification in the following category from the Professional Landcare Network:
a. Landscape Industry Certified Technician - Exterior.
5. Pesticide Applicator: State licensed, commercial.
B. Provide quality, size, genus, species, and variety of plants indicated, complying with applicable requirements in ANSI Z60.1.
1. Selection of plants purchased under allowances is made by Construction Manager, who tags plants at their place of growth before they are prepared for transplanting.
C. Plant Material Observation: Project Inspector (who may delegate authority to District Landscape Inspector) may observe plant material either at place of growth or at site before planting for compliance with requirements for genus, species, variety, cultivar, size, and quality. Project Inspector may also observe trees and shrubs further for size and condition of balls and root systems, pests, disease symptoms, injuries, and latent defects and may reject
Vista USD Standards and 32 9000 - 5 LANDSCAPING Specifications
unsatisfactory or defective material at any time during progress of work. Remove rejected trees or shrubs immediately from Project site.
1. Notify Construction Manager of sources of planting materials seven days in advance of delivery to site.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordination with Turf Areas (Lawns): Plant trees, shrubs, and other plants after finish grades are established and before planting turf areas unless otherwise indicated.
1. When planting trees, shrubs, and other plants after planting turf areas, protect turf areas, and promptly repair damage caused by planting operations.
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in original, unopened containers showing weight, certified analysis, name and address of manufacturer, and indication of compliance with state and Federal laws if applicable.
B. Bulk Materials:
1. Do not dump or store bulk materials near structures, utilities, walkways and pavements, or on existing turf areas or plants. 2. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of bulk materials; discharge of soil-bearing water runoff; and airborne dust reaching adjacent properties, water conveyance systems, or walkways. 3. Do not move or handle materials if they are wet. 4. Accompany each delivery of bulk materials with appropriate certificates.
C. Deliver bare-root stock plants within 36 hours of digging. Immediately after digging up bare-root stock, pack root system in wet straw, hay, or other suitable material to keep root system moist until planting. Transport in covered, temperature-controlled vehicles, and keep plants cool and protected from sun and wind at all times.
D. Do not prune trees and shrubs before delivery. Protect bark, branches, and root systems from sun scald, drying, wind burn, sweating, whipping, and other handling and tying damage. Do not bend or bind-tie trees or shrubs in such a manner as to destroy their natural shape. Provide protective covering of plants during shipping and delivery. Do not drop plants during delivery and handling.
E. Handle planting stock by root ball.
F. Store bulbs, corms, and tubers in a dry place at 60 to 65 deg F until planting.
G. Apply anti-desiccant to trees and shrubs using power spray to provide an adequate film over trunks (before wrapping), branches, stems, twigs, and foliage to protect during digging, handling, and transportation.
1. If deciduous trees or shrubs are moved in full leaf, spray with anti-desiccant at nursery before moving and again two weeks after planting.
Vista USD Standards and 32 9000 - 6 LANDSCAPING Specifications
H. Wrap trees and shrubs with burlap fabric over trunks, branches, stems, twigs, and foliage to protect from wind and other damage during digging, handling, and transportation.
I. Deliver plants after preparations for planting have been completed, and install immediately. If planting is delayed more than six hours after delivery, set plants and trees in their appropriate aspect (sun, filtered sun, or shade), protect from weather and mechanical damage, and keep roots moist.
1. Heel-in bare-root stock. Soak roots that are in less than moist condition in water for two hours. Reject plants with dry roots. 2. Set balled stock on ground and cover ball with soil, peat moss, sawdust, or other acceptable material. 3. Do not remove container-grown stock from containers before time of planting. 4. Water root systems of plants stored on-site deeply and thoroughly with a fine-mist spray. Water as often as necessary to maintain root systems in a moist, but not overly wet condition.
1.10 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual grade elevations, service and utility locations, irrigation system components, and dimensions of plantings and construction contiguous with new plantings by field measurements before proceeding with planting work.
A. Interruption of Existing Water Service: Do not interrupt water service to facilities occupied by District or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary water service according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Construction Manager no fewer than seven business days in advance of proposed interruption of water service. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of water service without Construction Manager’s written permission. 3. Obtain Construction Manager’s written approval of exact length of time for each shut-off or work session.
B. Weather Limitations: Proceed with planting only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit planting to be performed when beneficial and optimum results may be obtained. Apply products during favorable weather conditions according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements.
1.11 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace plantings and accessories that fail in materials, workmanship, or growth within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Death and unsatisfactory growth, except for defects resulting from abuse, lack of adequate maintenance, or neglect by Owner. b. Structural failures including plantings falling or blowing over. c. Faulty performance of tree stabilization, edgings, and tree grates. d. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. Vista USD Standards and 32 9000 - 7 LANDSCAPING Specifications
2. Warranty Periods: From date of planting completion.
a. Trees, Shrubs, Vines, and Ornamental Grasses: 12 months. b. Ground Covers, Biennials, Perennials, and Other Plants: 12 months. c. Annuals: Three months.
3. Include the following remedial actions as a minimum:
a. Immediately remove dead plants and replace unless required to plant in the succeeding planting season. b. Replace plants that are more than 25 percent dead or in an unhealthy condition at end of warranty period. c. A limit of one replacement of each plant is required except for losses or replacements due to failure to comply with requirements. d. Provide extended warranty for period equal to original warranty period, for replaced plant material.
Vista Unified School District Landscape Specifications SECTION 32 90 00
Section 2 – Landscape Components
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 PLANT MATERIAL
A. General: Furnish nursery-grown plants true to genus, species, variety, cultivar, stem form, shearing, and other features indicated in Plant List, Plant Schedule, or Plant Legend indicated on Drawings and complying with ANSI Z60.1; and with healthy root systems developed by transplanting or root pruning. Provide well-shaped, fully branched, healthy, vigorous stock, densely foliated when in leaf and free of disease, pests, eggs, larvae, and defects such as knots, sun scald, injuries, abrasions, and disfigurement.
1. Trees with damaged, crooked, or multiple leaders; tight vertical branches where bark is squeezed between two branches or between branch and trunk ("included bark"); crossing
Vista USD Standards and 32 9000 - 8 LANDSCAPING Specifications
trunks; cut-off limbs more than 3/4 inch in diameter; or with stem girdling roots are unacceptable. 2. Collected Stock: Do not use plants harvested from the wild, from native stands, from an established landscape planting, or not grown in a nursery unless otherwise indicated.
B. Provide plants of sizes, grades, and ball or container sizes complying with ANSI Z60.1 for types and form of plants required. Plants of a larger size may be used if acceptable to Landscape Architect, with a proportionate increase in size of roots or balls.
C. Root-Ball Depth: Furnish trees and shrubs with root balls measured from top of root ball, which begins at root flare according to ANSI Z60.1. Root flare shall be visible before planting.
D. Labeling: Label at least one plant of each variety, size, and caliper with a securely attached, waterproof tag bearing legible designation of common name and full scientific name, including genus and species. Include nomenclature for hybrid, variety, or cultivar, if applicable for the plant.
E. If formal arrangements or consecutive order of plants is indicated on Drawings, select stock for uniform height and spread, and number the labels to assure symmetry in planting.
F. Annuals and Biennials: Provide healthy, disease-free plants of species and variety shown or listed, with well-established root systems reaching to sides of the container to maintain a firm ball, but not with excessive root growth encircling the container. Provide only plants that are acclimated to outdoor conditions before delivery and that are in bud but not yet in bloom.
G. Ground Cover Plants Grown in Flats: Provide healthy, disease-free plants of species and variety indicated on Drawings, with established root systems. Provide only plants that are acclimated to outdoor conditions before delivery. Ground cover plants grown in flats shall remain in original flats until transplanting.
2.2 TURF AND GRASS MATERIAL
A. SEED 1. Grass Seed: Fresh, clean, dry, new-crop seed complying with AOSA's "Rules for Testing Seeds" for purity and germination tolerances. 2. Seed Species: a. Quality: State-certified seed of grass species as listed below for solar exposure. b. Quality: Seed of grass species as listed below for solar exposure, with not less than 85 percent germination, not less than 95 percent pure seed, and not more than 0.5 percent weed seed: c. Full Sun: Agrono-Tec Ball Field Mix 1A. d. Sun and Partial Shade: Agrono-Tec Ball Field Mix 1A.
B. TURFGRASS SOD 1. Turfgrass Sod: Approved, complying with "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Materials" in TPI's "Guideline Specifications to Turfgrass Sodding." Furnish viable sod of uniform density, color, and texture that is strongly rooted and capable of vigorous growth and development when planted. 2. Turfgrass Species: Sod of grass species as follows, with not less than 85 percent germination, not less than 95 percent pure seed, and not more than 0.5 percent weed seed: a. Full Sun: Bermuda grass (Cynodon dactylon).
Vista USD Standards and 32 9000 - 9 LANDSCAPING Specifications
2.3 PLANT FERTILIZERS
A. Planting Tablets: Tightly compressed chip-type, long-lasting, slow-release, commercial-grade planting fertilizer in tablet form. Tablets shall break down with soil bacteria, converting nutrients into a form that can be absorbed by plant roots.
1. Size: 5-gram tablets. 2. Nutrient Composition: 20 percent nitrogen, 10 percent phosphorous, and 5 percent potassium, by weight plus micronutrients.
2.4 TURF AND GRASS FERTILIZERS
A. Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial-grade complete fertilizer of neutral character, consisting of fast- and slow-release nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic sources of urea formaldehyde, phosphorous, and potassium in the following composition:
1. Composition: 1.5 lb./1000 sq. ft. of actual nitrogen, 4 percent phosphorous, and 2 percent potassium, by weight. 2. Composition: Nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium in amounts recommended in soil reports from a qualified soil-testing laboratory.
B. Slow-Release Fertilizer: Granular or pelleted fertilizer consisting of 50 percent water-insoluble nitrogen, phosphorus, and potassium in the following composition:
1. Composition: 20 percent nitrogen, 10 percent phosphorous, and 10 percent potassium, by weight. 2. Composition: Nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium in amounts recommended in soil reports from a qualified soil-testing laboratory.
2.5 PLANT MULCHES
A. Organic Mulch: Free from deleterious materials and suitable as a top dressing of trees and shrubs, consisting of one of the following:
1. Type: Wood and bark chips 2. Size Range: 3 inches maximum, 1/2 inch minimum. 3. Color: Natural.
B. Compost Mulch: Agriservice “Forest Fines” mulch.
C. Mineral Mulch: Hard, durable stone, washed free of loam, sand, clay, and other foreign substances, of the following type, size range, and color:
1. Type: Type determined by Landscape Architect. 2. Size Range: Size range determined by Landscape Architect. 3. Color: Color range determined by Landscape Architect.
2.6 TURF AND GRASS MULCHES
A. Compost Mulch: Well-composted, stable, and weed-free organic matter, pH range of 5.5 to 8; moisture content 35 to 55 percent by weight; 100 percent passing through 1-inch sieve; soluble Vista USD Standards and 32 9000 - 10 LANDSCAPING Specifications
salt content of 2 to 5 decisiemens/m; not exceeding 0.5 percent inert contaminants and free of substances toxic to plantings; and as follows:
1. Organic Matter Content: 50 to 60 percent of dry weight.
2.7 WEED-CONTROL BARRIERS
A. Nonwoven Geotextile Filter Fabric: Polypropylene or polyester fabric, 3 oz./sq. yd. minimum, composed of fibers formed into a stable network so that fibers retain their relative position. Fabric shall be inert to biological degradation and resist naturally encountered chemicals, alkalis, and acids.
B. Composite Fabric: Woven, needle-punched polypropylene substrate bonded to a nonwoven polypropylene fabric, 4.8 oz./sq. yd.
2.8 PESTICIDES
A. General: Pesticide registered and approved by the EPA, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and of type recommended by manufacturer for each specific problem and as required for Project conditions and application. 1. Must comply with Healthy Schools Act and District IPM policies. 2. No pesticide application is possible without prior coordination with Ground Supervisor approval.
2.9 TREE-STABILIZATION MATERIALS
A. Trunk-Stabilization Materials:
1. Double lodge pole, double-tied halfway up trunk, and again just below the first branches.
2.10 LANDSCAPE EDGINGS
A. Concrete Edging: Must be compliant with District curbing standards.
2.11 TREE GRATES
A. Tree Grates: Manufacturer's standard tree grates and frames.
1. Grates: ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 35 or better, gray-iron castings. 2. Frames: ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 35 or better, gray-iron castings of shape, pattern, and size indicated.
B. Shape and Size: As indicated on Drawings.
C. Finish: Powder-coat finish or as indicated.
1. Color: Dark gray or as indicated.
Vista USD Standards and 32 9000 - 11 LANDSCAPING Specifications
2.12 TURF AND GRASS EROSION CONTROL MATERIALS
A. Erosion-Control Blankets: Biodegradable wood excelsior, straw, or coconut-fiber mat enclosed in a photodegradable plastic mesh. Include manufacturer's recommended steel wire staples, 6 inches long.
B. Erosion-Control Fiber Mesh: Biodegradable burlap or spun-coir mesh, a minimum of 0.92 lb/sq. yd., with 50 to 65 percent open area. Include manufacturer's recommended steel wire staples, 6 inches long.
C. Erosion-Control Mats: Cellular, nonbiodegradable slope-stabilization mats designed to isolate and contain small areas of soil over steeply sloped surface, of 4-inch nominal mat thickness. Include manufacturer's recommended anchorage system for slope conditions.
2.13 MISCELLANEOUS PRODUCTS
A. Root Barrier: Black, molded, modular panels 18 inches high (deep) min., 85 mils thick, and with vertical root deflecting ribs protruding 3/4 inch out from panel surface; manufactured with minimum 50 percent recycled polyethylene plastic with UV inhibitors.
B. Burlap: Non-synthetic, biodegradable.
C. Planter Drainage Gravel: Washed, sound crushed stone or gravel complying with ASTM D 448 for Size No. 8.
D. Planter Filter Fabric: Woven geotextile manufactured for separation applications and made of polypropylene, polyolefin, or polyester fibers or combination of them.
Vista USD Standards and 32 9000 - 12 LANDSCAPING Specifications
Vista Unified School District Landscape Specifications SECTION 32 90 00
Section 3 – Landscape Installation
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas to receive plants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and conditions affecting installation and performance of the Work.
1. Verify that no foreign or deleterious material or liquid such as paint, paint washout, concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, or acid has been deposited in soil within a planting area. 2. Verify that plants and vehicles loaded with plants can travel to planting locations with adequate overhead clearance. 3. Suspend planting operations during periods of excessive soil moisture until the moisture content reaches acceptable levels to attain the required results. 4. Uniformly moisten excessively dry soil that is not workable or which is dusty.
B. If contamination by foreign or deleterious material or liquid is present in soil within a planting area, remove the soil and contamination as directed by Landscape Architect and replace with new planting soil.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
D. Locate all existing underground utilities and obstructions prior to excavating. Bring to the attention of the Construction Manager any interferences found.
Vista USD Standards and 32 9000 - 13 LANDSCAPING Specifications
3.2 PLANT PREPARATION
A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities and turf areas and existing plants from damage caused by planting operations.
1. Protect adjacent and adjoining areas from hydroseeding and hydromulching overspray. 2. Protect grade stakes set by others until directed to remove them.
B. Install erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways.
C. Unacceptable Materials: Remove from soil all concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, building debris, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, acid, and other extraneous materials that are harmful to plant growth.
D. Lay out individual tree and shrub locations and areas for multiple plantings. Stake locations, outline areas, adjust locations when requested, and obtain Landscape Architect's acceptance of layout before excavating or planting. Make minor adjustments as required.
E. Lay out plants at locations directed by Landscape Architect. Stake locations of individual trees and shrubs and outline areas for multiple plantings.
F. Prior to excavating planting holes, locate underground utilities and structures in the area of excavations. Damage to existing utilities shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
3.3 TURF AREA PREPARATION
A. Placing Planting Soil: Place and mix planting soil, or place manufactured soil, in place over exposed subgrade.
1. Reduce elevation of planting soil to allow for soil thickness of sod.
B. Moisten prepared area before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface to dry before planting. Do not create muddy soil.
C. Before planting, obtain Landscape Architect's acceptance of finish grading; restore planting areas if eroded or otherwise disturbed after finish grading.
3.4 PREPARATION FOR EROSION-CONTROL MATERIALS
A. Prepare area as specified in "Turf Area Preparation" Article.
B. For erosion-control mats, install planting soil in two lifts, with second lift equal to thickness of erosion-control mats. Install erosion-control mat and fasten as recommended by material manufacturer.
C. Fill cells of erosion-control mat with planting soil and compact before planting.
D. For erosion-control blanket or mesh, install from top of slope, working downward, and as recommended by material manufacturer for site conditions. Fasten as recommended by material manufacturer.
Vista USD Standards and 32 9000 - 14 LANDSCAPING Specifications
E. Moisten prepared area before planting if surface is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface to dry before planting. Do not create muddy soil.
3.5 PLANTING AREA ESTABLISHMENT
A. Placing Planting Soil: Place manufactured planting soil over exposed subgrade or blend planting soil in place.
B. Before planting, obtain Project Inspector’s acceptance of finish grading; restore planting areas if eroded or otherwise disturbed after finish grading.
3.6 SEEDING
A. Sow seed with spreader or seeding machine. Do not broadcast or drop seed when wind velocity exceeds 5 mph.
1. Evenly distribute seed by sowing equal quantities in two directions at right angles to each other. 2. Do not use wet seed or seed that is moldy or otherwise damaged. 3. Do not seed against existing trees. Limit extent of seed to outside edge of planting saucer.
B. Sow seed as per manufacturer specifications.
C. Rake seed lightly into top 1/8 inch of soil, roll lightly, and water with fine spray.
D. Protect seeded areas with Agriservice 70/30 Topsoil Mix.
3.7 HYDROSEEDING
A. Hydroseeding: Mix specified seed, slow-release fertilizer, and fiber mulch in water, using equipment specifically designed for hydroseed application. Continue mixing until uniformly blended into homogeneous slurry suitable for hydraulic application.
1. Mix slurry with fiber-mulch manufacturer's recommended tackifier. 2. Spray-apply slurry uniformly to all areas to be seeded in a one-step process. Apply slurry at a rate so that mulch component is deposited at not less than 1500-lb/acre dry weight, and seed component is deposited at not less than the specified seed-sowing rate. 3. Spray-apply slurry uniformly to all areas to be seeded in a two-step process. Apply first slurry coat at a rate so that mulch component is deposited at not less than 500-lb/acre dry weight, and seed component is deposited at not less than the specified seed-sowing rate. Apply slurry cover coat of fiber mulch (hydromulching) at a rate of 1000 lb/acre.
3.8 SODDING
A. Lay sod within 24 hours of harvesting, unless a suitable preservation method is accepted by Landscape Architect prior to delivery time. Do not lay sod if dormant or if ground is frozen or muddy.
B. Lay sod to form a solid mass with tightly fitted joints. Butt ends and sides of sod; do not stretch or overlap. Stagger sod strips or pads to offset joints in adjacent courses. Avoid damage to soil Vista USD Standards and 32 9000 - 15 LANDSCAPING Specifications
or sod during installation. Tamp and roll lightly to ensure contact with soil, eliminate air pockets, and form a smooth surface. Work sifted soil or fine sand into minor cracks between pieces of sod; remove excess to avoid smothering sod and adjacent grass.
C. Saturate sod with fine water spray within two hours of planting. During first week after planting, water daily or more frequently as necessary to maintain moist soil to a minimum depth of 1-1/2 inches below sod.
3.9 EXCAVATION FOR TREES AND SHRUBS
A. Planting Pits and Trenches: Excavate circular planting pits.
1. Excavate planting pits with sides sloping inward at a 45-degree angle. Excavations with vertical sides are unacceptable. Trim perimeter of bottom leaving center area of bottom raised slightly to support root ball and assist in drainage away from center. Do not further disturb base. Ensure that root ball will sit on undisturbed base soil to prevent settling. Scarify sides of planting pit smeared or smoothed during excavation. 2. Excavate approximately three times as wide as ball diameter for all stock. 3. Excavate at least 12 inches wider than root spread and deep enough to accommodate vertical roots for bare-root stock. 4. Due to poor soil conditions, over-x is preferred to provide vertical growth for trees. 5. If area under the plant was initially dug too deep, add soil to raise it to the correct level and thoroughly tamp the added soil to prevent settling. 6. Maintain angles of repose of adjacent materials to ensure stability. Do not excavate subgrades of adjacent paving, structures, hardscapes, or other new or existing improvements. 7. Maintain supervision of excavations during working hours. 8. Keep excavations covered or otherwise protected when unattended by Installer's personnel. 9. If drain tile is indicated on Drawings or required under planting areas, excavate to top of porous backfill over tile.
B. Backfill Soil: Subsoil and topsoil removed from excavations may be used as backfill soil unless otherwise indicated.
C. Obstructions: Notify Landscape Architect if unexpected rock or obstructions detrimental to trees or shrubs are encountered in excavations.
1. Hardpan Layer: Drill 6-inch diameter holes, 24 inches apart, into free-draining strata or to a depth of 10 feet, whichever is less, and backfill with free-draining material.
D. Drainage: Notify Landscape Architect if subsoil conditions evidence unexpected water seepage or retention in tree or shrub planting pits.
E. Fill excavations with water and allow to percolate away before positioning trees and shrubs.
3.10 TREE AND SHRUB PLANTING
A. Inspection: At time of planting, verify that root flare is visible at top of root ball according to ANSI Z60.1. If root flare is not visible, remove soil in a level manner from the root ball to where the top-most root emerges from the trunk. After soil removal to expose the root flare, verify that root ball still meets size requirements. Vista USD Standards and 32 9000 - 16 LANDSCAPING Specifications
B. Roots: Remove stem girdling roots and kinked roots. Remove injured roots by cutting cleanly; do not break.
C. Balled and Burlapped Stock: Set each plant plumb and in center of planting pit or trench with root flare 1 inch above adjacent finish grades.
1. Backfill: Planting soil. For trees, use excavated soil for backfill. 2. After placing some backfill around root ball to stabilize plant, carefully cut and remove burlap, rope, and wire baskets from tops of root balls and from sides, but do not remove from under root balls. Remove pallets, if any, before setting. Do not use planting stock if root ball is cracked or broken before or during planting operation. 3. Backfill around root ball in layers, tamping to settle soil and eliminate voids and air pockets. When planting pit is approximately one-half filled, water thoroughly before placing remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more water is absorbed. 4. Place planting tablets equally distributed around each planting pit when pit is approximately one-half filled. Place tablets beside the root ball about 1 inch from root tips; do not place tablets in bottom of the hole.
a. Quantity: Three for each caliper inch of plant.
5. Continue backfilling process. Water again after placing and tamping final layer of soil.
D. Watering Pipe: During backfilling, install watering pipe 4 feet deep into the planting pit outside the root ball with top of pipe 1 inch above the mulched surface.
E. Slopes: When planting on slopes, set the plant so the root flare on the uphill side is flush with the surrounding soil on the slope; the edge of the root ball on the downhill side will be above the surrounding soil. Apply enough soil to cover the downhill side of the root ball.
3.11 TREE STABILIZATION
A. Trunk Stabilization by Upright Staking and Tying: Install trunk stabilization as follows unless otherwise indicated: 1. All trees to be secured with double lodge poles and double-tied halfway up and again below the first branches.
3.12 ROOT-BARRIER INSTALLATION
A. Install root barrier where trees are planted within 48 inches of paving or other hardscape elements, such as walls, curbs, and walkways, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
B. Align root barrier with bottom edge angled at 20 degrees away from the paving or other hardscape element, and run it linearly along and adjacent to the paving or other hardscape elements to be protected from invasive roots.
C. Install root barrier continuously for a distance of 60 inches in each direction from the tree trunk, for a total distance of 10 feet per tree. If trees are spaced closer, use a single continuous piece of root barrier.
1. Position top of root barrier flush with finish grade. 2. Overlap root barrier a minimum of 12 inches at joints. 3. Do not distort or bend root barrier during construction activities. Vista USD Standards and 32 9000 - 17 LANDSCAPING Specifications
4. Do not install root barrier surrounding the root ball of tree.
3.13 PLACING SOIL IN PLANTERS
A. Place a layer of drainage gravel at least 4 inches thick in bottom of planter. Cover bottom with filter fabric and wrap filter fabric 6 inches up on all sides. Duct tape along the entire top edge of the filter fabric, to secure the filter fabric against the sides during the soil-filling process.
B. Fill planter with planting soil. Place soil in lightly compacted layers to an elevation of 1-1/2 inches below top of planter, allowing natural settlement.
3.14 PLANTING AREA MULCHING
A. Install weed-control barriers before mulching according to manufacturer's written instructions. Completely cover area to be mulched, overlapping edges a minimum of 12 inches and secure seams with galvanized pins.
B. Mulch backfilled surfaces of planting areas and other areas indicated.
1. Trees and Treelike Shrubs in Turf Areas: Apply organic mulch ring of 3-inch average thickness, with 36-inch radius around trunks or stems. Do not place mulch within 6 inches of trunks or stems. 2. Organic Mulch in Planting Areas: Apply 3-inch average thickness of organic mulch extending 12 inches beyond edge of individual planting pit or trench and over whole surface of planting area, and finish level with adjacent finish grades. Do not place mulch within 3 inches of trunks or stems. 3. Mineral Mulch in Planting Areas: Apply 3-inch average thickness of mineral mulch extending 12 inches beyond edge of individual planting pit or trench and over whole surface of planting area, and finish level with adjacent finish grades. Do not place mulch within 3 inches of trunks or stems.
3.15 EDGING INSTALLATION
A. Mow-Strip Installation: 1. To be compliant with District curbing standards.
3.16 TREE GRATE INSTALLATION
A. Tree Grates: Install according to manufacturer's written instructions. Set grate segments flush with adjoining surfaces. Shim from supporting substrate with soil-resistant plastic. Maintain a 3- inch- minimum growth radius around base of tree; break away portions of casting, if necessary, according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.17 PLANT MAINTENANCE
A. Begin maintenance immediately after plants are installed.
B. Maintain plantings by pruning, cultivating, watering, weeding, fertilizing, mulching, restoring planting saucers, adjusting and repairing tree-stabilization devices, resetting to proper grades or Vista USD Standards and 32 9000 - 18 LANDSCAPING Specifications
vertical position, and performing other operations as required to establish healthy, viable plantings.
C. Maintain planting areas in a manner that presents a professionally landscaped appearance at all times.
D. Fill in, as necessary, soil subsidence that may occur because of settling or other processes. Replace mulch materials damaged or lost in areas of subsidence.
E. Apply treatments as required to keep plant materials, planted areas, and soils free of pests and pathogens or disease. Use integrated pest management practices when possible to minimize use of pesticides and reduce hazards. Treatments include physical controls such as hosing off foliage, mechanical controls such as traps, and biological control agents.
F. Frequency of On-Site Plant Maintenance Services: As necessary to comply with requirements, but no less than once each week.
3.18 TURF MAINTENANCE
A. General: Maintain and establish turf by watering, fertilizing, weeding, mowing, trimming, replanting, and performing other operations as required to establish healthy, viable turf. Roll, regrade, and replant bare or eroded areas and re-mulch to produce a uniformly smooth turf. Provide materials and installation the same as those used in the original installation.
1. Fill in as necessary soil subsidence that may occur because of settling or other processes. Replace materials and turf damaged or lost in areas of subsidence. 2. In areas where mulch has been disturbed by wind or maintenance operations, add new mulch and anchor as required to prevent displacement. 3. Apply treatments as required to keep turf and soil free of pests and pathogens or disease. Use integrated pest management practices whenever possible to minimize the use of pesticides and reduce hazards.
B. Watering: Install and maintain temporary piping, hoses, and turf-watering equipment to convey water from sources and to keep turf uniformly moist to a depth of 4 inches.
1. Schedule watering to prevent wilting, puddling, erosion, and displacement of seed or mulch. Lay out temporary watering system to avoid walking over muddy or newly planted areas. 2. Water turf with fine spray at a minimum rate of 1 inch per week unless rainfall precipitation is adequate.
C. Mow turf as soon as top growth is tall enough to cut. Repeat mowing to maintain specified height without cutting more than one-third of grass height. Remove no more than one-third of grass- leaf growth in initial or subsequent mowings. Do not delay mowing until grass blades bend over and become matted. Do not mow when grass is wet. Schedule initial and subsequent mowings to maintain the following grass height:
1. Mow Agrono-Tec 1A Ball Field Mix to a height of 1-1/2 to 2-inch.
D. Turf Post-fertilization: Apply slow-release fertilizer after initial mowing and when grass is dry.
1. Use fertilizer that provides actual nitrogen of at least 1.5 lb/1000 sq. ft. to turf area.
Vista USD Standards and 32 9000 - 19 LANDSCAPING Specifications
3.19 PESTICIDE APPLICATION
A. All pesticide application must be approved in writing by District IPM Coordinator a minimum of 2 weeks prior to proposed application date. Contractor must comply with Healthy School Act and Prop 65.
3.20 PLANT REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT
A. General: Repair or replace existing or new trees and other plants that are damaged by construction operations, in a manner approved by Construction Manager.
1. Submit details of proposed pruning and repairs. 2. Perform repairs of damaged trunks, branches, and roots within 24 hours, if approved. 3. Replace plant materials that cannot be repaired and restored to healthy, long term full- growth status, as determined by Construction Manager, within 14 days after notification, at no additional cost to the District.
A. Remove and replace plant materials that are more than 25 percent dead or in an unhealthy condition before the end of the maintenance period or are damaged during construction operations that Construction Manager determines are incapable of restoring to normal growth pattern, at no additional cost to the District.
1. Provide new plant materials of same size as those being replaced. 2. Species of Replacement Plant Materials: Same species, variety, and/or cultivar being replaced.
3.21 TURF RENOVATION
A. Renovate existing turf where indicated.
B. Renovate turf damaged by Contractor's operations, such as storage of materials or equipment and movement of vehicles.
1. Reestablish turf where settlement or washouts occur or where minor regrading is required. 2. Install new planting soil as required.
C. Remove sod and vegetation from diseased or unsatisfactory turf areas; do not bury in soil.
D. Remove topsoil containing foreign materials, such as oil drippings, fuel spills, stones, gravel, and other construction materials resulting from Contractor's operations, and replace with new planting soil.
E. Mow, dethatch, core aerate, and rake existing turf.
F. Remove weeds before seeding. Where weeds are extensive, apply selective herbicides as required. Do not use pre-emergence herbicides.
G. Remove waste and foreign materials, including weeds, soil cores, grass, vegetation, and turf, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.
H. Till stripped, bare, and compacted areas thoroughly to a soil depth of 6 inches.
Vista USD Standards and 32 9000 - 20 LANDSCAPING Specifications
I. Apply soil amendments and initial fertilizer required for establishing new turf and mix thoroughly into top 4 inches of existing soil. Install new planting soil to fill low spots and meet finish grades. 1. Soil Amendment(s): Per Agronomic Soils Report. 2. Initial Fertilizer: Slow-release fertilizer applied according to manufacturer's recommendations.
J. Apply seed and protect with Agriservice 70/30 topsoil mix or apply sod as directed by Grounds Supervisor.
K. Water newly planted areas and keep moist until new turf is established.
3.22 PLANT CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. During planting, keep adjacent paving and construction clean and work area in an orderly condition. Clean wheels of vehicles before leaving site to avoid tracking soil onto roads, walks, or other paved areas.
B. Remove surplus soil and waste material including excess subsoil, unsuitable soil, trash, and debris and legally dispose of them off District's property.
C. Protect plants from damage due to landscape operations and operations of other contractors and trades. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. Treat, repair, or replace damaged plantings.
D. After installation and before Substantial Completion, remove nursery tags, nursery stakes, tie tape, labels, wire, burlap, and other debris from plant material, planting areas, and Project site.
E. At time of Substantial Completion, verify that tree-watering devices are in good working order and leave them in place. Replace improperly functioning devices.
3.23 TURF CLEANUP AND PROTECTION
A. Promptly remove soil and debris created by turf work from paved areas. Clean wheels of vehicles before leaving site to avoid tracking soil onto roads, walks, or other paved areas.
B. Remove surplus soil and waste material, including excess subsoil, unsuitable soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.
C. Erect temporary fencing or barricades and warning signs as required to protect newly planted areas from traffic. Maintain fencing and barricades throughout initial maintenance period and remove after plantings are established.
D. Remove nondegradable erosion-control measures after grass establishment period.
3.24 PLANT MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Maintenance Service for Plant Materials: Provide maintenance by skilled employees of landscape Installer. Maintain as required in "Plant Maintenance" Article. Begin maintenance immediately after plants are installed and continue until plantings are acceptably healthy and well established, but for not less than maintenance period below:
Vista USD Standards and 32 9000 - 21 LANDSCAPING Specifications
1. Maintenance Period: Three months from date of planting completion. Maintenance period shall not be phased.
2. Extended Maintenance Period: When, in the opinion of the Construction Manager there is improper maintenance, and/or unhealthy or poor condition of plant materials, provide additional on-going maintenance at no additional cost to the District until all work is deemed acceptable by the Construction Manager. 3. End of Maintenance Period: Acceptance by the Construction Manager in writing determines actual completion of the Maintenance Period.
3.25 TURF MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Turf Maintenance Service: Provide full maintenance by skilled employees of landscape Installer. Maintain as required in "Turf Maintenance" Article. Begin maintenance immediately after each area is planted and continue until acceptable turf is established, but for not less than the following periods:
1. Seeded Turf: 120 days from date of planting completion.
a. When initial maintenance period has not elapsed before end of planting season, or if turf is not fully established, continue maintenance during next planting season.
2. Sodded Turf: 60 days from date of planting completion.
3.26 SATISFACTORY TURF
A. Turf installations shall meet the following criteria as determined by Architect:
1. Satisfactory Seeded Turf: At end of maintenance period, a healthy, uniform, close stand of grass has been established, free of weeds and surface irregularities, with coverage exceeding 90 percent over any 10 sq. ft. and bare spots not exceeding 5 by 5 inches. 2. Satisfactory Sodded Turf: At end of maintenance period, a healthy, well-rooted, even- colored, viable turf has been established, free of weeds, open joints, bare areas, and surface irregularities.
B. Use specified materials to reestablish turf that does not comply with requirements, and continue maintenance until turf is satisfactory.
Vista USD Standards and 32 9000 - 22 LANDSCAPING Specifications
District: Vista Unified School District Project: VMMS Pool Upgrade Contractor: District: Vista Unified School District Project: VMMS Pool Upgrade Contractor: